Home

Administrator`s Manual SL/T5R Energy Saver RFID

Contents

1. ETHERNET PARAMS from page 93 NetBIOS ASCII Data IPDS Data Keep Alive Ethernet Job Control Protocol Port Port Timer Speed Enable 9100 5001 3 Minutes Auto Select Standard Disable 1025 65535 1025 65535 0 10 Minutes 10 Half Duplex Enhanced 10 Full Duplex Fast Standard 100 Half Duplex Off 100 Full Duplex Offline Process Disable Enable Notes Factory Default 1 Set the port number that works with your host system 2 This menu appears only if the IPDS security key is used 246 ETHERNET PARAMS Submenus ETHERNET PARAMS Submenus NetBIOS Protocol e Enable factory default The NIC will respond to the NetBIOS protocol e Disable The NIC does not recognize the NetBIOS protocol ASCII Data Port This option allows you to set the port number for ASCII print jobs The data port number needs to match your host system setting The range is 1025 65535 and the factory default is 9100 IPDS Data Port IPDS emulation only This option allows you to set the port number for IPDS print jobs The range is 1025 65536 and the factory default is 5001 Keep Alive Timer This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run Keep in mind that with the Keep Alive Timer on the tcp connection will stay connected even after the print job has terminated if the host system does not close the connection The range is 0 10 minutes and the fa
2. yi4 PROPRINTER SETUP t page 178 Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Character Group Character Set Horizontal DPI Vertical DPI Prop Spacing Italic Print Slashed Zero Left Margin 3 Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Print Char Set Define CR code Auto LF Define LF code 20 CPI Condensed Bold FF valid at TOF Alt Char Set Text Position Host Command Reset Cmd CFG Ld Form Length inches Form Length mm 34 Form Length lines 4 Form Width inches 32 Form Width mm Form Width char 3 34 Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 2 The presence of this menu depends on the LP Emulation selection under PRINTER CONTROL 3 These menus do not display when CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 4 All three Form Length submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default value in the other two submenus change automatically 5 All three Form Width submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default value in the other two submenus change automatically 6 The precence of this menu depends on the LP Emulation selection under PRINTER CONTROL 90 EPSON FX DIAGNOSTICS PARALLEL SERIAL SETUP 45 PORT PORT page 180 page 225 page 229 page 233 Select CPI Printe
3. 2 You can change the unit value from inches to millimeters under Units in MEDIA CONTROL when Admin User is enabled 3 Based on the current value setting for the Label Length in QUICK SETUP up to a maximum of 12 80 inches 4 Maximum value depends on the width of the printer model see Appendix A Specifications 5 Gap Mark Sensor and Paper Out Sensor work in conjunction as shown in Table 6 on page 127 If you change the Gap Mark Sensor or Paper Out Sensor you must recalibrate the media Appears only if a validator is installed 7 This menu will not appear on Direct Thermal only printers 8 xxx represents the emulation name selected in the Active IGP Emul menu The options in this menu vary and are described on page 140 95 Chapter 3 QUICK SETUP 96 Notes QUICK SETUP con d from page 95 SMT Status PAA Select Tool 9 Disable None Enable CST 1 CST 2 Factory Default 8 Appears only if RFID is installed and there is no CST bundle in the Flash File System 3 Appears only if RFID is not installed and there is a CST bundle in the Flash File System QUICK SETUP Submenus Print Intensity This option specifies the level of thermal energy from the printhead to be used for the type of media and ribbon installed Large numbers imply more heat thermal energy to be applied for each dot This has a significant effect on print quality The print intensity and speed must match the media a
4. Press or J to cycle through the values available for that character at the cursor location Press to move to the next character to be modified Press to go back to a character you have already modified Continue until you have entered the name you want to give to this configuration then press to save The name you entered will now represent this configuration on the printer s front panel To exit this menu without saving press any key other than The configuration name will revert to the last saved value The factory default is 1 Reset Cfg Names You can reset specific configuration names back to the default value of the configuration number The options are 1 to 8 and All The factory default is 1 Auto Save e Enable factory default When a change has been made to a Config menu this option automatically prompts the user to save or not save the change to a Config If you are currently in the Factory Config menus and make a change pressing Enter saves to Config 1 or the next available Config and becomes the Power Up Config If the Current Config is Config 1 anda menu change is made pressing Enter will save the change to Config 1 e Disable The printer will not prompt you to save any changes made MEDIA CONTROL CONFIG CONTROL Submenus MEDIA CONTROL from page 85 Print Print Print Media Paper Label Intensity Speed Mode Handling Feed Length 7
5. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tih cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE 388 IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT L
6. will display NOTE If there is data pending data in buffer when the head open fault is cleared Auto Cal and Seek TOF are ignored 131 Chapter 3 132 CALIBRATE CTRL Online Auto Cal NOTE Online Auto Cal will not function when the validator is enabled or when Error Recover under MEDIA CONTROL is enabled see page 122 if there is data pending data in buffer The options for Online Auto Cal are e Disable factory default e Enable Whenever the printer is brought online it automatically performs an Auto Calibrate see Auto Calibrate on page 128 Once the Auto Calibrate is complete the printer momentarily displays the Sensed Distance determined by the Auto Calibrate and then resumes printing any pending jobs NOTE If using the Online Auto Cal feature you must first enable it prior to printing any data NOTE If Ticket Save mode is enabled you will not be able to set Online Auto Cal to Enable A temporary message Disable Ticket Save Mode will display Gap Windowing This feature compensates for any early falling edges or spurious peaks and troughs that may appear within the gap length in media These edges or peaks and troughs can cause unreliable detection of the leading edge of the next label top of form Use Gap Windowing to resolve the following problems e Loss of one or more complete serialized labels e Start of an image printed in the middle of a gap especially with fanfold
7. 3 6 ips Transfer Tear Off Strip 0 00 inches 2 4 or 6 inches 2 4 15 to 15 1 to 10 ips Direct Tear Off 1 00 to Xinches 00 1 to 99 0 inches Peel Off Cut Continuous E Label Width 4 1 6 6 or 8 5 inches 2 4 00 1 to 8 5 inches 4 Ver Image Hor Image Orientation Auto Map Shift Shift Select 0 00 inches 0 00 inches 2 Portrait Disable 1 00 to X inches 8 1 00 to 1 00 inches Landscape Enable Inv Portrait Inv Landscape Auto Label Width 4 1 6 6 or 8 5 inches 4 2 labels 00 1 to 8 5 inches 4 Num Auto Slew Speed Print Direction Label Wait Labels Time Automatic Head First 0 1 second 2 to 40 labels Manual Foot First 0 1 to 60 0 seconds 6 ips 1 to 10 ips 4 L Pre Peel Pre Peel Lbl Missing Clip Page Error Ribbon Mode Adjust Fit Recover Width Disable 1 00 inches Full Label Enable Disable Same as Paper Enable 0 00 to 2 00 inches Early Detect Disable Enable Set in Menu Disable Display Ribbon Rbn Takeup Units Set Label _ Peel p Ribbon Low Full Length Present Enable Disable Enable In Inches Manual Next TOF Disable Enable Disable In Millimeters Automatic End Of Form End Of Image Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available when Admin User is set to Enab
8. Clears entries in the error log FLASH Installed Displays the amount of FLASH memory installed in megabytes DRAM Installed Displays the amount of DRAM installed in megabytes Ptr On Time Displays the cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on This value is set to zero at the factory 227 Chapter 3 228 DIAGNOSTICS Ptr Media Dist Displays the cumulative number of inches the printer has moved media This value is set to zero at the factory Head Print Dist Displays the length of media actually printed since the last Reset Head Data operation This value is set to zero at the factory Head On Time Displays the time that power has been applied to the printhead since the last Reset Head Data operation This value is set to zero at the factory Reset Head Data Resets all printhead statistics values Head Prt Dist and Head On Time to zero Head Type Displays the printhead type installed in dots per inch 203 dpi or 300 dpi PARALLEL PORT DIAGNOSTICS Submenus PARALLEL PORT from page 91 Port Type Data Bit 8 PI Ignored Buffer Size Auto Trickle Trickle in K Time IEEE 1284 Enable Enable 16 Disable 1 4 sec Disable Disable Disable 1 16 Enable 1 2 sec Centronics 32 1 sec E Net Adapter 64 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec 16 sec Off T
9. Factory Default Although these options are listed vertically here use your plus and minus keys to cycle through the options when you are operating your printer 167 Chapter 3 _PGL SETUP PGL SETUP PGL SETUP from page 87 Character Standard Select LPI Define CR Define LF Autowrap Group Sets Code Code Standard Sets 0 ASCII 6 CR CR LF LF Disable Arabic Sets 1 German 1 to 1000 CR CR LF LF CR LF Enable Cyrillic Sets 2 Swedish European Sets 3 Danish Greek Sets 4 Norwegian Hebrew Sets 5 Finnish Turkish Sets 6 English UTF 8 7 Dutch See page 189 8 French 9 Spanish 10 Italian 11 Turkish 12 CP 437 13 CP 850 14 15 Reserved 16 23 Dwn Overlay 21 31 User Def Auto Slash 0 Select SFCC Host Form Var Form Var Form Uppercase Length Adjust Type Disable Disable 126 Enable Add Nothing Enable Enable 1 to 255 Var Length Add 0 Var Dynamic Len Add X Disable Optimized PI Slew CR Edit Skip Cmd Ignore Text Poweron Ratio Range Prefix IGP PGL Disable 16 Disable Enable Disable Enable Enable 15 Enable Disable Enable Disable E Ext Execute AI 00 Select SO Ignore Mode Select Char Do FF Copy Spaces Char At TOF Disable Disable 14 Disable 0 Enable Enable Enab
10. Form Width char The forms width can be specified as a function of the current CPI characters per inch The forms width set should not exceed the actual paper width The factory default is the maximum printing width divided by the selected number of characters per inch Form Width in In this submenu form width is specified in inches The form width set should not exceed the actual paper width The factory default is the maximum printing width Emulation Submenus Form Width mm In this submenu form width is specified in millimeters The form width set should not exceed the actual paper width The factory default is the maximum printing width Forms Handling This submenu allows the user to handle the form in the following ways e Disable factory default No effect e Auto Eject Automatically ejects a page at the end of the job to spill out the last page e Auto TOF Automatically does a form feed FF at the end of each form to the next top of form Format Control Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed e Disable factory default Reflects distance generated by the VGL feature PGL feature and Hex Transparent control code sequence in the new position after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed e Enable Does not reflect distance generated by the VGL feature PGL feature and Hex Transparent control code seque
11. Text is printed normally e Forward Slant Text is printed with a forward slant e Backward Slant Text is printed with a backward slant LAC Approx This item controls whether or not the LAC Approximation is used See the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual When set to On then Approximation is used When set to Off Approximation is not used and incoming data will print as is The factory default is On 207 Chapter 3 _EPSONFXSETUP LAC Option Allows the host system to load alternate character images into the printer This may be used for designing graphics bar codes and charts or for printing in foreign languages e Enable factory default Prints the LAC character as defined e Disable Ignores the LAC definition from the host and prints from the currently selected character set Last Char FF Determines the print line position when a Form Feed FF command is the last code encountered in the print buffer e On factory default Moves to the first print position on the second line of the next form e Off Moves to the first print position on the first line of the next form NOTE This option is ignored if Auto Skip At End is on If configured as a 3287 and a form feed occurs in the middle of a print buffer the printer defaults to the first print position on the second line of the next form regardless of the setting of this option Lead PDF Dist Adjusts the leading and trailing character spacing di
12. Vertical Gap and Rounded Die cut Label Corners Black Mark underside of media Media Guard Opening Positioning the Media Sensors Sensing Media with Horizontal Black Marks Mark or Media with No Label Length Indicators Disable Visible Red Beam from Lower Sensor RSs aan YARN Lower Sensor ee A or 7 132 NN S gae AZ SAK Sensor Handle Sensing Media with Horizontal Black Marks Position the lower media sensor for detecting horizontal black marks located on the underside of media and position the upper sensor above the lower sensor to provide a consistent background 1 4 Check the position of the sensor by looking through the long narrow opening in the media guard Use the visible red light emitting from the lower sensor as a reference pointer Use the sensor handle to manually position the sensor to the center of the black mark on the media Select Mark in the Gap Mark Sensor submenu under the CALIBRATE CTRL menu See Sensing Different Media Types on page 59 Perform an Auto Calibrate See Running Auto Calibrate on page 60 Sensing Media with No Label Length Indicators 1 3 When using media without label length indicators no gaps notches holes or marks or when you want to ignore all existing length indicators place the lower sensor in the center of the media so it can detect when a Paper Out condition exists Also set the upper sensor above it Select D
13. ASCII 40 Bits 252 Notes Factory Default 4 This menu appears only if WEP Key 1 Width is set to 128 Bits WLAN PARAMS Submenus WLAN PARAMS from page 252 __ WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 BYTES BTYE6 BYTE7 BYTE8 BYTE9 BYTE10 E WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 Default WEP Reset WEP WPA BYTE11 BYTE12 BYTE13 Key Keys Mode 0 Disable 1 4 Personal Enterprise WPA WPA WPA WPA Reset WPA Cipher P Phs 01 15 P Phs 16 30 P Phs 31 32 P Phs TKIP XXX AES TKIP AES Disable Notes Factory Default 4 This menu appears only if WEP Key 1 Width is set to 128 Bits This menu appears only if a Symbol LA5127 RF card is installed WLAN PARAMS Submenus Signal Strength This menu displays the strength of the wireless signal NOTE This is a display value only and cannot be changed Operation Mode Allows you to select the way the Wireless option communicates e Infrastructure factory default The Wireless option must go through an Access Point e Pseudo IBSS Proprietary peer to peer communication without an Access Point The two peers must be specific to one manufacturer e Ad Hoc Standard peer to peer com
14. Auto Switching 1 minute Enable English On Online Centronics 5 minutes Disable German Cont Beep Offline Serial 10 minutes French Off IEEE 1284 15 minutes Italian Twinax 30 minutes Spanish Coax 1 45 minutes Portuguese Ethernet 60 minutes USB 240 minutes PTX Setup Cancel Key Rev Status Ret Status Compatibility Del Char SFCC Port Port m C fm rls M 21h Disable Automatic Automatic Default 01 FF Enable Serial Serial Laser E Net Stat Port P5000 USB T3000 IEEE 1284 T1006 Disable E Net Data Port Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Appears only if the CTHI option is installed 2 When Coax Twinax interface is installed the factory default is Enable 3 Appears only if RFID is installed and there is no CST bundle in the Flash File System 4 Appears only if RFID is not installed and there is a CST bundle in the Flash File System 5 xxx represents the emulation name selected in the Active IGP Emul menu The options in this menu vary and are described on page 140 135 Chapter 3 PRINTER CONTROL from page 135 PRINTER CONTROL Ld Char from Fls Save Char __ Del Char __ Ld Char at __ to Fls frm RAM PwrUp Disable Enable Del Set frm Fish Ld Set from Fish Save Set to Fish Del
15. Printronix Supplies Department ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeees 371 Corporate Offices ceeecceeececeeeeeeneeceeeeeseaeeeeaaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeseneeteaees 372 Hy Glossary ess tal E 373 J Communication Notices and Warranties eee 379 Communication Notices c ccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeesaaeeneneeeeeeeess 382 Software License Agreement ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeees 385 Warranty Information ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeeeseaas 392 1 Introduction The SL T5R Energy Saver Family of Printers NOTE As used in this manual the terms T5R and printer refer to all models within the series SL refers to all SmartLine RFID models The SL T5R Energy Saver series consists of a family of high quality direct thermal and thermal transfer printers specifically designed for printing labels and tags from any MS DOS Windows ASCII or EBCDIC with the Coax Twinax option based compatible computer The T5R Smart Ready and SmartLine series are comprised of the products detailed in Table 1 NOTE All 4 models are Smart Ready Table 1 The T5R Smart Ready and SmartLine Series Version Max Print Printing l Max Print Speed ips Density dpi Width inches T5204R 10 203 4 1 T5204R DT 10 203 4 1 SL5204R 10 203 4 1 T5304R 8 300 4 1 T5304R DT 8 300 4 1 SL5304R 8 300 4 1 SL5304R 8 300 4 1 T5206R 10 203 6 6
16. SETMENU POWERUP Value Menu_tag Menu_tag is the name of the menu as defined in the menu file Value is the value to which the menu is to be set Sets the power up configuration to Cfg and loads Configuration Cfg Cfg can be any value from 0 8 where 0 is the factory default Print Configuration Cfg Cfg can be a number 1 8 or one of four pre defined configurations The four non numeric configurations are requested using the first character for the CURRENT FACTORY POWERUP or ALL configuration s DELETE UPLOAD Port Cfg Deletes Configuration number Cfg Cfg must be in the range of 1 8 This command uploads the configuration stored in location Cfg to the port specified by Port Port must either be 1284 or SERIAL Cfg may be 1 8 or ALL DOWNLOAD This command saves the configuration data that follows as configuration Cfg Cfg must be 1 8 or END 363 Appendix G The PTX_SETUP Commands Table 32 General PTX_SETUP Commands Command Sub Command Parameter Description CONFIG OVERLAY Cig RESET This command overlays the configuration data that follows on existing configuration Cfg Cfg must be 1 8 or END If Cfg does not exist then command is treated the same as DOWNLOAD Reboots the printer GET_NAMES Port SET_NAME Cig CLEAR_NAMES This command uploads the names of the configurations to the port specified by Port Port must either be 1284 o
17. SL5206R 10 203 6 6 T5306R 8 300 6 6 SL5306R 8 300 6 6 T5208R 8 203 8 5 T5308R 6 300 8 5 Direct Thermal only 4 inch models no ribbon transfer support Chapter 1 The SL T5R Energy Saver Family of Printers Standard Features e 64MB DRAM memory fixed e 16MB Flash memory fixed e Auto Label Mapping For compatibility with programs written for Printronix line matrix printers e Bar Codes Supports over 20 types of bar codes e Download Fonts forms and graphics to printer memory e Emulations e Printronix LinePrinter Plus LP Provides direct compatibility with Printronix P Series printers Epson FX 1050 Proprinter IIIXL and Serial Matrix Printers e Printronix PGL Provides printer system commands for text barcodes graphics lines and boxes e Printronix VGL Emulates the QMS Code V Version II programming language to produce on line forms bar codes and alphanumeric text generation in both normal and high resolution e ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL and IEGL Interpreters ZGL Zebra TGL TEC IGL Intermec STGL SATO DGL Datamax MGL Monarch and IEGL IER interpreters are powerful integration tools that allow the SL T5R to function in virtually all legacy ZPL TEC IPL SATO DPL MPCL II and IER application environments without requiring modification to host data stream e High Resolution Printhead For sharp graphics and text Label Taken Sensor
18. did not get printed within a multi label If the serial interface is being used verify that the correct data protocol is selected to match the host interface print job protocol e A portion of the printed 2 If Clip Page Enable in the MEDIA CONTROL menu the image was clipped off printer may have falsely detected a gap hole or black and the beginning of the mark and then clipped discarded the remaining printable next label was printed on data for the label To fix this me same prysieallanel a Perform Auto Calibrate See Running Auto Calibrate on page 60 b Decrease Gap Threshold value by 2 or 3 increments See Gap Mark Thresh on page 129 c Set Clip Page to Disable Set Label Length to correct physical length value See Clip Page on page 121 Media moves but no image 1 Make sure the J402 power supply cable has a good prints in ONLINE mode connection to the right side of the printhead 2 Place the printer offline and print the Checkerboard diagnostic test pattern see page 226 If the pattern prints there is a communication problem between the host computer and the printer Media moves but no image 1 Media is not the type for direct thermal printing Install prints in Direct Thermal direct thermal media mode 2 Direct thermal media is installed wrong side up Reinstall the media with the correct side facing the printhead Media and ribbon move but 1 Print the Checkerboard diagnostic t
19. e Disable factory default The printer ignores all carriage returns that are not followed by line feeds e Enable The printer processes all carriage returns even for those that are not followed by line feeds Emulation Submenus CR EM amp NL CR Carriage Return EM Error Message amp NL New Line specify that the printer treat the CR EM and NL control codes either as spaces or as control codes e On factory default Treats the CR EM and NL commands as control codes e Off Treats the CR EM and NL commands as spaces Data Bit 8 e Enable factory default The PI line is not passed directly from host to printer all 8 bits are used for data bits and characters in the hex 80 FF range can be accessed e Disable When the host PI line is enabled data bit 8 internally indicates PI line status To use the PI line disable data bit 8 and enable the Host PI configuration option under the PI Ignored option NOTE Data bit 8 is interpreted as either data bit 8 or PI signal but never both When enabled as data bit 8 data bit 8 has priority over the Pl signal and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data and not to interpret PI line data Conversely when data bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used data bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function and you cannot access characters in the hex 80 FF range Therefore to access characters in the hex 80 FF range data bit 8 must be en
20. is NL At Position __ Last Char FF __ Null Req MPP 1 MPP 1 Aft FF Suppression Send To Host On On Off On off Do Not Send Off Off On Off On FF Validity Auto Skip FF After Job __ CR EM amp NL Translate Host At End Table Override Off Off Off On Default Disable On On On Off Downloaded Enable Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 This menu appears only if the CTHI option is installed 2 This menu appears only if Port Type under C T PORT is set to Coax 3 This menu appears only if the CTHI emulation under PRINTER CONTROL is set to Standard 4 When in SPC Mode the default is Enable 153 Chapter 3 154 Right to Left Notes Factory Default COAX SETUP COAX SETUP from page 153 Format Cancel Lead in User User User Control IGP DCU Chars Defined St 1 Defined St 2 Defined St Disable Enable User Defined 5F 5F 5B Enable Disable Set 1 lt gt 40 to FF 40 to FF 40 to FF Set 2 34 Set 3_ _ Change _ Set Text J Max Print Case Orientn Width Dual Case Control By Host 13 2 inches Mono Case Left to Right Printer Width Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINT
21. is received from the host e User Defined factory default e Set1 lt gt e Set 2 e Set3_ _ SFCC d command This menu option is for backward compatibility e Even dot plot factory default This option interprets the SFCC d command as even dot plot e Double high This option interprets the SFCC d command as double high Select this option for backward compatibility 217 Chapter 3 218 EPSON FX SETUP Skip Cmd Prefix Stands for Skip Command Prefix This parameter determines if the printer will print any data before a PGL command is received e Enable factory default The printer ignores all data before a PGL command e Disable The printer will print all data before a PGL command Slash 0 This parameter allows you to print the numeral 0 with or without the slash This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B e Disable factory default Zero is printed without a slash e Enable Zero is printed with a slash Slashed Zero This parameter allows you to print the numeral 0 with or without the slash This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B e Disable factory default Zero is printed without a slash e Enable Zero is printed with a slash Slew Relative Slewing is rapid vertical paper movement This parameter determines the number of lines slewed either 1 15 lines or 1 16 lines when an EVFU Slew Relative command is received The optio
22. only with the transfer of the printer on which the Software is used If you do so you must give the other party a copy of these terms and provide all user documentation to that party When you do so you must destroy any copies of Software not resident in the printer Your license for the Software terminates when you no longer rightfully possess the printer No other rights under this license are granted 2 Source Code A source code version of eCos Software is available under the terms of a modified version of the GNU General Public License GPL located under PCM eCos 2 0 at www printronix com Printronix grants no rights whatsoever in the source code for the Printronix Software 3 No Warranty THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES THAT THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGING THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU SHOULD ANY OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT YOU NOT RED HAT PRINTRONIX ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE NO USE OF ANY OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER 38
23. the 4 and keys are pressed at the same time The Set Lock Key parameter lets you choose different keys to lock or unlock the printer menu You may choose almost any group of keys as the new lock and unlock keys You cannot use the key or any key combinations which are already used for another function There is no limit to how many keys can be selected To set the new lock key 1 Goto the PRINTER CONTROL main menu and select Set Lock Key 2 Press 1 The display reads Select a new lock key 3 Press the combination of keys that you want to be the new lock key Make sure you press all keys selected at the same time PRINTER CONTROL Submenus 4 Ifthe selection is valid the display will read Enter the new lock key again Press the same combination of keys a second time If the selection is invalid the display will read Invalid key selection Return to step 2 and start over 5 If the new lock key combination is entered again correctly the display will read Lock key has been changed If it was entered incorrectly the display will read Validation failed Start over at step 1 6 After entering the new lock combination successfully press the PAUSE key to put the printer back online NOTE The new lock combination will remain even if the printer is powered off and back on PTX Setup Parse e Enable factory default Will parse and execute the PTX SETUP commands e Ignore Will parse the
24. 1 168 0 or 215 9 mm 41 66 or 85 characters 00 0 345 4 mm 0 to 272 characters Notes Factory Default 1 When the CTHI option is installed the factory default is Printable 2 All three Form Length submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically 3 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 4 The factory default value depends on the width of the printer model 5 All three Form Width submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically 177 Chapter 3 PROPRINTER XL SETUP PROPRINTER XL SETUP PROPRINTER XL SETUP 3 from page 90 178 Notes Factory Default Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Character Character Horizontal Group Set DPI 10 0 CPI 6 0 LPI Letter Gothic Standard Sets Code Page 437 120 DPI 12 0 CPI 8 0 LPI Courier Arabic Sets Code Page 850 60 to 400 DPI 13 3 CPI 10 3 LPI OCR A Cyrillic Sets OCR A 15 0 CPI OCR B European Sets OCR B_ 17 1 CPI Greek Sets Multinational 20 0 CPI Hebrew Sets CP 858 EURO Turkish Sets UTF 8 See page 192 Vertical Prop Italic Slashed Left DPI Spacing Print Zero Margin 72 DPI Enable Disab
25. 1 When the CTHI option is installed the factory default is Printable 00 0 345 4 mm 2 All three Form Length submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically 3 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 4 The factory default value depends on the width of the printer model 5 All three Form Width submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically 181 Chapter 3 182 EPSON FX SETUP Emulation Submenus NOTE The following descriptions are grouped together for all emulations and are listed in alphabetical order The emulations do not include ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL and IEGL See individual Programmer s Reference Manuals for more information ADnn Dot Slew e Low Resolution factory default Sets the dot slew command dot values to be interpreted as 60 dpi P Series dots e High Resolution Sets the dot slew command dot values to be interpreted as print engine dots 20 CPI Condensed Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount of information on a page e Enable factory default Prints about 60 of the width of normal characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer e Disable D
26. 203 or 300 DPI of the installed printhead The default power on state is online Once the printer has successfully initialized the ONLINE status indicator light illuminates and the LCD indicates the communication interface selected and the emulation selected If there is a fault during the self test the ONLINE status indicator flashes and a fault message appears on the display The alarm may also sound if configured to do so Operating Modes The current operating mode can be selected through the control panel keys or can result from routine operations such as powering on the printer Online In online mode the printer can receive and print data sent from the host Pressing the PAUSE key toggles the printer between the online and offline modes The ONLINE status indicator is lit in online mode Offline In offline mode you can perform operator functions such as loading media or changing ribbon Pressing the PAUSE key toggles the printer from offline to online mode The ONLINE status indicator is not illuminated in offline mode Menu Pressing the MENU key takes the printer offline and into Menu mode In this mode you can navigate through all configuration and status menus and change the printer configuration Fault In fault mode a fault condition exists that must be cleared before printing can continue The ONLINE status indicator flashes the alarm beeps if configured to do so and a descriptive fault message displays
27. 4 mm 99 in 2515 mm 1 in minimum 25 4 mm 99 in 2515 mm These figures are approximate and depend upon the active emulation and application 1 4 5 inch with validator support 335 Appendix A 336 Ribbon Table 22 Ribbon Specifications T5X04 T5X06 T5X08 SL5X04 SL5X06 Ribbon Width Range 0 75 4 5 in 2 0 6 8 in 3 0 8 75 in 19 114 3mm 50 8 172 7 mm 76 2 222 25 mm Max Ribbon Length m 625 625 625 Max Ribbon Roll 3 60 in 3 60 in 3 60 in Diameter Indicators and Switches Table 23 Indicators and Switches Indicator Lights ONLINE Job In Process Switches POWER Keys PAUSE JOB SELECT Decrement FEED T Up TEST PRINT Increment Menu X Cancel 4 Down Enter Message Display 2 row 16 characters per row for error messages print status and recalling stored formats Memory Table 24 Memory Specifications Flash Memory standard 16MB soldered onto Controller PCBA DRAM standard 64MB soldered onto Controller PCBA Media Cutter Option Cutters are designed to cut tags and label liner Avoid cutting through the adhesive backed portion of any media Cutting through perforate liner is not recommended In addition although the cutter may operate with synthetic foil and woven materials application testing is encouraged to ensure reliable operation and to assess cutter life Cutter The cutter is designed to c
28. 5 1 EEE 1284 Parallel Interface Table 14 IEEE 1284 Signals continued Type of Mode Pin Source of Data Compatible Nibble Byte 26 Signal Ground Data 7 27 Signal Ground Data 8 28 Signal Ground PError Select nAck 29 Signal Ground Busy nFault 30 Signal Ground nAutoFd nSelectin ninit 31 Host ninit 32 Printer NFault nDataAvail aDataAvail 33 Not Defined 34 Not Defined 35 Not Defined 36 Host nSelectin 1284 Active 1284 Active NOTE The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer should not exceed 32 feet 10 meters Host Clock nWrite Driven by the host Data is transferred from the host to the printer When the printer sends data two types are available If it is Nibble Mode the signal is set high If it is Byte Mode the signal is set low Data 1 through Data 8 These pins are host driven in Compatibility Mode and bidirectional in Byte Mode They are not used in Nibble Mode Data 1 is the least significant bit Data 8 is the most significant bit Printer Clock Peripheral Clock Interrupt Driven by the printer A signal from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data transfer Printer Busy Peripheral Acknowledge nWait Driven by the printer Indicates the printer cannot receive data Data bits 4 and 8 in Nibble Mode Acknowledge Data Request nAcknowledge Reverse Driven b
29. Euro Fren 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice Secondary Sets English US English UK Austrian German German Alt Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish Norweg Danish Alt Finnish Swedish Finnish Alt French International Italian Japanese Eng Japanese Katak Portuguese Portug Alt Spanish Spanish Alt Spanish Speak Swiss Fren Ger Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Turkish Old Latin 2 ROECE Yugoslavian Notes Factory Default Although these options are listed vertically here use your plus and minus keys to cycle through the options when you are operating your printer 165 Chapter 3 _TN5250 SETUP TN5250 SETUP 166 5250 SETUP from page 87 Primary Translation Active Char Secondary Sets Lead in User Sets Tbl Set Chars Defined Stl See page 167 Secondary Set See page 167 Set 1 lt gt 5F Primary Set Set 2 40 to FF Set3_ _ User Defined User User Alt Graphic Graphic Set Text Defined St2 Defined Stp Set 80 9F Chek Err Chek Cod Orientn 5F 5B Printable Enable 60 Left to Right 40 to FF 40 to FF Control Code Disable 40 to FE Right to Left Host Format Max Print Override Control Width Disable Disable 13 2 inches Enable Enable Printer Width Notes Factory Default Italicized items
30. Feature Hex Dump Auto Tests Build File 4 Mode Dump Auto Calibrate Continuous XXXXXXVer XXX XXXXXX XXX Disable Disable Checkerboard 1 Page Enable Enable Grey 2 Pages Grid 5 Pages Current Config 10 Pages Left Test Right Test Combo Test Ethernet Test Barcode Demo Novram Err Log ODV RFID Report E Print Error Clear Error FLASH DRAM Ptr On time Ptr Media Log Log Installed Installed Dist XX Megabytes XX Megabytes XXX X Hours XXXXX inches j Head Print Head On Reset Head Head Type Dist Time Data XXXXXinches XX X Hours XXX DPI Factory Default 1 Appears only if the validator and or RFID encoder is installed 2 You cannot change this value it is a display only item 3 The menu appears only if a feature file has been downloaded to the printer 225 Chapter 3 226 DIAGNOSTICS DIAGNOSTICS Submenus Printer Tests The printer tests below allow you to check for proper printer operation and print quality e Auto Calibrate factory default Senses paperout perforation gap or mark and calibrates the printer for the currently installed media e Checkerboard This pattern helps identify marginal printhead elements quality of edge sharpness and uneven print quality e Grey This pattern helps identify burned out printhead elements and uneven print quality e Grid This pattern helps identify edge
31. IEGL Both emulation sets include the LP emulation They are offered in two file formats exe and prg Use exe files to download through the parallel port 10 Identify which emulation set you want to download into the printer and note the filename that corresponds to that emulation The filename is a six digit number plus exe For example 123456 exe This is the file you will download into the printer 11 Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 7 12 Start a command prompt session The Start Menu icon is usually labeled MS DOS Prompt or Command Prompt 13 At the command prompt type c lt Enter gt cd download lt Enter gt 274 14 Enter the following command filename exe pb lt Enter gt where filename exe is the file name you noted in step 10 This command takes the file on the hard drive and copies it as a binary file into the flash memory on the printer controller board 15 After the software successfully downloads into flash memory the printer will reset itself 16 If you have an external NIC a Set the printer power switch to O Off b Connect the external NIC to the parallel port c Connect the ethernet cable to the NIC d Starting at step 4 page 270 repeat the Downloading Software through the NIC using FTP procedure Or use the two key method to download software again This ensures that all necessary code downloads into printer memory Using TrueType Fonts Tr
32. IGP X00 compatible Alt Char Set e Set 1 factory default Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as acontrol code e Set 2 Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F Alt Set 80 9F P Series Serial Matrix Epson FX e Control Code Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code e Printable Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F The factory default is Control Code However when the CTHI option is installed the factory default is Printable 183 Chapter 3 184 EPSON FX SETUP Alt Set 80 9F Coax Twinax TN3270 TN5250 e Printable factory default Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F e Control Code Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code Append Rotated e Disable factory default Logos and alphanumeric strings are treated as separate elements e Enable Appends logos to an alphanumeric string rotated in a clockwise counterclockwise or inverted orientation Auto FF at 4PN When enabled an FF will be generated automatically to slew to the end of form when the PN command is encountered and when the current vertical position is not at the top of form The options are Disable factory default and Enable Auto LF P Series P Series XQ This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting e Disable factory default Discards any data past the for
33. Ld Set at PwrUp Overwrite Files View File List Delete Files Flash Avail Optimize amp Reboot continued in next column Print File List Auto Locking Set Lock Key Ptx Setup Parse PJL Enable Page Mem Adjust Max Font Buffer Max Cache Memory Max Cached Char Standard Chars Bold Chars Extra Bold Char OCR A Chars OCR B_ Chars Tall Characters Batch Counter Feed Key Online Admin User Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Gap Mark Sensor and Paper Out Sensor work in conjunction as shown in Table 6 on page 127 If you change the Gap Mark Sensor or Paper Out Sensor you must recalibrate the media Appears only if the CTHI option is installed 3 This menu will not appear on Direct Thermal only printers 4 This menu appears only if RFID is installed and there is no CST bundle in the Flash File System 5 This menu appears only if RFID is not installed and there is a CST bundle in the Flash File System Menu available if CTHI option and IPDS option are not installed 7 xxx represents the emulation name selected in the Active IGP Emul menu 85 Lead in Chars User Defined St1 User Defined St2 5 User Defined Stp 2 Change Case Set Text Orientn Max Print Width NOTES Chapter 3 _ Main Menu COAX TWINAX SPC COAX SPC TWINAX SETUP 2 3 7 SETUP 3 7 SETUP 2 3 4 SETUP 2 3 4 page 153 page 156 page 158 pag
34. Length value equal to the physical length of the installed label must be entered in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu e 3 Labels factory default The printer displays a Gap Not Detected fault and stops printing when media has advanced a distance equal to three or more times the Label Length value set in menu e 9Labels e 1 Label Ticket Save Mode This option determines the action of the media for Continuous std Tear Off Tear Off Strip and Cut Media Handling Modes after the printer is first powered up or after the printhead has been opened and then closed When enabled this option eliminates wasting label s or ticket stock when the printer advances media to search for the next TOF position Enable The printer will assume that media is at the TOF position after cycling power or after the printhead is opened and then closed When a print job is sent it is printed without advancing media to search for the next TOF position NOTE The user must ensure that media is at the correct TOF position cross perforation liner gap notch or mark at the tear bar edge before cycling power or before closing and locking the pivoting deck In addition media must be calibrated and the correct Media Handling Mode Label Length and Gap Mark Sensor selected and saved as the Power Up Config Option applies to 5 inch or longer label lengths only e Disable factory default The printer assumes that the media is not at the correct TOF positi
35. Lip Cutter Tray Lip Figure 2 Placing the Media Tray Cutter in Position Position the output area of the printer adjacent to the edge of the supporting table or stand Open the media cover and slide the lip of the media cutter tray over the lip of the printer base pan 356 183427a r ka y Cutter Tray Figure 3 Installing the Media Cutter Tray 3 Rotate the media cutter tray into position with the tray resting against the table 4 Close the media cover 357 Appendix E _ Installing the Media Cutter Tray 358 F Selecting Supported RFID Tag Types Read this First Printronix RFID SL5000R printers support a number of RFID protocols and antenna configurations To view a complete list of tag types supported by Printronix RFID SL5000R printers and a list of Certified RFID Smart Labels available from Printronix 1 Goto www printronix com and select your Country Language of choice 2 Click RFID Printers 3 Click Learn More under RFID Smart Label Specifications These web pages are updated regularly to include newly supported RFID tag types and newly Certified RFID Smart Labels available from Printronix To configure your printer to use an RFID tag type see Selecting RFID Tag Types below Selecting RFID Tag Types For additional information on menu operation refer to the RFID Labeling Reference Manual To select an RFID tag type 1 Press the key ont
36. Manual Paper Calibrate is performed the value displayed is equal to the gap mark threshold value set by this procedure If running the procedure does not provide a reliable Top Of Form detection e g when using unusual media the Gap Mark Thresh value can be manually set to the desired value The range is from 0000 to 1023 129 Chapter 3 130 CALIBRATE CTRL Paper Out Thresh This menu item selects a value that when exceeded by the output of the media sensor is recognized by the printer as a paper out condition When Auto or Manual Calibrate is performed the value displayed is equal to the paper out threshold value set by this procedure If running the procedure does not provide a reliable paper out detection e g when using non standard media the Paper Out Thresh value can be manually set to the desired value The range is from 0000 to 1023 Paper Out Sensor Selects which type of media sensing Transmissive or Reflective will be used to detect a paper out condition The printer automatically selects the type of sensing based on the Gap Mark sensing selected see Table 6 on page 127 NOTE Whenever you select Transmissive you must position the upper media sensor directly over the lower media sensor see Positioning the Media Sensors on page 54 The factory default is Transmissive Manual Calibrate Manual Calibrate is another method of improving the printer s media sensing and is only used when Auto Cali
37. Normal factory default This is normal Double High printing for current model printers e P3 4 6 9 Compat Where older printers printed two dot rows higher this option allows for compatibility by raising the print two dot rows to match the current models dot row value two dot rows lower 213 Chapter 3 214 EPSON FX SETUP Repeat Form When enabled this menu speeds up the label printing for repeated form This only applies to forms where the entire form is enclosed in the AIREPV IREPE command e Enable factory default Speeds up the processing of repeated forms for PGL thereby resulting in increased printer throughput This option provides no speed benefit for forms that are unrelated to one another and should be disabled under those circumstances e Disable Should be selected when subsequent forms are unrelated to one another Repeat Form Opt e Enable factory default Speeds up the processing of repeated forms for PGL thereby resulting in increased printer throughput This option provides no speed benefit for forms that are unrelated to one another and should be disabled under those circumstances e Disable Should be selected when subsequent forms are unrelated to one another Reset Cmd CFG Ld When the printer receives a host data stream reset command ESC or ESCJk in addition to resetting printer variables the selected configuration is loaded e Disable factory default The active emulation par
38. OPTION NOT INSTALLED displays e Continuous Printer prints on the media and sends it out the front See Continuous Mode on page 124 for more information 109 Chapter 3 110 MEDIA CONTROL Paper Feed Shift This option represents the distance to advance shift or pull back shift the stop position of a label when Tear Off Strip Tear Off Peel Off or Cut media handling option is enabled The allowable range is 1 00 inches to the current Label Length value setting up to a maximum of 12 80 inches in 01 inch increments The factory default is 0 00 inches Label Length This option specifies the user selected Label Length in inches or millimeters In most applications the user selected Label Length will match the physical label length Physical label length is the actual label length of the media installed When setting label length consider the following Label Length can be manually entered via the control panel MEDIA CONTROL menu or sent via host computer using the appropriate software command A Host Forms Length Label Length value sent from the host computer will override and change the manually entered Label Length value in the MEDIA CONTROL menu e Physical Label Length is the actual measurable length of the label The following list of different media types explains how the physical label lengths are determined e Die cut labels measurable length of the removable label leading edge to
39. PARAMS 1 from page 93 Signal Operation SSID Name SSID Name SSID Name Reset SSID Strength Mode 01 15 16 30 31 32 Name XX Infrastructure XXX Pseudo IBSS Ad Hoc Min Xfer Channel Antenna Ant Preamble Power _ Rate Diversity Mgmt Aut negotiate Default Primary Diverse Default 0 ms 1Mb sec 1 15 Auxiliary Primary Short 100 ms 2Mb sec Auxiliary Long 200 ms 5 5Mb sec 300 ms 11Mb sec 400 ms 6 Mb sec 500 ms 9 Mb sec 600 ms 12 Mb sec 700 ms 18 Mb sec 800 ms 24 Mb sec 900 ms 36 Mb sec 1000 ms 48 Mb sec 54 Mb sec Transmit Internat Auth WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 a Power Mode Method Format Width Byte1 100 Disable Open Hexadecimal 128 Bits 0 100 Enabel Shared ASCII 40 Bits Kerberos LEAP WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 Byte2 Byte3 Byte4 Byte5 Byte6 Byte7 Notes Factory Default 1 This menu appears only if a Wireless Option is installed 2 You cannot change this value it is a display only item 3 A 1 32 character case sensitive string Characters can be alphanumeric symbols or spaces 4 This menu appears only if WEP Key 1 Width is set to 128 Bits 5 Appear
40. PTX SETUP commands but not act on them e Disable Will not parse the PTX SETUP commands so they will print out as text PJL Control e Enable factory default Will parse and execute the PUL commands e Disable Will not parse the PUL commands they will not print out as text Page Mem Adjust Page Mem Adjust should be set to the longest form length used on the printer User applications that are less than or equal to the default setting of 24 inches do not need to modify the value The value resets to the default when the printer firmware is downloaded and or the printhead 203 DPI or 300 DPI is changed The default is 24 inches the minimum setting is 12 inches and the maximum setting is 99 inches The values adjust by 1 inch increments Max Font Buffer The maximum amount of DRAM allocated to store the global font information of any resident and downloaded scalable font e g Intellifont TrueType Each font contains its own global font information that is required for all character generation from that font Some fonts may require more font buffer memory than others to generate characters Insufficient font buffer memory causes characters to be missing on the page and print blank If a font needs more memory for character generation increase the Max Font Buffer value to allow the printer to print the missing character The range is from 100 to 1800 Kbytes and the factory default is 1500 Kbytes 145 Chapter 3 146 PR
41. Peek Off eda isda teaaleanchbatcs dens pa aaan kiada 48 Removing the Paper Path eccceeeceeeeeesneeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeneaaes 51 Printing ACjUStMENTS cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeseaaes 52 Printhead Pressure Adjustment 00 cccceeeeteceeeeeteeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaaes 52 Printhead Pressure Block Adjustments 53 Positioning the Media Sensors ccccccceeeeeseeceeeeseteeeeeaeeeeneeeeaes 54 Sensing Different Media Types ccccccceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeees 59 Table of Contents Running Auto Calibrate c ccccceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeeas 60 Running Media Profile sensns treenata 62 Running Manual Calibrate cccccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeeeseneeeeaas 66 Cleaning saris acest a aaie Mh eee nite died Ga heen at ae 68 Exterior Cleaning eccccecceeeeeeeeeececeeeeeceaeeeeaaesseneeceeeeesaaeseeaaeeseneesaas 68 Interior ClOANiING ccccceeceeeeeeeececeeeeecaeeeeaaesseneeeeeeeesaaeeeeaaeeseneesaas 68 Cleaning the Printhead Platen Roller Media Sensors and Media Damper areire aei aerar aA aean APER AEE PAaL EEKEREN TARIA aA 69 3 Configuring The Printer cceeeeee 73 DIAA N 2522 43 lobe Aa ehce ek nal betayt i badeaysanhe chap E a canbe bust esdasd favoees 73 Setting Printer Configuration Parameters cccesccessesseeeeseeees 73 Moving within the Configuration Menu ccccceeeeeeseeeeete
42. Press the 4 and keys at the same time until ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED displays 9 Press until DIAGNOSTICS displays 10 Press 4 until DIAGNOSTICS Reset Head Data displays 11 Press 4 to select Reset Head Data The message RESETTING HEAD DATA displays This sets the Head Print Distance and Head On Time values to zero 00 OT 12 Test printer operation and check print quality by selecting the Diagnostics Printer Tests menu and printing one of the test patterns Refer to page 226 298 Determining Printhead Wear Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors If the printer stalls with an LCD message such as E03E DSI CXIWX or NOVRAM ERR reboot the printer and continue If this situation persists invoke a diagnostic option that will capture the failure dump in a flash file that can be later uploaded from PrintNet Enterprise Suite and sent to Printronix Customer Support Center see page 371 for further analysis This diagnostic option must be enabled for the printer to capture the information To perform this diagnostic do the following the procedure 1 Enable the Admin User option under PRINTER CONTROL This will display the Auto Dump option Enable the Auto Dump option under the DIAGNOSTICS menu When the failure happens reboot the printer and wait for it to power up again Under the PRINTER CONTROL menu go to View File List Check the file li
43. RIBBON OUT Yes 1 The ribbon supply Replace ribbon Load Ribbon spool is empty Reinstall ribbon 2 The ribbon has broken SECURITY CODE Yes The software being Load the correct software VIOLATION nag i correct for If the problem persists E PIINE contact your authorized customer service representative SECURITY Yes The security key is Install the security key VIOLATION missing 329 Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message Cae Explanation Solution SOFTWARE Yes No 1 Application 1 Recycle the printer power ERROR software tried to If possible print a job that Recycle Power perform an illegal has previously worked printer tunear 2 Ifthe problem persists 2 There are contact your authorized damaged logic service representative circuits on the controller PCBA Speed Exceeds Yes The Print Speed or Change the Print Speed or Validator Limit Slew Speed value is Slew Speed value in the above 6 IPS as the MEDIA CONTROL menu to 6 power up default with IPS or less when using the the validator option validator option and save the installed or the user new value as the power up attempted to increase default Print Speed or Slew Speed above 6 IPS TESTING Yes Normal power up 1 No action required Pua el mMesSsayg9 Printer is 2 Ifthe printer does not PLEASE WAIT running its initialization complete initial
44. SUDMENU 0c cccccccccececsssscsececeescecseaeaeceeeesesesssteaeeas 242 ETHERNET PORTS cite einstein ete a eee Sites 243 ETHERNET PORT Submenu c ccccccccceesssseceeeeeceesessaeeeeeeeees 243 ETHERNET ADDRESS id iaaeaie aii ia iiai 244 ETHERNET ADDRESS Submenu cccccccccseceeeesenseceeeeeees 245 ETHERNET PARAM O areenaa iraa etr aaae aerae anean EET EA aean E Da Adan 246 ETHERNET PARAMS SubmentS ccccecseceeeeececeessaeeeeeeeees 247 WLAN ADDRESS sse5 0 cie5 ete ete s ci ns e a aaa 249 WLAN ADDRESS SubMentS ccccesesseceeeeeceesesteaeeeseeeeeenees 250 WLAN PARAMS v2 ne eee Re ee Eis el Eh 251 WLAN PARAMS Submenu cccccccccesscseceseeeeeesesteaeseeeeeeseees 253 KERBEROS PARAMS cccccccssececeeececeeseeaececeeeeecseeeaeceeeesesessensaeens 257 KERBEROS PARAMS SubMenue cccccccccsessceceeeeeeeeseetsaeees 257 WEAN EAP area a beset ete amp bed het othe Meat Meee ket 260 WLAN EAP Submenu ccccccccceececsesseeceeeeeceesscneaeeeeeeeeseees 260 PRINTER MGM Toeri ra eree aaa aT De inscenttvels aa aa aaa 262 PRINTER MGMT SubmenuG cccccccccsesssssceeeeeeecsessaeseeeeeees 262 DAT Biss Secchi toiscsesttl c hese eden as nected ioe saad ce A deat Meee 263 Table of Contents 4 Downloading Software ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 265 Loading Flash Memory ccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeteeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeenaeeeene 265 Downloading
45. Series Serial Matrix Proprinter Epson FX This item allows selection of the character set to be used by the printer Printing UTF 8 Encoded Unicode Text Normally to print multinational characters on a printer the user needs to select a character set that contains the correct characters Character sets are groups of 256 locations the first 128 locations are occupied by the ASCII set and the locations in the upper half are reserved for graphics symbols or multinational characters For example to print Cyrillic the user would select a Cyrillic set To print Italian the user would select a different set Unicode allows any character to be selected without switching character sets because it specifies a different number for every character in all languages Thus Unicode has become the standard for multinational printing UTF 8 is a popular encoding of Unicode in which the first 128 characters are still occupied by the ASCII set This makes it backwards compatible with older applications which use only ASCII data It also allows the printing of all Unicode characters UTF 8 encoded Unicode can be enabled on the printer from the front panel or from a host command in the LP PGL or ZGL emulation Cmd Resolution e Low Resolution factory default Sets a low command resolution mode e High Resolution Sets a high command resolution mode Coax Type This parameter defines the printer emulation as follows e 4234 factory default
46. Set Ld Set __ Overwrite View File __ Delete from RAM at PwrUp Files List Files Disable Enable XXXXX XX Enable Disable Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 You cannot change this value it is a display only item 2 Does not appear if CT or IPDS is installed Flash Optimize amp Print Auto Locking Set Lock PTX Setup Avail Reboot File List Key Parse Disable Enable Enable Ignore Disable F PJL Page Mem Max Font __ Max Cache Max Cached __ Standard Control 2 Adjust Buffer Memory Char Chars Disable 24 inches 1500 Kbytes 2000 Kbytes 01 Kbytes 340 Enable 12 to 99 inches 100 to 1800 Kbytes 50 to 2000 KBytes 01to20KBytes 0 to 512 a Bold Extra Bold __ OCR A __ OCR B Tall Batch Chars Char Chars Chars Characters Counter 448 504 384 304 Disable Disable 0 to 512 0 to 512 0 to 512 0 to 512 Enable Enable E Feed Key Admin Online User Feed Disable Reprint Last Enable LP Emulation from page 135 P Series See page 172 PRINTER CONTROL Submenus P Series XQ Serial Matrix Proprinter XL Epson FX See page 174 See page 176 See page 178 See page 180 Notes Factory Default PRINTER CONTROL Submenus SMT Stat
47. Shaded Print permit highlighting and contrasting by printing white characters on a dark background or white characters on a gray shaded background Various levels or patterns of gray shading and reverse printing may combine with the many other print features to create distinctive designs Automatic Increment Decrement Capability allows batch form processing Individual alphabetic numeric and bar code data fields can be identified and automatically incremented or decremented by any amount beginning from a specified reference point Standard Character Sets provide you with many different character sets Based on the Multinational Character Set you may create your own character sets using characters defined and stored in flash memory P Series P Ser XQ Ser Matrix Proprinter and Epson FX These menus are available only when you enable Admin User under the PRINTER CONTROL menu COAX SETUP COAX SETUP 1 23 from page 86 Primary Sets _ Translation PA1 PA2 Buffer Buffer Tbl Reprint Print See page 155 Disable Disable Enable Enable E Coax Type __ Active Secondary Early Print_ ___ SCS Buffer __ All Set Char Set Sets Cmpl Cntrl 80 9F 4234 Secondary Set Seepage 155 Disable Don t Wait Printable 3287 Primary Set Enable Wait Until Done Control Code Intervention CR At
48. Size Comp C128 Mode Comp C39 Compatbl Ignore Chars Ignore Ch 1 Ignore Ch 2 Data Bit 8 Cmd Resolution ADnn Dot Slew Barcode var Character Group Standard Sets Uniform Fonts Prop Line Length Printer Pl Host PI Max PI 16 88 Main Menu TGL SETUP 2 IGL SETUP 2 Refer to the ZGL Refer to the TGL Refer to the IGL Programmer s Programmer s Programmer s Reference Manual Reference Manual Reference Manual NOTES Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Appears only if Active IGP Emul is set to VGL in the Printer Control Menu Appears only if Active IGP Emul is set to this emulation Refertothe STGL Refer totheDGL Refer tothe MGL Refer to the IEGL Programmer s Programmer s Programmer s Programmer s Reference Manual Reference Manual Reference Manual Reference Manual NOTES Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Appears only if Active IGP Emul is set to this emulation 89 Form Length inches 4 Form Length mm 34 Form Length lines 4 Form Width inches gt Form Width mm 39 Form Width char NOTES Chapter 3 _MainMenu P SERIES P SERIES XQ SETUP SETUP 6 page 172 page 174 Select CPI Select CPI Select LPI Select LPI Typeface Typeface Character Group Horizontal DPI Character Set Vert
49. Software with the Firmware Download Utility 266 Downloading Software through the Parallel Port cssseeeeeeeees 267 Downloading Software through the NIC sscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeesees 269 Downloading Software through the NIC using FTP ssassn 270 Downloading Software through the USB Poft c cccsceesteeeseeeeeees 272 Downloading Software through the Printronix Windows Driver 273 Downloading Software if Flash Contains Only Boot or Corrupt Code niei aaaea ie i ends 274 Using TrueType Font ccccescccceeesecceeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeseseaeeesnseaeeeeeeeaeenees 275 Downloading TrueType FOnts ccceeeeeeeceeeeneeeeeeenaeeeseeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaas 275 Printronix Windows Driver c ecccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeesesessanaeeeeess 276 PGL Emulation Online 0 ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeneeeeeneees 276 Download MOde 0s ee eeeeceeeeeee cece eee ee ee eaeeeeeeaaeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeees 277 PTX SETUP euii A tae eis tat eu ate ei 279 Labeling Applications eccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaees 279 Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus c cceeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeees 279 Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Font ccccseeeeeseeeeeeees 280 5 AWC ACCS rodea a reas 281 OV GSIVIO W e a T E bettas Mhudetea A S 281 Auto SWItChing heoa ea e ieee 281 Centronics Parallel Interface c ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeaeeseeeeee
50. Status option Serial 237 Request To Send RTS signal RS 232 serial interface 288 Request to Send option 238 Reset Cfg Names option 106 Reset Cmd CFG Ld option 214 Reset EAP Pswd WLAN EAP menu 261 Reset EAP User WLAN EAP menu 261 Reset Head Data option 228 Reset Kerb Pwd option 258 Reset SSID Name option 254 Reset WEP Keys option 256 Reset WPA P Phs option 256 RESETTING PLEASE WAIT fault message 328 Resident Fonts option 214 Resp Polarity option 232 RESTORING BOOT CODE fault message 328 Ret Status Port option 142 214 Rewinder 13 341 removing printed media from 47 using 43 RFID MP2 Encoder option 14 RFID Tag Types 359 Ribbon 17 loading 28 40 Printronix 344 Ribbon 8300 344 Ribbon 8500 344 Ribbon 8550 344 Ribbon 8600 344 Ribbon 8700 344 Ribbon 8770 344 specifications 336 RIBBON BROKEN Reload Ribbon fault message 329 Ribbon Calibrate option 126 RIBBON FAULT Timeout fault message 329 RIBBON LOAD BAD Reload Ribbon fault message 329 Ribbon Low fault message 329 Ribbon Low option 122 RIBBON OUT Load Ribbon fault message 329 Ribbon specifications 336 Ribbon Width option 122 Right Margin option 215 Right pressure block 53 Roll media 29 Rot Char Size option 215 RS 232 serial interface Clear To Send CTS 288 Data Carrier Detect DCD 288 Data Set Ready DSR 288 Received Data RD 288 Request To Send RTS 288 Transmitted Data TD 288 RS 422 option 14 343 RS 422
51. Subsequent printing observes the current setting for skip over perforation form length and top of form position parameters You must have a minimum of 4 1 inches of media installed and have Label Width set to 4 1 inches If not the hexdump data will be truncated and lost If a fault occurs while printing a hexdump the printer reverts to the normal fault state When the fault is cleared the printer resumes printing the hexdump either a partial line with a form feed or nothing at all Top of Form remains unaffected The Impact Prin 09 54 68 65 20 49 6D 70 61 63 74 20 50 72 69 6E ter Emulation pr 74 65 72 20 45 6D 75 6C 61 74 69 6F 6E 20 70 72 ints in one up 69 6E 74 73 20 69 6E 20 6F 6E 65 2D 75 70 2C OA two up and fou 09 74 77 6F 2D 75 70 2C 20 61 6E 64 20 66 6F 75 r up page window 72 20 75 70 20 70 61 67 65 20 77 69 6E 64 6F 77 Seseo Figure 5 Sample Hex Dump To begin a hex dump first place the printer offline and enable the Hex Dump Mode option from the control panel Next place the printer online Finally send data to the printer from the host computer Any data received from the host is dumped to the printout To cancel a hex dump first place the printer offline Then disable the Hex Dump Mode option from the control panel The paper may then be advanced to the next Top of Form The options are Disable factory default and Enable Horizontal DPI This feature enables the thermal printer to print images as
52. Used with the media cutter option to catch and collect the cut media in a bin NIC Wireless This card provides wireless 802 1 1b g connectivity without expensive cabling and reconfigurations required from a wired network PNE is standard with this option Chapter 1 Thermal Printer Technology e Online Barcode Validator Analyzes each bar code to ensure it meets stringent scanning standards This inspection validates the symbology specifications of both linear and PDF417 bar code images Bad bar code labels are cancelled and good replacement labels are printed automatically RFID MP2 Encoder The RFID Radio Frequency Identification UHF encoder reads and writes information to smart labels with embedded RFID tags with a pitch typically two to six inches These labels are used on shipping cartons and pallets NOTE The RFID encoder is standard on the SL5R and optional for the T5R e RS 422 Serial interface option e TN5250 TN3270 Enables your printer to communicate with an IBM host through a network interface using the 5250 3270 datastream This feature allows you to use an application generated for the coax twinax emulation to be printed through the network interface NOTE RFID is not supported by TN5250 3270 applications For more information about printer options see Appendix B Thermal Printer Technology Quiet and fast with excellent print quality your multifunction thermal printer uses an inline thermal printhe
53. ZRRE BE KHEHASRARZALBENLE ASRS RASRRHt Sele TE China Declaration This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may need to perform practical actions ERAR m EEM TR P m A RERE PHA ERA WF BRET WAAR SE HY 47 ASEH BRE RAZA tt A GE AF BK 2000M AF ib KAS ER WGA T SEA URE E RSA 383 Appendix J Software License Agreement Software License Agreement Your printer contains among other software Printronix operating software including but not limited to the Embedded Configurable Operating System the eCos Software as embedded software The terms of this Agreement apply only to the eCos Software and all other embedded software supplied with the printer You accept the terms of this Agreement by your initial use of your printer 1 Object Code License Printronix grants you a nonexclusive license to use the Printronix Software the eCos Software and all other embedded software collectively the Embedded Software or the Software only in conjunction with the printer As the rightful possessor of the printer you may make a reasonable number of copies of the Software as necessary for backup configuration and restoration of the printer You must reproduce the copyright notice and any other legend of ownership on each copy of the Software you make You may transfer possession of the Software and its media to another party
54. allows the user to define how the general purpose IO hardware should behave for the given application RS 422 An optional serial interface that enables the printer to operate with bit serial devices that are compatible with an RS232 controller The printer may be ordered with an RS 422 serial interface installed or it can be installed by an authorized service representative at a later date Supplies and Accessories The best printing solution is achieved when the printer ribbon and media are matched to the application requirements The use of Genuine Printronix Thermal Media and Ribbons will ensure optimum image quality consistent bar code performance and extended life of the printhead Please refer to the Printronix Media Selection Guide for details concerning the application suitability for all media and ribbon products To obtain a copy of this guide or for any other questions concerning Genuine Printronix Thermal Supplies please call Americas 800 733 1900 Fax 714 368 2354 Europe Middle East 33 0 146251907 Fax 33 0 1 46 25 1919 Africa Asia 65 548 4116 Fax 65 546 1588 China 86 400 886 5598 86 21 5138 0564 Or visit our website at www printronix com 343 Appendix B _ Supplies and Accessories 344 Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons The following is a list of Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer ribbons Printronix Wide Spectrum Wax Ribbon 8300 Provides s
55. and require platen replacement 3 When the entire label is removed from the platen then use an isopropyl alcohol wipe Printronix PN 254945 901 to remove all the adhesive from the platen to help prevent any future label wraps Tighten the printer front door thumbscrews A label wrap occurs when a die cut label is incorrectly torn at the tear bar by the user and adhesive is exposed under the leading edge of the next label When the printer pulls this next label back to TOF the adhesive contacts the platen and when the label advances forward during printing or a Form Feed it wraps around the platen Label wraps can be avoided by having the user practice careful tear off techniques and ensuring that the label across performations are ideally positioned at the tear bar edge by using the correct Paper Feed Shift value in the QUICK SETUP menu If Tear Off Strip Media Handling mode is being used you can reduce the length of a label wrap should one occur by setting the Lbl Missing Fault menu to Early Detect This enables the Label Taken Sensor at the front of the printer so that it will look for the first 1 3 inches of a label If no label is detected by the sensor during a Form Feed or while printing the printer will stop and display LABEL WRAP Open Head To Clear Pivoting deck is difficult to close and lock when heavy tag stock media is installed Set the printhead pressure adjustment dial to the MIN position Close the p
56. application to print with standard or user defined ratios in vertical or horizontal orientations Available bar codes are Codabar Code 39 Code 93 Code 128 with Subsets A B and C and Code EAN UCC 128 EAN 8 EAN 13 Interleaved 2 of 5 MSI UPC A UPC E POSTNET PostBar USPS Intelligent Mail Royal Mail and UPC Shipping POSTNET is available only in the horizontal direction A dark print mode is included for darker high contrast bar codes The IBARC bar code command prints bar codes in four orientations horizontal rotated 90 rotated 180 or rotated 270 degrees Expanded and Compressed Print draws attention where needed Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a tremendous range of character sizes up to 9 9 inches wide and tall Several compressed print sizes are available 12 13 33 15 17 65 and 20 cpi characters per inch permitting up to 170 columns in an 8 5 inch printed area 20 cpi Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design Normal expanded and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise counterclockwise or printed upside down Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and a variety of print and shading features providing a customized appearance for forms reports and labels The registered trademark copyright TUV GS Mark UL and CSA symbols are provided as standard designs on the VGL and you can also define custom symbols Reverse and
57. are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 This menu appears only if the TN5250 TN3270 option and the correct security key is installed 2 This menu appears only if you select the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu TN5250 Setup Primary and Secondary Sets 5250 SETUP from page 166 Primary Sets 0037 English US 0037 Eng Nether 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg New 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK 0892 OCRA 0893 OCR B 0424 Hebrew 0803 Hebrew Old 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril Old 0423 Greek Old 875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Kata 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0256 Intern 1 1112 Balt Mult 0924 Euro Lat 9 1122 Estonian 1140 Euro Eng 1141 Euro Aust 1142 Euro Dan 1143 Euro Finn 1144 Euro Ital 1145 Euro Span 1146 Euro UK 1147 Euro Fren 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice 0500 Internat 5 Secondary Sets English US Austrian German Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish Norweg Finnish Swedish French Italian Japanese Eng Japanese Katak Portuguese Spanish Spanish Speak English UK Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Latin 2 ROECE Yugoslavian Multinational Notes
58. as follows Disable default Full error checking and report Enable No error checking and report PRINTER CONTROL Submenus Power Saver Time The time interval you specify for this parameter sets the amount of idle time before the printer goes into Power Saver mode Pressing any key removes the power saver message from the control panel Sending a print job to the printer also turns off power saver mode The options are 1 5 10 15 30 45 60 and 240 minutes The factory default is 5 minutes NOTE When ODV is installed and enabled the printer will wait 20 seconds before exiting Power Saver mode During the Power Saver mode exit a PLEASE WAIT message will display alerting user of the required delay Pwr Save Control Pwr Save Control allows you to enable and disable Power Saver mode If enabled the menu for Power Saver Time is in effect The options are Enable factory default and Disable Display Language This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the LCD English German French Italian Spanish or Portuguese The factory default is English Alarm e On factory default An audible alarm sounds 3 beeps when a fault occurs such as a paper jam e Cont Beep A continuous audible alarm sounds when a fault occurs which can be stopped by pressing CLEAR e Off No audible alarm sounds Power up State e Online factory default The printer powers up in the online state e Offline The p
59. can delete one or all of your eight customized configurations The factory default configuration cannot be deleted The factory default is All Power Up Config You can specify any one of nine configurations 1 8 saved custom configurations or Factory as the power up configuration The factory default is Factory Protect Configs You can specify whether or not a new configuration should overwrite an existing configuration when you activate the Save Configs parameter When disabled default the new configuration will overwrite the existing configuration When enabled the new configuration will not overwrite the existing configuration and the message CONFIG EXISTS Delete First displays The options are Disable factory default and Enable 105 Chapter 3 106 CONFIG CONTROL Name Config 1 8 You may specify a 15 character name which can be used to refer to a configuration The name you enter for a configuration will be used in the Load Config Save Config Print Config Delete Config and Power Up Config menus The names can only be cleared by using the Reset Cfg Names menu When you move into the Name Configs menu the top line of the display shows the current configuration name The second line of the display is initially the same as the top line You can modify the second line of the display without affecting the top line until the 1 key is pressed which sets the modified name as the current selection
60. changes to the values the printer uses for Gap Mark Threshold Paper Out Threshold and Sensed Distance The changes in values take effect immediately within the current configuration menu Auto Calibrate is completed successfully when the Sensed Distance displayed correctly matches that of the installed media When Gap is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing edge of one gap to the trailing edge of the next gap one label one gap When Mark is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark Auto Calibrate supports label lengths up to 35 inches QUICK SETUP Submenus Validator Funct This menu appears only if a validator is installed e Enable The printer will command the validator to begin scanning and errors will be reported The counters will be incremented while the validator is enabled e Disable The printer will not command the validator to begin scanning and no errors will be reported The counters will not be incremented while the validator is disabled NOTE If you save a configuration with the validator enabled then power down and power up and the validator is not connected or not functioning the error message Validator not communicating will display briefly The Validator menu will not display lf the validator is installed the default is Enable Active IGP Emulation See page 139 for
61. close as possible to the same size as those originally programmed for a line matrix or laser printer by selecting a horizontal resolution that matches that of the printer that the file was originally generated for Although the range allows a selection of up to 400 dpi the T5R is capable of printing up to 203 dpi T5204 T5206 T5208 and 300 dpi T5304 T5306 T5308 horizontal resolution The range is 60 400 dpi and the factory default is 120 dpi Host Command This item allows you to select certain host commands to be ignored by the printer The options are Enable Ignore All Ignore CPI and Ignore LPI The factory default is Enable all host commands accepted by the printer 203 Chapter 3 204 EPSON FX SETUP Host Form Length PGL Determines how the physical label length see Label Length under the MEDIA CONTROL menu is affected upon receiving an EXECUTE command Enable factory default The physical label length will change to match the form length specified in CREATE commana The physical label size remains at the new setting until another EXECUTE command is received or the PRINTER CONTROL menu settings are changed Var Length The physical label length is the longest print element defined in CREATE mode plus the setting of Var Form Adjust Works with CREATE NAME 0 Var Dynamic Len The physical label length will change to the longest print element defined in EXECUTE mode plus the setting of Var Fo
62. displays 3 Press the J key to select each new value An asterisk displays 79 Chapter 3 _ Overview 4 Before saving the modified configuration you must delete the original configuration if the Protect Configs option is enabled a Press the or 4 key until the following message displays Delete Config 1 b Press the or key to cycle through the options 1 8 When the desired number displays press the key to select it The following message displays Deleting Configuration Then the following displays when it is deleted Delete Config X 5 Save the new configuration as described in the Saving a Configuration on page 76 Make sure you select the same number e g Config 1 when saving the modified configuration The new configuration writes over the existing one 6 Print a copy of this newest configuration and store it in a safe place Refer to Printing a Configuration on page 81 80 Printing a Configuration Printing a Configuration We recommend that you print and store your configurations for future reference The printout provides a list of the parameters that were set when you configured the printer To print a configuration 1 Pressthe key until the following message displays MENU MODE CONFIG CONTROL 2 Press the 4 key until the following message displays Print Config Current 3 Press the or key to cycle through the
63. dust debris or label adhesive The platen roller can be rotated forward by hand to access and clean its entire surface area NOTE Even though power is removed from the platen motor some drag will be felt as you rotate the platen 4 Check the platen roller for razor cuts nicks and gouges that may cause voids in the printed image This type of damage usually requires platen roller replacement Media Sensor Cleaning The upper and lower media sensors should be cleaned to ensure reliable Top of Form and Paper Out sensing Do not use isopropyl alcohol solvents or abrasive agents to clean the lower media sensor as they can damage the sensors lens cover e Cleaning Agent Use a brush with soft non metallic bristles or a vacuum cleaner described above to remove paper dust NOTE An Isopropyl Alcohol Wipe or Printhead Cleaning Pen can be used to remove label adhesive from the upper sensor e Schedule Clean the media sensors each time you clean the printhead 5 Brush away or vacuum any dust or debris from the upper and lower sensor Cleaning the Printhead Platen Roller Media Sensors and Media Damper Pivoting Deck Printhead Heating Elements Peel Tear Door Lower Media Sensor visible with Red LED Printhead Cover Upper Media Sensor Deck Lock Lever Print Element 183418a TT Upper Sensor 71 Chapter 2 IMPORTANT 72 WARNING CAUTION Cleaning Media Damper Cle
64. e 3287 After the emulation has been changed a POR status is sent to the host Code Page Subset This item allows you to select the desired version of the following code pages 037 273 274 275 277 278 280 281 282 284 285 297 500 and 871 The options are Version 0 factory default and Version 1 193 Chapter 3 194 EPSON FX SETUP Compressed Print Controls which host command sets compressed printing e Char 01 SOH factory default e Char 03 ETX e Char 09 HT Control Code 06 Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code 06 hex ACK You can select an alternate line spacing of 6 0 8 0 or 10 3 LPI The options factory default is 8 0 LPI Control Code 08 Control Code 08 defines the function of ASCII code 08 hex BS You can define the code to output an Elongated character or a Backspace The factory default is Elongated Copy Count Determines the number of identical copies of each physical page that will be printed The range is 1 999 and the factory default is 1 CR at MPP 1 MPP is Maximum Print Position which is also known as line length This option controls a carriage return at the end of a print line and at MPP 1 e On factory default Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the next line e Off Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the current line CR Edit This parameter determines if a carriage return will be followed by a line feed
65. ensure that a three wire cable with a properly grounded plug is used 3 Attach the AC power cord to the AC power receptacle in the back of the printer CAUTION _ Verify the required voltage on the printer s model number label on the rear of the printer 4 Attach the AC power cord to a grounded three prong electrical outlet of the proper voltage Chapter _ 1 _ Setting Up the Printer 5 Attach Interface a NOTE Ethernet Port Parallel Interface Debug Interface Serial Interface USB Connection 20 Parallel Interface Attach a suitable parallel printer cable from the computer to the Centronics IEEE 1284 interface connector at the back of the printer Snap the bail locks to the Centronics connector to secure the interface cable to the printer Serial Interface Attach a suitable serial printer cable from the computer to the DB 9 RS 232 serial interface connector at the back of the printer For additional information on serial cable wiring refer to Diagnostics and Troubleshooting on page 291 The printer supports simultaneous connection of the parallel serial ethernet and USB interfaces using the Auto Switching feature Auto Switching is described on page 281 Standard Interface Panel Coax Connection Installation If your printer is equipped with the optional Coax Twinax and or optional RS 422 the rear I O panel will appear as illustrated below NOTE Autoswit
66. factory default Cancels all buffers when a job is put on hold from the host or when the CANCEL key is pressed e Disable Does not cancel any internal buffer in the printer when a job is put on hold from the host or when the CANCEL key is pressed Change Case Specifies the font as Mono or Dual Case This option is available only in Coax non SCS mode The host will be notified of the change when the printer is put online Mono Case prints the same as Dual Case if the character set is one of the following right to left sets Katak Hebrew Old Hebrew and Farsi SCS Systems Network Architecture Character String Mode is controlled by the host computer The options are Dual Case factory default and Mono Case 187 Chapter 3 188 Character Group Epson FX EPSON FX SETUP Character Group and Character Sets Epson FX From page 180 This menu item selects the character set used by the printer The available character sets are shown below Standard Arabic Sets Cyrillic Sets European Greek Sets Hebrew Sets Sets Sets ASMO 449 Cyrillic 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek Hebrew Old ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Code Page 852 ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 Hebrew DEC ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek
67. factory defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000 000 000 and 000 NOTE The printer reboots when it is placed online Subnet Mask This item allows you to set the Subnet Mask for the TCP IP protocol in four three digit segments SEG1 through SEGA If the Subnet Mask is assigned by BootP Arp or DHCP it is dynamic and read only The factory defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000 000 000 and 000 NOTE The printer reboots when it is placed online Gateway Address This item allows you to set the Gateway Address for the TCP IP protocol in four three digit segments SEG1 through SEG4 If the Gateway Address is assigned by BootP ARP or DHCP it is dynamic and read only The factory defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000 000 000 and 000 NOTE The printer reboots when it is placed online MAC Address This item is the Manufacturer s Assigned Number and is unique for the NIC and the Wireless option It is read only DHCP You can enable disable the DHCP protocol using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting The options are Disable factory default and Enable NOTE The printer reboots when it is placed online BootP You can enable disable the BootP protocol using this option Be sure to consult your administrator for the appropriate setting The options are Disable and Enable factory default NOTE The printer will reboot when it is placed online WLAN PARAMS WLAN
68. handshaking and transmits both forms simultaneously when the input buffer is full The printer can be used with either serial or parallel host interfaces Parallel interfaces are usually straightforward with no special settings required Serial interfaces however have a variety of possible communication parameter settings The two methods of handshaking that can be used hardware and software are explained below e Hardware Handshaking This electrical signal is controlled by the logic state on pin 20 of the serial interface connector J2 at the back of the printer The signal will go high when the printer is ready to receive data The signal will go low when the printer is in the busy state which indicates that the printer input buffer is full and can no longer receive data Software Handshaking XON and XOFF are software signals that control serial data flow between the printer and the host system When the printer input buffer is full the printer transmits an XOFF CTRL S character that signals the host to stop sending data When memory space becomes available in the input buffer the printer sends an XON CTRL Q character which tells the host that the printer is ready to receive more data If the printer appears to have communication problems the self test configuration test labels see page 226 and character hex dump mode see page 227 should be checked The tests can help identify printer configuration errors that can ca
69. last printed label is aligned at the tear bar No blank label is needed to remove the last printed label No blank label should exist between print jobs A no print zone 80 inches long exists from the leading edge of each printed label This option supports label lengths 2 50 inches or longer Tear Strip Full Same as Standard but the cross perforation following the last printed label is automatically aligned at the tear bar once the print buffer is empty for a period of Tear Strip Time Media does not get aligned at tear bar until Tear Strip Time expires When printable data is again detected a blank label is automatically fed resulting in one blank label between each print job This option supports label lengths 2 50 inches or longer Shorter label lengths cause two or more blank labels to be automatically fed at the beginning of each print job Cut Strip When Media Handling is set to Continuous and a cutter is installed Cut Strip will use the respective host interface Timeout menu setting to determine the End Of Job EOJ and cycle the cutter That is the cutter will be cycled when there is no more data being received from the host The cut will not be done for printing that is not initiated by the host such as form feeds and test printing or if the host interface is not set to Auto Switching MEDIA CONTROL Submenus TOF Detect Fault Allows selection of three different TOF Top of Form detection faults NOTE The correct Label
70. manually entered via the control panel MEDIA CONTROL menu or sent via host computer using the appropriate software command A Host Forms Length Label Length value sent from the host computer will override and change the manually entered Label Length value in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu Physical Label Length is the actual measurable length of the label The following list of different media types explains how the physical label lengths are determined e Die cut labels measurable length of the removable label leading edge to trailing edge This does not include the liner material or gap e Tag Stock with notches or holes measurable length from the trailing edge of one notch or hole to the leading edge of the next notch or hole e Tag Stock with black marks on underside measurable length from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark e Continuous media no label length indicators measurable length should be within 1 2 the Label Length value entered in the QUICK SETUP MEDIA CONTROL menu or the value sent via host software command Logical Label Length Host Forms Length is the length that a user or programmer bases his printable image on In most cases this length should be slightly less than the Physical Label Length This allows the entire image to be printed within the boundaries of the label length indicators gaps notches holes or black marks When the Lo
71. memory Del Set from RAM This option deletes the downloaded overlay set s from RAM Ld Set at PwrUp This option loads the downloaded overlay set from flash memory at Power Up The options are Disable factory default and Enable Overwrite Files This allows you to prevent files from being overwritten by disabling the overwrite function The options are Enable factory default and Disable View File List Displays the list of files in the file system Pressing 4 displays the file size Files with one of the filename extensions listed table on page 279 are not shown in the View File List menu 143 Chapter 3 144 PRINTER CONTROL Delete Files Allows you to delete files in the file list Contact your administrator for assistance Files with one of the filename extensions listed table on page 279 are not shown in the View File List menu Flash Avail The amount of flash available for the user to save or download files into flash Optimize amp Reboot Reclaims flash space from deleted flash files After pressing wait for the printer to reboot Print File List Prints a summary of the files stored in flash memory and several statistics on File System usage Auto Locking e Disable factory default The 1 ENTER key must be locked manually e Enable The printer automatically locks the key five minutes after the last control panel key press Set Lock Key Normally to lock or unlock the printer menu
72. menu name will change to Renew Life DAY 259 Chapter 3 _WLANEAP WLAN EAP WLAN EAP 1 from page 94 EAP User EAP User EAP User Reset EAP EAP Pswd 01 15 16 30 31 32 User 01 15 EAP Pswd EAP Pswd Reset EAP 16 30 31 32 Pswd Notes Factory Default 1 This menu appears only if Motorola 5127 RF card is installed WLAN EAP Submenus EAP Mode e None default EAP authentication is disabled e LEAP Selects Cisco LEAP authentication e PEAP Selects PEAP authentication e TTLS Selects TTLS authentication EAP User 01 15 The first 15 characters of the EAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 EAP User 16 30 Characters 16 to 30 of the EAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 EAP User 31 32 Characters 31 to 32 of the EAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 260 WLAN EAP Submenus Reset EAP User Resets the EAP user name to an empty string EAP Pswd 01 15 The first 15 characters of the EAP password maximum number of characters is 32 EAP Pswd 16 30 Characters 16 to 30 of the EAP password maximum number of characters is 32 EAP Pswd 31 32 Characters 31 to 32 of the EAP password maximum number of characters is 32 Reset EAP Pswd Resets the EAP password to an empty string 261 Chapter 3 PRINTER MGMT PRINTER MGMT PRINTER MGMT from page 94 Notes Factory Defau
73. more external devices The rules and conventions that govern communication between a printer and a host computer A protocol includes codes for printing text and graphics and codes instructing the printer to perform special operations Random Access Memory Also called main memory or working memory It is the active memory of the printer into which programs are loaded RAM is saved to volatile memory because data in RAM is lost when power is turned off or interrupted Use of the lower media sensor only to transmit and receive infrared light off the underside of media to detect gaps notches holes or horizontal black marks used for determining the Top of Form position on labels or for indicating a Paper Out condition A measure expressing the number of component units in a given range used to create an image in printing expressed as the number of dots per inch dpi horizontally and vertically The RFID Radio Frequency Identification encoder programs smart labels tags with embedded inlays Media supplied in a roll format usually wound ona 1 inch or 3 inch cardboard core The T5000 media hanger assembly accepts both core sizes Gap Mark Sensor Gap Advanced Gap or Advanced Noich The Sensed Distance value is the physical length of one label plus the length of one gap Gap Mark Sensor Mark The Sensed Distance value is the physical distance from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of
74. network system supporting parallel or serial interfaces and to three different IBM host systems e System 3x e AS 400 e 327X Control Units The SPC will support the following third party models for Twinax MODE 219 MODE IBM and MODE P5000 The printer emulations supported by the SPC are Twinax 5225 and Coax 3287 The SPC also provides a range of interfaces available in your thermal printer Centronics Serial Coax and Twinax Also supported are Epson Proprinter XL P Series Serial Matrix VGL and PGL emulations The SPC has the ability to handle multiple print jobs concurrently through coax twinax and parallel and serial interfaces This is accomplished through the Auto Switching feature Because of hardware restrictions coax and twinax cannot be selected together PGL The PGL emulation is the software based Printronix Graphics Language PGL for the Printronix thermal printer family It is based upon and compatible with the IGP 100 200 400 board It includes the following features On Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels with a preprinted look for each application PGL programs control all graphic functions dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing time Graphic capabilities include boxes vertical and horizontal lines with user selectable thickness logos and special alphanumeric print features Forms and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and ver
75. not add any LF FF at the end of the binary data IPTX_SETUP FILE_IO CAPTURE PTX_END Labeling Applications A TrueType font can be downloaded through several labeling applications such as Codesoft Loftware and Bartender Please contact the appropriate company for more details Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus Files with the one of the filename extensions below upper or lower case are considered system files and are not shown in the View File List or Delete Files menu Do not download any user files with these extensions Table 11 File Extensions Not Shown in Menus Extensions 279 Chapter 4 Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts After downloading the TrueType font using any of the above methods the user can access the downloaded TrueType font by using the FONT NAME command as described in the PGL Programmer s Reference Manual For Example CREATE FORM FONT NAME ARIAL TTF ALPHA 10 10 2 2 01234 STOP END EXECUTE FORM 1 The font can also be chosen and printed through LP using the TrueType Font Selection superset command as described in the LinePrinter Plus Emulation Programmer s Reference Manual For example SSCC arial ttf where SSCC is the superset control code for the current LP emulation You can also choose and print the font using the ZGL interpreter 280 5 Interfaces Overview This chapter de
76. of the Units submenu under the MEDIA CONTROL menu The allowable range in inches is 00 1 to the maximum print width of the printer The allowable range in millimeters is 2 5 to the maximum width of the printer Ver Image Shift This option specifies the amount to shift an image vertically up or down for precise positioning on the label The actual height of the image is not affected by this parameter The allowable range is 1 00 inches to the current Label Length value setting up to a maximum of 12 80 inches in 01 inch increments The factory default value is 0 00 inches Hor Image Shift This option specifies the amount to shift an image horizontally left or right for precise positioning on the label The actual width of the image is not affected by this parameter The allowable range is 1 00 to 1 00 inches in 01 inch increments The factory default value is 0 00 inches 99 Chapter 3 QUICK SETUP Orientation This menu item selects the image orientation to be used when printing the label e Portrait factory default Portrait refers to vertical page orientation where the height of a page is greater than its width The top edge of the image is parallel to the leading edge of the media The following illustration is an example with the operator viewing the front of the printer NOTE Portrait orientation applies to PGL and VGL emulations This is regarded as Inverse Portrait using PPI ZGL lt q 4
77. on the Flash File System and the Overwrite Enable feature in the Flash File System menu is set to disable a warning will be displayed on the front panel After clearing the warning the file data will be printed To overwrite the existing file set the Overwrite Files option to enable Due to the nature of writing to flash any data intended to be stored permanently in flash must first be copied into RAM As a result the ability to manipulate files in the Flash File System is dependent upon the printer having sufficient RAM None of the captured file data will be committed to flash until the entire file is loaded The PTX_SETUP parser will interpret the command FILE_IO CAPTURE lt lIf gt as an end of file marker Receipt of the command will cause all file data to be written to flash The file system allocates RAM for temporary data storage in 1 Kbyte blocks If at any time during the file download the printer runs out of RAM a warning will be displayed on the front panel and as much of the file as possible will be saved in flash Three things can limit the ability to save a file insufficient RAM insufficient Flash and lack of empty file system entries Flash can only be written once before it needs to be optimized As a result the maximum file size is limited to the largest unwritten block of Flash If any of these problems occur the printer will display an error message and will attempt to provide the operator with a description of
78. opening at the bottom of the front door and into the printer 48 IMPORTANT Label Peel Off Raised Ridge Rewinder Release Lever If you do not complete the following step it will be difficult to remove the liner from the rewinder 6 Turn the release lever on the rewinder counterclockwise and lock it in place This forms a raised ridge along the width of the rewinder 7 Insert the leading edge of the media into the closest slot of the rewinder and slide the media against the back flange 8 Hold the media in the slot and rotate the rewinder one full revolution counterclockwise until the media is taut 9 Remove labels from the liner so that behind the tear bar the liner is void of labels for about 1 5 inches and below the tear bar for about 2 inches 10 Close the front door eeoresl 11 Complete the media routing as shown above 49 Chapter 2 Using the Optional Internal Rewinder Media Cover 183404a Deck Lock Lever 12 Press down on both sides of the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise 13 Press the FEED key The label advances to the peel off position and Remove Label displays on the LCD 14 Manually remove the peeled label from the printer 15 Press the PAUSE key until ONLINE displays 16 Close the media cover IMPORTANT The rewinder supports a maximum diameter of 5 inc
79. option 198 ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID fault message 315 ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXxX fault message 315 ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM fault message 315 ERROR IPDS needs 300 DPI Head fault message 315 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED fault message 315 ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING QUEUES fault message 317 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM fault message 315 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH fault message 316 ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE fault message 316 ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID fault message 316 Error Recover option 122 ERROR SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED fault message 316 ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXX X fault message 316 ERROR WRITING TO FLASH fault message 316 ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM fault message 316 Errors Bad NVM 299 ILL NVM 299 Errors EOxx 299 ESC d command option 198 Ethernet 289 wireless 289 ETHERNET ADDRESS menu 244 submenus 245 ETHERNET PARAMS menu 246 submenus 247 Ethernet Speed option 247 ETX ACK 235 EVFU Select option 198 Exchange data 292 Expanded Font option PGL 198 Expanded Font option VGL 198 Expanded Fonts option IPDS 199 Ext Execute Copy option 199 Extended Subset option 199 Extra Bold Char option 147 F FAN FAULT message 317 Fanfold media 36 Fault 283 Fault Message BAD NVM CALL 1 311 BAD NVM CALL 2 311 BAD NVM CALL 3 311 BAD NVM CALL 4 311 BAD NVM CALL A 311 E01A TYPE 0x40 314 E01B TYPE 0x60 314 E02 MACHINE CHK 314 E03A DSI HASH L 314 E03B DSI HASH
80. page 76 Do not wear rings or other metallic objects while cleaning any interior area of the printer e Use only the cleaning agents recommended in this section Use of other cleaners may damage the printer and void its warranty e Donot spray or drip liquid cleaning solutions directly into the printer Apply the solution on a clean lint free cloth and then apply the dampened cloth to the printer e Do not use canned air in the interior of the printer as it can blow dust and debris onto sensors and other critical components e Only use a vacuum cleaner with a nozzle and hose that are conductive and grounded to drain off static build up All reference in these procedures for use of isopropyl alcohol requires that a 99 or greater isopropyl alcohol content be used to reduce the risk of moisture corrosion to the printhead Exterior Cleaning Clean the exterior surfaces with a clean lint free cloth If necessary use a mild detergent or desktop cleaning solution Interior Cleaning Clean the interior of the printer by removing any dirt and lint with a vacuum cleaner as described above or use a brush with soft non metallic bristles WARNING CAUTION Cleaning the Printhead Platen Roller Media Sensors and Media Damper Cleaning the Printhead Platen Roller Media Sensors and Media Damper NOTE Even though the printhead platen roller media sensors and media damper are individually listed in these cleaning procedure
81. path installed Add 7 5 D and 6 H for validator option Add 1 4 D for media cutter option Acoustic Specifications Table 31 T5R Acoustic Noise Levels per ISO 9296 Printing 6 IPS Standby 37 dBA 37 dBA 37 dBA 339 Appendix A 340 Maximum Page Length The maximum page length is 99 inches There is enough page memory allocated to support printing one 99 inch page The Page Mem Adjust menu option represents the longest form length used on the printer users should know the length of the applications they plan to run on the printer User applications that are less than or equal to the default setting of 24 inches do not need to modify the value Proper use of this menu facilitates optimal use of system memory NOTE The Page Mem Adjust value resets when the printer firmware is downloaded and or the printhead 203 DPI or 300 DPI is changed B Printer Options Options are offered with the printer to enhance its capabilities and to provide a large degree of application flexibility A description of the option complement is given below Field installable options include installation instructions Hardware Options Media Cutter The printer may be ordered with a cutter mechanism installed for cutting tags and label liner or the option can be installed by an authorized service representative at a later date Once installed the printer can be configured to automatically cut media after each or a specif
82. product line 11 Thermal printer technology 14 Thermal transfer printing 14 Thermal transfer ribbons 344 Threshold Range option 134 Ticket Save Mode option 125 Time processing improving 292 Timeout option C T Port 241 ETHERNET Port 243 USB Port 242 Timeout option Parallel Port 231 Timeout option Serial 237 TN3270 SETUP menu 164 TN5250 SETUP menu 166 TN5250 TN3270 14 TOF Adjust Mode option 126 TOF Adjust option 126 TOF Detect Fault option 125 Top Margin option 220 Translate Table option 220 Translation Tbl option Coax 220 Translation Tbl option SPC Coax 220 Translation Tbl option SPC Twinax 220 Translation Tbl option TN38270 TN5250 Twinax 221 Transmit Power option 255 Transmitted Data TD signal RS 232 serial interface 288 RS 422 serial interface 288 Trickle Time Serial option 237 Trickle Time option Parallel Port 231 Troubleshooting 291 control panel 300 Fault Message Troubleshooting Table 309 fault messages 308 LCD Messages 309 power failures 301 print quality 302 printer operation 305 printer problems and solutions 300 ribbon 307 True Vert 1 10 option 221 TrueType Fonts 275 TrueType Fonts Downloaded 280 Trunc Dyn Data option 221 Truncate Alpha option 221 TWINAX SETUP menu 156 Twinax Type option 221 Twinax coax host interface 13 Typeface option 221 U Unicode 193 Uniform Fonts option 222 Units option 123 Unpacking the printer 17 U
83. sharpness and uneven print quality e Current Config Prints the current printer configuration and helps identify the text print quality Also prints Printhead statistical data in the header e Left Test Prints a pattern containing a series of ladder type bar code symbols starting with four and decrementing by one symbol on each print until a single symbol prints on the left side This pattern helps identify ribbon wrinkle problems e Right Test Prints a pattern containing a series of ladder type bar code symbols starting with four and decrementing by one symbol on each print until a single symbol prints on the right side This pattern helps identify ribbon wrinkle problems e Combo Test Prints a combined left test and right test Ethernet Test Prints the Network Interface statistics e Barcode Demo Prints text and barcodes with the barcodes positioned at the left and right margins of the standard label media supplied with the printer The test automatically produces output for 4 6 and 8 inch printers at 203 dpi and 300 dpi e Novram Error Log Prints detailed information about the most recent Novram related failure This option is useful when the control panel displays Bad NVM or ILL NVM type errors Contact the Customer Support Center if such an error occurs e ODV RFID Report This item appears only if the validator and or RFID encoder is installed Prints a report of the validation and or RFID statistics si
84. the printhead Check that the printhead assembly is properly closed by making sure the printhead latch is fully engaged Verify that the ribbon and media are compatible incompatibility can cause extremely light printing Match the ribbon to the type of media being used Check the used sections of ribbon for a printed image Often times when ribbon and media are incompatible the image can be seen on the ribbon but it will not transfer to the media Check that the Print Intensity is correct Set the Print Intensity in the MEDIA SETUP menu or via the host software Check that the Label Width parameter value does not exceed the width of the media installed Set the Label Width in the MEDIA SETUP menu Run the Checkerboard test print pattern from the DIAGNOSTICS menu Note Any imbalance of the print on the page The printhead pressure may need adjustment Remove the printhead completely and re install it ensuring the cables are correctly seated 300 Solving other Printer Problems Table 17 Printer Problems and Solutions continued Symptom Solution Explanation LCD message display is illuminated and the printer appears to be working but nothing prints and Invalid Data displays This message informs the user that the printer has received data but no valid commands were found This typically occurs when an incorrect emulation or SFCC was selected This message will continue to display until new dat
85. these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication Printronix may make improvements and or changes in the product s described in this publication at any time without notice Any references in this information to non Printronix Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites The materials at those Web sites are not part of the 379 Appendix J Note materials for this Printronix product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment Therefore the results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly Some measurements may have been made on development level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems Furthermore some measurement may have been estimated through extrapolation Actual results may vary Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment Information concerning non Printronix products was obtained from the suppliers of those products their published announcements or other publicly available sources Printronix has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance compatibility or any other claims related to non Printronix products Questions on the capabilities of non Printronix products should be addressed to the suppl
86. to meet all of your labelling needs The Printronix Expanded Die Library details hundreds of label sizes and configurations which are quickly obtainable through the Printronix custom order system without the typical added costs and delays associated with the creation and tooling of a special die to match your requirements Genuine Printronix ThermaLine Media ThermaLine omer F ore Media Type Description Typical Applications Media 110 Premium coated thermal transfer paper Compliance shipping general warehouse address Permanent acrylic adhesive AIAG LOGMARS product ID hardware parts supply Media 120R Premium coated thermal transfer paper Temporary product ID pricing point of sale shelf Removable adhesive marking labels which can be cleanly removed Media 180T 7 0 mil coated thermal transfer paper Retail hangtag warehouse bin and pouch inserts Media 210 tag stock Economy direct thermal paper Permanent acrylic adhesive inventory control work in process general purpose tag Short life deli grocery shipping work in process Media 220 Media 270 Media 280T Premium direct thermal paper Permanent acrylic adhesive Infra Red scannable direct paper Permanent acrylic adhesive 7 mil direct thermal paper tag stock Compliance shipping general warehouse address AIAG LOGMARS product ID Infra red scannability for overnight shipping and grocery environments Economical ticket and tag stock for gen
87. trailing edge This does not include the liner material or gap e Tag Stock with notches or holes measurable length from the trailing edge of one notch or hole to the leading edge of the next notch or hole e Tag Stock with black marks on underside measurable length from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark e Continuous media no label length indicators measurable length should be within 1 2 the Label Length value entered in the MEDIA CONTROL menu or the value sent via host software command e Logical Label Length Host Forms Length is the length that a user or programmer bases his printable image on In most cases this length should be slightly less than the Physical Label Length This allows the entire image to be printed within the boundaries of the label length indicators gaps notches holes or black marks When the Logical Label Length is greater than the Physical Label Length and Clip Page Enable in the MEDIA CONTROL menu the printer will clip the bottom portion of the image that exceeds the Physical Label length In this case the printable data that was not printed will be lost MEDIA CONTROL Submenus When the Logical Label Length is greater than the Physical Label Length and Clip Page Disable the printer will continue to print the image onto the next physical label and ignore the gap or mark based on the label length value set in the MEDIA CONTROL menu Wh
88. values within submenus shay jaued j01 U05 jaued 101 U09 92 Button Description CANCEL Key When the CANCEL key is enabled pressing it will clear all data in the printer buffer and prevent printing of that data Note The factory default Disable However when the Coax Twinax Interface option is installed the factory default Enable DOWN Key in Menu Mode MENU Key ENTER Key Pressing the ENTER key in Menu Mode selects the displayed option or value An asterisk then appears next to the option or value indicating it has been selected Note If the ENTER key is locked ENTER SWITCH LOCKED displays on the LCD for one second Press the x DOWN and ENTER keys at the same time to unlock the ENTER key Function in Online Mode None Takes the printer Offline and selects the Menu Mode None Function in Offline Mode Clears all data in the printer data buffer when enabled Selects the Menu Mode None Function in Menu Mode Scrolls the current menu selection one level down Scrolls between main menu selections Selects the current menu value and displays an asterisk next to the value 1U09 SAdy JoUe_ JO1 U0D Jaydeug d 10 9Ipu pue S 01 U09 Powering On the Printer Powering On the Printer When you power on the printer it executes a self test During the self test the LCD momentarily displays the DPI resolution
89. vertically here use your plus and minus keys to cycle through the options when you are operating your printer 157 Chapter 3 SPC COAX SETUP SPC COAX SETUP SPC COAX SETUP 12 3 from page 86 SPC Type Logical Buf Intervention Buffer Translation PA1 Size Req Print Tol PTX NI 1920 Send To Host Disable Avatar Comp 960 Do Not Send Enable 2560 3440 3564 PA2 Buffer Null Handling SPC SPC Space SFCC Char Reprint Null Supp Supp Disable Space Enable Disable User Defined Enable Ignore Disable Enable Set 1 lt gt Set 2 Set 3_ _ User User User NL At Defined St1 4 Defined St2 4 Defined Stof MPP 1 5F 5F 5B On 40 to FF 40 to FF 40 to FF Off Notes 158 Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 This menu appears only if the CTHI option is installed 2 This menu appears only if Port Type under C T PORT is set to Coax 3 Appears only if CTHI emulation under PRINTER CONTROL is set to Simp Prot Conv 4 This menu appears only if you select the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu SPC TWINAX SETUP SPC TWINAX SETUP 12 3 from page 86 SPC Type SFCC Char User User User SFCC Defined St1 4 De
90. what steps to take to correct the error Normally the solution will involve optimizing the Flash File System This can be accomplished by selecting the Optimize amp Reboot function in the Flash File System menu under MAINT MISC NOTE After selecting the Optimize amp Reboot function do not shut off the printer s power until after the printer returns to the power on state Loss of power during the optimize process may corrupt the printer s program If this occurs first attempt to repeat the downloading process If that fails contact an authorized service representative Thermal Commands Thermal Commands Table 33 lists PTX_SETUP commands which apply to thermal printers Table 33 Thermal PTX_SETUP Commands Command Sub Command Parameter Description ENGINE ALM_WIDE ALM_NARROW wide width narrow width Set the Auto Label Mapping wide wiath in units of 1 1000 e g a wide width value of 1000 1 which represents the width of the image in the file sent from the host which is to be auto label mapped into several labels each of which will have a width of narrow width of labels wide width narrow width rounded down Set the Auto Label Mapping narrow wiath which represents the width of one auto mapped label in units of 1 1000 e g a narrow width value of 1000 1 This width should be set prior to the wide width In addition it can never exceed the physical width of the prin
91. where filename exe is the file name you noted in step 11 This command takes the file on the hard drive and copies it as a binary file into the flash memory on the printer controller board Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller PCBA incompletely loaded and the printer may not boot up 16 17 18 19 20 While the file is copied into memory the printer LCD informs you of the download process and status When the new software has successfully downloaded into flash memory and the printer has reset itself set the printer power switch to O Off Remove the CD from the host computer and store it with the printer If required reconnect the data input cable s to the printer Set the printer power switch to On Using the configuration printout s you made in step 1 on page 267 restore the printer configurations Downloading Software through the NIC IMPORTANT IMPORTANT To download software through the NIC you need the IP Address of the printer and the flash memory must contain basic printer code If a download was interrupted e g by a power outage you must download software through the parallel port See Downloading Software if Flash Contains Only Boot or Corrupt Code on page 274 OW Ree ON es 10 11 Make a configuration printout of all saved configurations See page 81 Set the printer power switch to O
92. y 121 79 SUB 26 1A 58 3A Z 90 5A z 122 7A ESC 27 1B 59 3B 91 5B 123 7B FS 28 1C lt 60 3C 92 5C 124 7C GS 29 1D E 61 3D 93 5D 125 7D 349 Appendix C Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex RS 30 1E gt 62 3E A 94 5E G 126 7E US 31 1F 63 3F 95 5F 127 7F NOTE For the hardware handshake XON XOFF commands XON Ctrl Q DC1 XOFF Ctrl S DC3 350 D Media Cutter Installation Prepare the Printer Peel Tear Assembly 183423a Screw 2 Lower Support Assembly Ss Peel Tear Door Figure 1 Peel Tear Assembly Set the printer power switch to O Off 2 Open the peel tear door by pulling it upward then forward Using the appropriate metric hex key remove the two screws attaching the peel tear assembly to the lower support assembly NOTE Keep the two screws you have removed you will use them to attach the cutter assembly to the lower support assembly 351 Appendix D _ installing the Cutter Installing the Cutter RJ 11 Receptacle 183424a RJ 11 Connector Lower Support Assembly Cutter Assembly Mounting Bracket Cutter Assembly Metal Tab 2 Magnetic Catch 2 Figure 2 Cutter Assembly 1 Plug the RJ 11 connector into the RJ 11 receptacle 2 Pullthe metal tabs from the magnetic catches and swing open the cutter assembly mounting bracket from the cutter assembly WAR
93. your plus and minus keys to cycle through the options when you are operating your printer 1 Refer to page 195 for a more detailed description of this submenu Refer to page 195 for a more detailed description of this submenu 161 Chapter 3 IPDS SETUP IPDS Setup Print IPDS Fonts This feature allows you to print a list of all resident fonts currently available in the active IPDS emulation 4028 or 3816 15308 Resident_IPDS Fonts 4028 Emulation FGID FONT PT Hex Deci WIDTH CPI SIZE PRINTSAMPLE 3 144 10 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghi j0123456789 11 144 10 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Prestige Pica 12 144 10 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Courier Italic 18 144 10 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdeftghi j0123456789 OCR A 19 10 ABCDEFGHIJabcdef ghi j012345b789 Courier Bold 46 144 10 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 APL 76 12 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdef ghi 30123456789 Courier 85 12 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 86 92 Prestige Elite 12 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Courier Italic 12 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Prestige Elite Bold 12 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Prestige Elite Italics 12 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdef ghi j0123456789 Document PSM PS ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Prestige PSM PS ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Prestige elite 15 ABCDEF GHI Jabcdefghij0123456789 Courier 15 ABCDEEFGHI Jabcdefghij0123456789 Courier ABCDEEGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Prestige Elite ABCDEEGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Gothic Text ABCDEFGHI Jabcde
94. 0 e Enable When enabled this option ignores the EBCDIC value 0x00 in the IPDS data stream Optimized Ratio This option selects different bar code ratios for certain bar codes including Code 39 and Interleaved 2 of 5 It is included for compatibility with the IGP X00 printers e Disable factory default Use standard bar code ratios e Enable Select the alternate bar code ratios Overstrike Overstrike determines the action required when a line is printed over a previous line because a carriage return was received without a line feed e Enable factory default Prints the second line on top of the first line e Disable Replaces the characters from the first line with the second line Emulation Submenus PA1 PA 1 is only valid when the printer is in the offline state and the coax Systems Network Architecture Character Set SCS data stream is active This function displays the PA1 ENABLED message when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is put back online Refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual for more information about SCS NOTE Selecting PA1 again PA1 DISABLED appears on the operator panel or selecting PA2 will reset the pending PA1 function PA2 PA2 is only valid when the printer is offline and the coax SCS data stream is active This function displays the PA2 ENABLED message when the key is pressed and sends a special o
95. 00 2099 Jan 01 00 23 00 59 2000 2099 Jan Dec 01 31 Notes Factory Default 1 This menu appears only if the real time clock option is installed 2 Updates the set parameters only if the real time clock option is installed Date Submenus Hour This option allows you to set the hour The factory default is 00 and the range is from 00 to 23 hours Minute This option allows you to set the minutes The factory default is 00 and the range is from 00 to 59 minutes Year This option allows you to set the year The factory default is 2099 and the range is from the year 2000 to 2099 Month This option allows you to set the month The factory default is Jan and the range is from Jan to Dec Day This option allows you to set the day The factory default is 01 and the range is from 01 to 31 days 263 Chapter 3 DATE 264 4 Downloading Software Loading Flash Memory IMPORTANT Flash memory is contained in a component located on the controller PCBA Printer control languages the emulations and printer operating system software are loaded into flash memory at the factory but there are occasions when you may have to download this software e You have replaced the controller PCBA e The customer needs to upgrade printer software e The customer needs TN emulation software e The customer buys the RFID option after the printer is installed Emulation and operating system software are inc
96. 157 tp 313m 1 to 156m The options are Enable factory default and Disable Ribbon Low When enabled and the amount of ribbon remaining on the supply spindle is approximately 75 to 50 meters or less the Online status indicator flashes and Ribbon Low displays on the second line of the LCD A Ribbon Low warning message will not prevent printing The options are Disable factory default and Enable NOTE The Display Ribbon option must be set to Enable for the warning to display Rbn Takeup Full This enables or disables a fault message to display for a Ribbon Takeup Full condition The options are Enable factory default and Disable MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Units This item selects either millimeters or inches as the unit of measure The options are In Inches factory default and In Millimeters Set Label Length This feature selects whether the Sensed Distance value derived from an Auto or Manual Calibrate will be used to set the Label Length value in the MEDIA CONTROL menu and the QUICK SETUP menu Manual factory default The Sensed Distance value derived from an Auto or Manual Calibrate will not override or change the Label Length value Automatic When an Auto or Manual Calibrate is performed the Sensed Distance value derived from either calibrate will override and change the Label Length value If no Auto or Manual Calibrate is performed the current Label Length value will be used NOTE When Set
97. 22 serial interfaces enable the printer to operate with bit serial devices that are compatible with an RS 232 controller The input serial data transfer rate in baud is selectable from the printer s control panel Baud rates of 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 are available NOTE If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200 you may need to use RS 422 to prevent data loss You may also need to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve performance The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not exceed 50 feet 15 meters for RS 232 or 4000 feet 1220 meters for RS 422 A copper conductor twisted pair telephone cable with a shunt capacitance of 16 pF foot 52 5 pF meter terminated in a 100 ohm resistive load must be used for the RS 422 Table 15 RS 232 Serial Interface Connector 9 Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Receive Data RXD 2 Transmit Status amp Control 3 Chassis Signal Ground 5 Data TXD Clear To Send CTS 8 Request To Send RTS 7 Data Set Ready DSR 6 Data Terminal Ready DTR 4 Data Carrier Detect DCD 1 287 Chapter 5 RS 232 and Optional RS 422 Serial Interfaces Received Data RXD Serial data stream to the printer Transmitted Data TXD Serial data stream from the printer for transmitting status and control information to the host Subject to protocol selec
98. 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED INNO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY
99. 4 4 Conflicting Terms You agree that this Agreement provides you no more rights with regards to warranty support indemnity or liability terms with respect to Printronix Inc or any contributor to the Embedded Software than that provided by any express warranty that may be made by Printronix Inc 5 Limitation of Liability UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY WHETHER TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE SHALL RED HAT PRINTRONIX ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE OR ANY PART THEREOF OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THAT EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 6 U S Government Users The Embedded Software is a commercial item as that term is defined in 48 C F R 2 101 Oct 1995 consisting of commercial computer soft
100. 4 or 36 lines 0 to 144 lines Notes Factory Default 1 When the CTHI option is installed the factory default is Printable 2 All three Form Length submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically 3 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 4 The factory default value depends on the width of the printer model 5 All Form Width submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically 173 Chapter 3 P SER XQ SETUP P SER XQ SETUP P SER XQ SETUP 1 3 from page 90 Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Horizontal Vertical Prop DPI DPI Spacing 10 0 CPI 6 0 LPI Letter Gothic 120 DPI 72 DPI Enable 12 0 CPI 8 0 LPI Courier 60 to 400 DPI 72 to 400 DPI Disable 13 3 CPI 10 3 LPI OCR A 15 0 CPI OCR B 17 1 CPI 20 0 CPI Italic Slashed Left Right Top Print Zero Margin Margin Margin Disable Enable 0 characters 0 characters 0 linespaces Forward Slant Disable 0 to 369 characters 0 to 369 characters 0 to 451 linespaces Backward Slant i Bottom Print Char Define CR Auto LF Define LF Control Marg
101. 40 or 128 bits The more bits you choose the more difficult it will be to decode the information NOTE None of the WEP Key Configuration menus display on the configuration printout WEP Key Format Allows you to format the WEP keys in ASCII or hexadecimal code The factory default is Hexadecimal WEP Key Width This is the encryption strength The options are 40 Bits and 128 Bits 40 bits are weaker and 128 bits are stronger NOTE If you select 40 bits the WEP Key BYTE6 through WEP Key BYTE13 menus will not display The factory default is 128 bits WEP Key BYTE1 through BYTE13 These are the individual characters of the encryption key 255 Chapter 3 _WLANPARAMS 256 Reset WEP Keys Allows you to reset all four WEP keys WEP Key 1 through WEP Key 4 at one time WPA Mode Selects the WPA wireless security mode Disable factory default WPA security is disabled Personal Selects personal or pre shared key PSK mode for WPA2 security Enterprise 802 1x mode is more secure than WPA2 mode Enterprise mode uses dynamic encryption keys distributed securely after a user logs in with their username and password or provides a valid digital certificate An Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP is used for authentication WPA Cipher Selects the WPA wireless security cipher setting Options include TKIP factory default AES TKIP AES Disable WPA P Phs Allows you to set the individual bytes of the
102. 48 4116 or 65 6548 4132 China 86 400 886 5598 India 800 102 7869 http www printronix com supplies parts aspx 371 Appendix H Printronix Customer Support Center Corporate Offices Printronix Inc 15345 Barranca Parkway Irvine CA 92618 U S A Phone 714 368 2300 Fax 714 368 2600 Printronix Inc c o Printronix Nederland BV Bijsterhuizen 11 38 6546 AS Nijmegen The Netherlands Phone 31 24 6489489 Fax 31 24 6489499 Printronix Schweiz GmbH 42 Changi South Street 1 Changi South Industrial Estate Singapore 486763 Phone 65 6542 0110 Fax 65 6546 1588 Printronix Commercial Shanghai Co Ltd 22F Eton Building East No 555 Pudong Av Shanghai City 200120 P R China Phone 86 400 886 5598 Fax 86 21 5138 0564 Visit the Printronix web site at www printronix com 372 Glossary Baud rate BIT Boot up Buffer Coax Configuration Continuous Media Continuous Media Handling Mode Controller Baud Rate is the number of information bits that can be transmitted between the printer and the computer in one second For example one baud equals one bit per second in a series of binary signals Both the printer and the computer must be configured to the same baud rate Binary digIT A digit in the binary number system represented by a0 or a1 A bit is the smallest unit of storage in a digital computer The start up procedure which causes a computer operating sy
103. 5 TrueType 275 Form Length lines option 200 Form Width char option 200 Form Width in option 200 Form Width mm option 201 Format Control option 201 Forms Handling option 201 Forms Length in option 200 Forms Length mm option 200 FPGA FILE NOT FOUND fault message 318 FRAMING ERROR fault message 318 Framing Errors option 240 G Gap 59 Gap Length option 133 GAP NOT DETECTED See Manual fault message 318 Gap Windowing option 132 Gap Mark Sensor option 101 128 Gap Mark Thresh option 129 Gaps 56 Gateway Addess option 245 250 General PTX_SETUP commands 362 General Purpose Input Ouput GPIO option 343 Gothic Typeface option 201 Graphic Chek Cod option 202 Graphic Chek Err option 202 GRF CHK ERROR PRESS PAUSE fault message 318 401 H H00 PCI SLOT message 319 H01 PCI J24 message 319 H02 PCI J25 message 319 Half Speed Mode fault message 319 Handshaking 292 hardware 292 software 292 Hardware options 341 Head On Time option 228 HEAD POWER FAIL fault message 319 Head Print Dist option 228 Head Type option 228 HeadClose Action option 131 Hex Dump Mode option 227 Hexdump mode option 202 Holes 56 Hor Image Shift option 99 112 Horizontal black marks 55 Horizontal DPI option 203 Host Command option 203 Host Form Length option IPDS 204 Host Form Length option PGL 204 Host Forms Length option VGL 205 Host interface characteristics 338 Host Interf
104. 5250 host interface Set for 13 2 inches when printing files larger than the width of the printer All data exceeding the width of the maximum Printer Width will be truncated e 13 2 inches factory default e Printer Width the maximum width of the printer Midline PY includes PN e Disable factory default The Graphics mode Enabled command PY must be the first three characters of a line e Enable The PY or PN can occur anywhere in a line 209 Chapter 3 210 EPSON FX SETUP NL at MPP 1 Specifies the linespacing action when the printline exceeds the rightmost print position and text continues from the leftmost print position on a new line e On factory default Moves to the first print position two lines down from the current position e Off Moves to the first print position of the next print line Null Handling This item allows the printer to either treat nulls as blank spaces or ignore them If nulls are ignored the print position does not move e Space factory default Treats nulls as spaces e Ignore Ignores nulls Null Suppression Coax TN3270 This item allows the printer to either treat nulls as blank spaces or ignore them If nulls are ignored the print position does not move e Off factory default Ignores nulls e On Treats nulls as spaces Null Suppression IPDS e Disable factory default When disabled an exception is generated when the IPDS data stream contains an 0x0
105. 97 Chapter 6 Restore the Printer to Operation 10 Push the release tab down on the upper media sensor cable assembly and remove the cable from the printhead assembly NOTE The upper media sensor cable assembly connects in the middle for 4 inch models on the left side for 6 inch models Figure 8 and on the right side for 8 inch models 11 Position the new printhead assembly below the pivoting deck and connect the printhead controller power supply and upper media sensor cable assemblies NOTE You may need to gently pull the lower tabs of the retainer clips upward to install the printhead assembly 12 Slide the printhead assembly upward into the pivoting deck until the retainer clips snap it in place Make sure that the cable assemblies do not extend past the printhead cover and into the media or ribbon path Restore the Printer to Operation 1 Inspect the light brown area of the printhead for smudges or fingerprints If necessary gently clean the light brown area with a soft lint free cloth or a cotton swab moistened with isopropyl alcohol or use a Cleaning Pen P N 203502 001 Install the ribbon and media e g paper label or tag stock material oo Close the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise Figure 7 Close the media cover Plug the AC power cord into the printer and the power source Set the printer power switch to On Press to place the printer in Menu mode
106. AWID 869 or 902 to 928 MHz AWID 915 Typical RF Power 25 to 100 milliwatts SL5x04 Maximum RF Power 1 Watt under abnormal conditions Printronix SL TS5R Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Canada This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 and RSS 210 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 et RSS 210 du Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device 381 Appendix J _ Communication Notices This device has been designed to operate with the antennas having a maximum gain of 18 dBi Antennas having a gain greater than 18 dBi dB are strictly prohibited for use with this device The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms To reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power e i r p is not more than that permitted for successful communication Korea At S At H ol JIZIE 78S Ba SS MAT et JIFZIEM Fe IFI 485 oF th SE ASA ASF CE Notice European Union Marking by the CE symbol indicates compliance of this Printronix system to the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive of the European Union Such marking is indicative that this Printronix syst
107. BYTE4 WEP Key 2 BYTE5 WEP Key 2 BYTEE WEP Key 2 BYTE7 WEP Key 2 BYTES WEP Key 2 BYTE9 WEP Key 2 BYTE10 WEP Key 2 BYTE11 WEP Key 2 BYTE12 WEP Key 2 BYTE13 WEP Key 3 Format WEP Key 3 Width WEP Key 3 BYTE1 WEP Key 3 BYTE2 WEP Key 3 BYTES WEP Key 3 BYTE4 WEP Key 3 BYTES WEP Key 3 BYTE6 WEP Key 3 BYTE7 WEP Key 3 BYTES WEP Key 3 BYTE9 WEP Key 3 BYTE10 4 WEP Key 3 BYTE11 4 WEP Key 3 BYTE12 4 WEP Key 3 BYTE13 4 WEP Key 4 Format WEP Key 4 Width WEP Key 4 BYTE1 WEP Key 4 BYTE2 WEP Key 4 BYTES WEP Key 4 BYTE4 WEP Key 4 BYTES WEP Key 4 BYTES WEP Key 4 BYTE7 WEP Key 4 BYTES WEP Key 4 BYTE9 WEP Key 4 BYTE10 WEP Key 4 BYTE11 WEP Key 4 BYTE12 gt WEP Key 4 BYTE13 Default WEP Key Reset WEP Keys WPA Mode WPA Cipher WPA P Phs 01 15 WPA P Phs 16 30 WPA P Phs 31 32 Reset WPA P Phs Rea RAD aoaaa 93 Chapter 3 _MainMenu KERBEROS WLAN PRINTER DATE PARAMS EAP 8 MGMT page 263 page 257 page 260 page 262 EAP Mode PNE Port Time Date Kerberos Enable Kerb Pwd 01 15 Kerb Pwd 16 30 Kerb Pwd 31 40 Reset Kerb Pwd KDC Port Number Clock Skew Units Clock Skew SEC Tckt Life Units Tckt Life SEC Renew Life Units Renew Life SEC EAP User 01 15 EAP User 16 30 EAP User 32 32 Reset EAP User EAP Pswd 01 15 EAP Pswd 16 30 EAP Pswd 31 32 Reset EAP Pswd Mgmt Protocol PNE Po
108. Before normal printing can continue the fault must be corrected the message cleared by pressing the PAUSE key and the printer placed online Media Handling Modes Before you load media you must decide which media handling mode to use e Continuous Prints on the media and sends it out the front of the printer When the optional internal rewinder is installed use Continuous for Batch Rewind mode see page 43 e Tear Off Strip Prints on the media and sends it out the front until the print buffer is empty then positions the last label over the tear bar for removal e Tear Off After each label is printed the printer positions the label over the tear bar and waits for you to tear off the label before printing the next label on demand printing A Remove Label message will display to remind you to remove the label before the next one can be printed 27 Chapter 2 Loading Media and Ribbon e Peel Off When the optional internal rewinder is installed the printer prints and peels die cut labels from the liner without user assistance The label liner is wound on the rewinder The printer waits for you to take away the label before printing the next one on demand printing A Remove Label message will display to remind you to remove the label before the next one can be printed For Label Peel off information see page 48 e Cut When the optional media cutter is installed the printer automatically cuts media a
109. CDEFGHIJabcdefghij0l23456789 Arabic Kateb 0021 33 144 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghi j0123456789 Gothic Text 0028 40 144 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghij0123456789 Katakana Gothic 002c 44 144 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Gothic Text 0042 66 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghij0123456789 Gothic Text Italic 0044 68 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefgh ij0123456789 84 85 Script 0054 ABCDEFGHI Jabedegghij0123456789 Courier 0055 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Prestige Elite 0056 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Letter Gothic 0057 87 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdef ghi j0123456789 Prestige Italic 0070 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdet ghi j0123456789 Boldface Italic PSM 009b ABCLEFGHI Jabcedef ghi j 0123456789 Essay PSM 00a0 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Essay Italic PSM 00a2 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdef ghij0123456789 Arabic Yasmin PSM 00a6 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Arabic Expanded PSM 00a9 ABCDEFGHIlJabcdefghij012345 6789 Essay Light PSM 00ad ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Document PSM O0af ABCDEFGHIJabcdef ghij0123456789 Gothic Text 00cc ABCDEFGHI Jabcdef ghi j0123456789 Serif Text 00e5 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdef ghi j0 123456789 Gothic Text 00e6 ABCDEF GHIJabcdefghi 50123456789 Courier oof4 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefgh ii 01234567892 Courier oofc ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghij0123456789 Courier Super Subscr 00fe ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghij0123456789 Arabic Kateb 0109 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghij012345678 9 Gothic Text 0119 ABCDEFGHI Jabedefghi j0123456789 Gothic Text 0122 ABCOEFGHI Jabcdef ghi 30128456789 Letter Gothic Bold 0194 ABCDEFGH
110. Capability allows batch form processing You can identify individual numeric and bar code data fields which includes automatic increment or decrement functions Scaling Capability permits graphic elements such as corners or boxes to retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi Multinational Character Sets provide 32 international character sets each 96 characters in length This feature also allows you to create your own character sets using characters defined and stored in memory Extended Character Sets provide 33 extended character sets also containing 96 characters in length These are also stored in memory 151 Chapter 3 152 EMULATIONS VGL The VGL Graphics language is a software emulation designed for the thermal printer The VGL emulation of the QMS Code V Version II programming language produces on line forms bar codes and alphanumeric text generation It includes the following features On Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels with the preprinted look for each application VGL programs control all graphics functions dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing time Graphics capabilities include boxes vertical and horizontal solid and dashed lines with a variety of thickness logos and special alphanumeric print features Variable Bar Codes allow the bar code for your
111. D message will display on the LCD Moving within the Configuration Menu You can move through the configuration menus using the appropriate navigation keys as shown in Figure 2 See Controls and Indicators on page 23 for more details on the function of the operator panel keys You can select different options and save them as the power on default you can save up to 8 configurations with exception to the factory configuration The factory configuration menu can be altered but not saved When the printer is online the first line of the LCD displays ONLINE and the second line lists the active interface port and type of emulation To configure the printer 1 Press the key to enter the printer configuration menu system MENU MODE QUICK SETUP displays on the LCD 2 You can move through configuration main menus in two ways e Press the key to move to the right e Press the key to move right or the key to move left 73 Chapter 3 74 Overview NOTE In menus with numeric ranges of more than 50 numbers hold down the or key for more than 2 seconds to move through the range in increments of 5 To move in increments of 1 again release your hold on the or key Step Press LCD Notes 1 OFFLINE UU PAUSE 2 L J ENTER SWITCH Allows you to make amp UNLOCKED configuration changes 3 Bree MENU MODE Enables the printer QUICK SETUP configuration menu 4 4 UNTIL Print Mode Transfe
112. D release the keys Wait until you see PROGRAM DOWNLOAD on the LCD before proceeding This can take about a minute to appear depending on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer Using Windows Explorer create a directory named download at the root level of your C hard drive C download Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer s CD drive 267 Chapter 4 IMPORTANT 268 Downloading Software through the Parallel Port 10 11 12 13 14 15 Open the readme txt file on the CD There are two emulation sets with corresponding part number files from which to choose CT IPDS PGL VGL ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL TN PGL VGL ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL Both emulation sets include the LP emulation They are offered in two file formats exe and prg Use exe files to download through the parallel port Identify which emulation set you want to download into the printer and note the filename that corresponds to that emulation The filename is a six digit number plus exe For example 123456 exe This is the file you will download into the printer Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 8 Start a command prompt session The Start Menu icon is usually labeled Ms Dos Prompt or Command Prompt At the command prompt type c lt Enter gt cd download lt Enter gt Enter the following command filename exe pb lt Enter gt
113. DS 1024 Bytes e 5225 4234 After the emulation has been changed a POR status is sent to the host Typeface Letter Gothic factory default Letter Gothic is a non proportional font where all of the characters take up the same amount of space when printed e Courier Courier is a non proportional monospaced font where all characters take up the same amount of space when printed e OCR A OCR B Optical character recognition fonts printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 144 dpi vertically Both fonts print only at 10 cpi 221 Chapter 3 222 EPSON FX SETUP Uniform Fonts Disable factory default The typeface selected while in Extended Graphics Mode will be cancelled when the graphics pass is complete Enable The typeface selected while in Extended Graphics Mode will also be used in Standard Graphics Mode and Normal Mode UPC Descenders PGL This parameter allows you to print bar code descenders when human readable data is not presented in the UPC EAN bar codes Always factory default UPC EAN bar codes are printed with descenders even if there is no human readable data Never UPC EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if the PDF command is present Only With PDF UPC EAN bar codes are printed with descenders only when the PDF command is presented UPC Descenders VGL Enable factory default UPC EAN bar codes are printed with descenders even if there is no human readable data Disable
114. Detects removal of labels in Tear Off mode and in Peel Off mode when optional rewinder is installed e Resident Fonts Letter Gothic Bold 93779 Courier Bold 93952 CG Triumvirate Bold Condensed 92250 OCR A 90993 OCR B 91409 CG Triumvirate 92244 CG Triumvirate Bold 92248 and CG Times New Roman 92500 e Standard Interfaces e 10 100Base Ethernet e Network Interface Port This interface allows you to attach the printer to a LAN Local Area Network rather than attaching it directly toa host computer The port is visible on the back panel The ethernet port is a 10 100Base and supports data transfer rates up to 100 Mbps The PrintNet Enterprise Suite PNE remote management software is included with the package The option is enabled by a security key e Parallel Centronics compatible parallel IEEE 1284 compliant parallel Optional Features e Serial RS 232 e USB 2 0 Universal Serial Bus NOTE The interface cable needed to connect the printer to the host device is supplied by the user Tear Off Mode Positions the label at the tear off position and detects its removal before printing the next label Tear Off Strip Mode Prints a specified number of labels and positions the last label at the tear off position Thermal Transfer and Direct Thermal Printing On all printers except DT models which print only in direct thermal mode Ventless System For operation in environments with air
115. E O E E E da beissin ih aetna eerie deeeedes 149 OV OL VIO Wire siege ee ae aed ahh ae hs del eee ed seen nt ee dee ao 149 GOAX SELUP fin cf eee ls Lhe ta es Ate A 153 TWINAX SETUP ioiii tele See end eee aie dace 156 SPC COAX SETUP aia Sneed a vi Se 158 SPO TWINAX SETUP aa andan an enana ae n raana aA reaa Aa Reena 159 POSSE TUR a a a A an ene EAE 160 TNS270 SETUP nea Mae ee a ee dia 164 TNS 250 SETUP ennerien i inte att ieee Mi ie as 166 PGLESET UP oiron dee a ea ea arr aaae E A aae bling 168 AVE iro c A T AE EEEE EA ATAOE EAA 170 P SERIES SETUP A a aa a Ee aaa ranta aai 172 Ee DAE ARN EEE E A E T 174 SERIAL MATRIX SETUP cccccccceececeeeceeseeeaeceeeeeceesssaeaeeeeeeeesenees 176 PROPRINTER XL SET Pisiesfcieecechidevcendsheiebeteasthetidgeieeiedevtes laedie diese 178 EPSON PXSE TUR E E EE AEEA EE 180 Emulation SUDMENUS ccccccccccesessececeeececseseeseceeeeeescserseaeeeeeeeens 182 DIAGNOSTICS 3 aticccieds a a a a a 225 DIAGNOSTICS SUbMenUS c cccccccccecsesseeceeeeecessessaeeeeeeeens 226 PARALLEL PORT vai 0eis ctf 3 eee A eee S 229 PARALLEL PORT SubMenue c cccccccccsssssseceeeseeeesesssaeeeeeeeees 230 SERIAL POR Vesscoec vest dcues aces casts A abis tate AE 233 SERIAL PORT SubMenwS cccccccccsesscecesececsessaeceeeeseessesseaeees 234 GA PO Rivas get eevee e aaa e tent ena eae ee 241 C T PORT SuUbMeNUSs 2 32 s ieeier Adee ee eee eee 241 YSB POR Ta a aa aa a ae aaaea asete 242 USB Port
116. EC option 258 Epson FX 188 PGL 189 Proprinter XL 192 P Series Serial Clock Skew Units option 258 Cmd Resolution option 193 COAX SETUP menu 153 Coax Type option 193 Coax twinax host interface 342 Code Page Subset option 193 Command operation of FILE_IO 368 Commands impact 369 PTX_SETUP 361 Communication Centronics parallel 282 Dataproducts Long Lines 282 IEEE 1284 parallel bidirectional 284 Compatibility mode IEEE 1284 interface 284 Compatibility option 142 Compressed Print option 194 CONFIG command summary 367 CONFIG CONTROL menu 104 submenus 105 Configuration menu moving within 73 moving within ill 74 overview 82 Configurations loading saved 81 modifying saved 79 printing 81 saving 76 specifying power up 78 Configuring the printer 73 Continuous Mode option 124 Continuous media handling 27 CONTRAST TOO LOW Check media fault message 313 Control Code 06 option 194 Control Code 08 option 194 Control panel 23 Control panel keys 25 Controlling print quality 294 Controls 23 Copy Count option 194 CR at MPP 1 option 194 CR Edit option 194 CR EM amp NL option 195 Create And Send Download File Download Mode 277 Online PGL Only 276 CSC 371 CTHI 342 CTHI Emulation option 138 Customer Support Center 371 Cut media handling 28 Cutter 337 CUTTER FAULT Check Cutter fault message 313 Cutter Option cleaning 72 D Dark ba
117. ER CONTROL menu 1 This menu appears only if you select the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu Coax Setup Primary Sets and Secondary Sets COAX SETUP from page 153 Primary Sets 0037 English US 0037 Eng Nether 0285 English UK 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0287 Danish Alt 0278 Finnish 0288 Finn Alt 0297 French 0500 Internat 5 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0289 Span Alt 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg New 0803 Hebrew Old 0424 Hebrew 0892 OCRA 0893 OCR B 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril Old 0423 Greek Old 875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Kata 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0905 Turk Old 0256 Intern 1 0924 Euro Lat 9 1140 Euro Eng 1141 Euro Aust 1142 Euro Dan 1148 Euro Finn 1144 Euro Ital 1145 Euro Span 1146 Euro UK 1147 Euro Fren 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice Secondary Sets English US English UK Austrian German German Alt Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish Norweg Danish Alt Finnish Swedish Finnish Alt French International Italian Japanese Eng Japanese Katak Portuguese Portug Alt Spanish Spanish Alt Spanish Speak Swiss Fren Ger Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Turkish Old Latin 2 ROECE Yugoslavian Notes Factory Default Although t
118. Explanation Solution H00 PCI SLOT No The controller board is Call your authorized service not communicating representative with a PCI card This could indicate a bad PCI card poor connection or problem in the PCI bus H01 PCI J24 No The controller boardis Call your authorized service not communicating representative with the PCI card in PCI slot J24 or J25 This could indicate a bad PCI card poor connection or problem in the PCI bus H02 PCI J25 No The controller boardis Call your authorized service not communicating representative with the PCI card in PCI slot J24 or J25 This could indicate a bad PCI card poor connection or problem in the PCI bus Half Speed Mode Yes The printhead or power 1 Allow printer to continue supply is approaching printing Full speed will a hot state Half Speed resume automatically Mode helps the cooling when a lower printhead or process and should power supply temperature permit completion of is achieved print jobs 2 Letthe printer cool down Full speed will be restored Half Speed Mode helps a prevent a PRINT when printing is resumed HEAD HOT or PWR 3 Lower Print Intensity and SUPPLY HOT fault Print Speed to reduce which will stop the frequency of Half Speed printer Mode HEAD POWER FAIL Yes No Printhead lost power Replace the printhead 2 Power off the printer for 15 seconds then power back on again If the problem persists contact your authorized customer
119. FF disabled STATISTICS_REPORT ON OFF Enables disables reporting of RFID statistics to the host The default is OFF disabled STATISTICS_CLEAR Clears the RFID statistics Start of job marker Results in a start of job message sent back to host through the PPM port when a job starts printing End of job marker Results in a end of job message sent back to host through the PPM port when the job finishes printing H Customer Support Printronix Customer Support Center IMPORTANT Please have the following information available prior to calling the Printronix Customer Support Center e Model number e Serial number located on the back of the printer e Installed options i e interface and host type if applicable to the problem e Configuration printout See Printing A Configuration on page 81 e Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer e Description of the problem be specific Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem faxing or emailing of these samples may be required Americas 714 368 2686 Europe Middle East and Africa 31 246489 311 Asia Pacific 65 6548 4114 China 86 800 999 6836 http www printronix com support aspx Printronix Supplies Department Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies Americas 800 733 1900 Europe Middle East and Africa 33 1 46 25 19 07 Asia Pacific 65 65
120. Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention If a fault is not correctable by the operator the fault message is followed by an asterisk This usually indicates that an authorized service representative is needed You should try two steps to clear the fault before calling your authorized service representative 1 Set the printer power switch to O off wait 15 seconds then turn the printer on again Run your print job again If the message does not appear it was a false indication and no further attention is required 2 Ifthe message reappears press the PAUSE key If the message goes away it was a false indication and no further attention is required If the message reappears call your authorized service representative Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting Displayed Message Can User Explanation Solution Correct 06 HOST REQUEST Yes Status message inCT Not a printer problem emulation the host computer or printer controller requires attention 08 HOLD PRINT Yes Status message inCT Press PAUSE to put the printer TIMEOUT emulation the printer online was Offline more than 10 minutes and the Intervention Required parameter is set to Send to Host 15 COMM CHECK Yes No Communication Check 1 Check your network for a message that proper operation AES mihe eT th 2 Tryadifferent cable from a SNU AUSM eae known good device line is not active on a twinax interface 3 Ifthe problem pers
121. I Jabcde fghi j0123456789 Courier Bold O1a4 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghij0123456789 Sonoran Serif 1137 ABCDEFGH IJabcdefghij01 23456789 Sonoran Serif 1137 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0 123456789 Sonoran Serif 1137 fretted AR ani ee 887 Sonoran Serif Bold 114b ABCDEFGH I Jabedefghij012345678 Sonoran Serif Bold 114b ABCDEFGHI abedef ghij0 123456789 Sonoran Serif Bold 114b ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij 0123456789 Sonoran Serif Italic 11b7 10 ABCDEFGH I Jabcdefghij0 23456789 39 Resident Bitmap Fonts Typographic 2 Scalable Fonts PS Proportionally Spaced i SC Scalable NOTE The Scalable fonts are currently rendered at 12 points They are scalable to any integer point size Figure 4 IPDS Fonts 3816 Emulation Sample Printout 163 Chapter 3 _TN3270 SETUP TN3270 SETUP 164 3270 SETUP from page 87 Primary Translation Active Char Secondary Sets Early Print Alt Sets Tbl Set Cmpl Set 80 9F See page 165 Secondary Set See page 165 Disable Printable Primary Set Enable Control Code Intervention CR At NL At Position Last Null Req MPP 1 MPP 1 Aft FF Char FF Suppression Send To Host On On Off On Off Do Not Send Off Off On Off On FF Validity Auto Skip At FF After Job CR EM
122. IL Yes No Engine control Power off the printer for 15 software failure seconds then power back on If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative ENTER to Stop Yes Normalmessage when Press the ENTER key to stop atest print pattern that printing the test pattern will run continuously has been enabled ERROR DC Yes No The printer cannot find Power off the printer for 15 PROGRAM the data controller seconds then power back on NOT VALID program or the If the problem persists contact validation checksum is_ your authorized customer corrupt service representative ERROR DRAM AT Yes No The printer found a Power off the printer for 15 ADDRESS defective memory seconds then power back on XXXXXXXX location If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative ERROR FLASH Yes No The printer Power off the printer for 15 DID NOT PROGRAM encountered an error seconds then power back on trying to program flash Reprogram the printer again memory If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative ERROR IPDS needs Yes The printer has Power off the printer and 300 DPI Head detected a 203 DPI replace the 203 DPI printhead printhead installed with with a 300 DPI printhead IPDS software downloaded IPDS software only supports the 300 DPI printhead ERROR NO DRAM Yes No The printer could not Contact your authorized DETECTED find any DRAM cust
123. IMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence OpenSSL The version of OpenSSL used in the SL T5R printer was prior to introduction of the Heartbleed vulnerability that occurred in December 2011 Therefore it is not affected WPA Supplicant License Copyright c 2003 2013 Jouni Malinen lt j w1 fi gt and contributors All Rights Reserved This program is licensed under the BSD license the one with advertisement clause removed Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the di
124. INTER CONTROL Max Cache Memory The Maximum Cache Memory option specifies the size of the memory block that can be allocated to the font cache The font cache stores bitmaps that are created on demand from the font outlines stored on the printer flash The cache allows the printer to print scalable fonts at optimum speed To calculate the memory requirement use this equation average average character character of characters horizontal vertical height width to be cached resolution x resolution x inches x inches x 8 The allowable range is 50 KBytes through 2000 KBytes in 50 KByte increments The factory default is 2000 KB Max Cached Char The Maximum Cached Characters option specifies the size of the largest character that can be stored in the font cache To calculate the memory requirement use this equation average horizontal resolution vertical resolution character height character width x x inches x inches For example with a print head that prints at 203 dpi you would use the following formula 203 X 203 X 1X 1 5 151 8 Therefore select a value that is equal to or greater than 5 151 The closest available value is 6 KBytes The allowable range is 1 KByte through 20 KBytes in 1 KByte increments The factory default is 01 KBytes NOTE For most applications the default settings for font memory are acceptable Therefore do not change the defaults unless your application requires an uncomm
125. Label Length Automatic and Gap Mark Sensor Gap Advanced Gap or Advanced Notch the printer will subtract the Gap Length value in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu from the Sensed Distance value obtained when the Auto or Manual Calibrate was performed Although the Use Label Length in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu keeps its value enable disable at all times it is ignored disabled when Set Label Length is set to Automatic Peel Present This feature allows you to select which part of a label gets presented to the peel bar The options include Next TOF factory default Media is moved to next TOF after image printing before presenting media to the peel off position This option is for standard labels where the gap mark length is less than the printhead to peel bar distance about 1 2 inch End Of Form Media is moved to the end of form after image printing before presenting media to the peel off position This option is for labels that have wide gaps that result in labels falling off the peel bar This setting works with non mark media where the end of form is not the same as the next TOF This setting is useful for die cut labels where the physical bottom of the label can be detected by the media sensor End Of Image Image prints and media moves to peel off position This option is for labels that have wide gap marks that result in labels falling off the peel bar This selection is intended for cases where presenting the
126. Latin 1 Hebrew MSDOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek Win CP 1255 MSDOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek Sakr CP714 Cyrillic 7 bit Slavic 1250 Greek 851 Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 IBM CP864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 IBM CP1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO Arabic Lam One CP 1048 Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO Arabic Lam Two Polish POL1 Win CP1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Turkish Sets UTF 8 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 Data Gen Turk ISO 8859 4 DEC Turkish IBM Turkish Siemens Turkish PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Epson Set OCR A OCR B Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish ASCII USA PST Turkish French UNIS 1 Turkish German Code Page 853 English INFO Turkish Danish Win CP 1254 Swedish Code Page 857 Italian Spanish Nae Multinational Code Page CP 858 IBM PC Danish II 850 EURO Latin Am II ASCII USA French Canadian EBCDIC Latin Am Notes Factory Default To access the desired basic character set use the and keys To select the set press the key After you have selected the basic set access the subset selection menu by pressing the 4 key Once in the subset menu access the desired subset by pressing the and keys and select it by pressing the key The Epson subset is accessed and selected in t
127. Length Var Form Adjust Var Form Type Optimized Ratio PI Slew Range CR Edit Skip Cmd Prefix Ignore Text Power on IGP PGL Ext Execute Copy Al 00 Spaces Select SO Char Ignore Mode Select Char Do FF at TOF IGP100 Compatbl Expanded Font Scalable Size Forms Handling PGL Normal UPC Descenders I 2 5 Selection C39 Compatbl User Def Ratio Lead PDF Dist Trunc Dyn Data Boundary Check Repeat Form Opt Preparser Port Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Appears only if Active IGP Emul is set to PGL in the Printer Control Menu 2 Appears only if the IPDS emulation is installed the correct security key is used and either the CTHI option is installed the NIC is enabled or the wireless NIC option is installed 3 Appears only if the TN5250 3270 option is installed and either the NIC is enabled or the wireless NIC option is installed 4 Appears only if the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu is selected 87 Chapter 3 VGL SETUP page 170 Select SFCC Power up X Power up F Power up PY LPI Btm Margin Ctl Text Length Autoeject Copy Count Host Form Length Slash 0 Repeat Form Ignore Dots Append Rotated Truncate Alpha True Vert 1 10 Absorb After PY UPC Descenders Select SO Char Rot Char Size Ignore Spaces Ignore Lxx Cmd Midline PY Width Limit Absorb After PN Expanded Font Auto FF at PN PDF
128. NING The cutter blades are sharp Keep your fingers away from the cutter blades 3 Place the cutter assembly in position 4 Install the two screws using the appropriate metric hex key 5 Place the cutter assembly into the up closed position NOTE The printer cannot detect the presence of the cutter unless the cutter is in the up closed position and the cutter top cover is installed when the printer is powered on 352 R re the Printer T ration Restore the Printer To Operation NOTE The printer cannot detect the presence of the cutter unless the cutter 0 NO OV A is in the up closed position and the cutter top cover is installed when the printer is powered on Set the printer power switch to ON Press to place the printer in Menu Mode Press the 4 and keys at the same time until ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED appears on the printer display Press until MEDIA CONTROL displays Press 4 until Media Handling displays Press or until the Cut option displays Press to select Cut An asterisk displays next to Cut Relock the key by pressing 4 and at the same time then press PAUSE to put the printer back online If the bar code validator is installed adjust the validator beam See the Online Data Validator User s Manual Make sure any media sticking out of the platen goes in the cutter entrance slot Test the printer cutting operation and print qual
129. NTER UNDER REMOTE CONTROL fault message 327 Printhead determining wear 295 pressure adjustment 52 pressure block adjustments 53 replacement 296 Printhead pressure adjustment 52 Printhead pressure block adjustments 53 Printhead cleaning 69 Printing a configuration 81 adjustments 52 specifications 333 test labels 291 PrintNet Enterprise Suite 12 Printronix media 345 Printronix Windows Driver 276 Printronix Windows Driver downloading software 273 Processing time improving 292 Prop Line Length option 213 Prop Spacing option 213 Protect Configs option 105 PSeries Dbl High option 213 Ptr Media Dist option 228 Ptr On Time option 227 PTX Setup Parse option 145 PTX Setup SFCC option 141 PTX_SETUP 279 PTX_SETUP commands 361 general 362 PTX_SETUP Commands overview 361 Pwr Save Control option 141 PWR SUPPLY HOT fault message 328 Pwr Up Action option 131 Q QUICK SETUP menu 95 submenus 96 R Rbn Takeup Full option 122 RBN TAKEUP FULL Remove Used Rbn fault message 328 Rev Status Port option 142 Real time clock 341 Received Data RD signal RS 232 serial interface 288 RS 422 serial interface 288 Remove Label fault message 328 Removing media from the rewinder 47 Removing the media guide 51 Renew Life SEC option 259 Renew Life Units option 259 Repeat Form Opt option 214 Repeat Form option 214 Report Status option C T Port 241 Report Status option Parallel Port 231 Report
130. OUT Load Paper fault message 325 Paper Out Sensor option 130 Paper Out Thresh option 130 PAPER OUT TIMEOUT fault message 326 Paper path installing 43 removing 51 Parallel interfaces Centronics 282 PARALLEL PORT menu 229 submenus 230 Parallel Port downloading software 267 PARITY ERROR fault message 326 Parity option 234 PDF Size Comp option 211 Peel Present option 123 Peel Off option 124 Peel Off media handling 28 PGL 151 PGL Normal option 211 PGL SETUP menu 168 Physical dimensions 339 PI Ignored option 230 PI Slew Range option 211 Pin assignments Centronics parallel interface 282 PJL Control option 145 Platen Label Wrap 306 Platen Roller cleaning 70 PLEASE WAIT fault message 326 PNE 12 PNE Port Number option 262 PNE Port option 262 PNE Port Timeout option 262 Poll Character option 238 Poll Response option 238 POOR SCANNING Check Head amp Heat fault message 326 POOR SCANNING Inspect head fault message 326 POR option 241 Port Type option C T Port 241 Port Type option Parallel Port 230 Port Type option Serial 234 Position Aft FF option 212 Positioning the media sensor 54 Power consumption 338 Power Mgmt option 254 Power on IGP PGL option 212 Power On Reset option 241 POWER SAVER MODE fault message 326 Power Saver Time option 141 Power source and grounding 338 Power switch 23 Powering on the printer 27 Power on 27 Power up F option 212 Powe
131. Off Connect the ethernet cable to the printer interface Set the printer power switch to On Wait until you see ONLINE on the LCD before doing the next step This can take about a minute to appear depending on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer Using Windows Explorer create a directory named download at the root level of your C hard drive C download Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer s CD drive Open the readme txt file on the CD There are two emulation sets with corresponding part number files from which to choose CT IPDS PGL VGL ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL TN PGL VGL ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL Both emulation sets include the LP emulation They are offered in two file formats exe and prg Use exe files to download through the NIC Identify which emulation set you want to download into the printer and note the filename that corresponds to that emulation The filename is a six digit number plus exe For example 123456 exe This is the file you will download into the printer Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 6 Start a command prompt session The Start Menu icon is usually labeled Ms Dos Prompt or Command Prompt At the command prompt type c lt Enter gt cd download lt Enter gt Enter the following command filename exe n xxx xxx xxx xxx lt Enter gt where filename exe is the file name y
132. PI 72 to 400 DPI Disable Forward Slant Enable 0 to 369 characters Backward Slant Is Right Top Bottom Print Char Define CR ___ Margin Margin Margin Set Code 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces CR CR 0 to 369 characters 0 to 451 linespaces 0 to 451 linespaces CR CR LF 1 This menu is available only when you enable Admin User under PRINTER CONTROL 2 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 3 The presence of this menu depends on the LP Emulation selection under PRINTER CONTROL EPSON FX 24 or 36 lines 0 to 144 lines SETUP from page 180 _ Auto LF Define LF Printer Select 20 CPI Bold Alt Char Code Condensed Set Enable LF LF Disable Enable Disable Control Code Disable LF CR LF Enable Disable Enable Printable _ Test Host Reset Cmd Form Form Position Command CFG Ld Length Length Bottom of Line Enable Disable 4 or 6 inches 101 6 or 152 4 mm Top of Line Ignore All Power up config 00 0 to 24 0 inches 00 0 to 609 6 mm Ignore CPI Current config Ignore LPI Factory config Form Form Form Form Length Width Width Width 4 04 1 06 6 or 08 5 inches 104 1 168 0 or 215 9 mm 41 66 or 85 characters 0 to 272 characters 00 0 13 6 inches Notes Factory Default
133. PRINTER YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT 391 Appendix J Warranty Information Warranty Information 392 PRINTER WARRANTY Printronix warrants to the purchaser that under normal use and service this printer excluding the thermal printhead purchased hereunder shall be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of shipment from Printronix In the United States and Canada this period provides for onsite support service in the first 90 days of ownership with return to factory service provided from the 91st day of ownership until the end of one year costs of shipping to be borne by the purchaser Consumable items such as media and ribbons are not covered under this warranty This warranty does not cover equipment or parts that have been misused altered or used for purposes other than those for which they were manufactured This warranty also does not cover loss shipping damage damage resulting from accident or damages resulting from unauthorized service THERMAL PRINTHEAD Printronix warrants the printhead for a period of one hundred eighty 180 days or 1 000 000 linear inches for direct thermal use or 2 000 000 linear inches for thermal transfer use whichever comes first The warranty does not cover printheads that have been misused damaged due to improper cleaning or damaged due to use of improper ribbons or media SUPPLIES For the neare
134. PRINTRONIX Administrator s Manual fii ianen sany Ezo TOR 085 fu Hitin Mri a H Aon SL TSR Energy Saver RFID Smart Label and Thermal Printers Printronix makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Printronix shall not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any damages whether direct indirect incidental or consequential in connection with the furnishing distribution performance or use of this material The information in this manual is subject to change without notice This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright No part of this document may be reproduced copied translated or incorporated in any other material in any form or by any means whether manual graphic electronic mechanical or otherwise without the prior written consent of Printronix COPYRIGHT 2005 2013 PRINTRONIX INC All rights reserved Trademark Acknowledgements Printronix IGP Auto Label Mapping LinePrinter Plus PGL and PrintNet are registered trademarks of Printronix Inc SL T5R and Thermaline are trademarks of Printronix Inc HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Code V is a trademark of QMS Inc QMS is a registered trademark of Quality Micro Systems Inc IBM is registered trademark of I
135. Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin DATA LINE 1 2 ACKNOWLEDGE 10 CHASSIS GROUND 17 Return 20 Return 28 DATA LINE 2 3 ONLINE 13 GROUND 30 Return 21 Return 28 DATA LINE 3 4 FAULT 32 Spares 14 Return 22 Return 29 DATA LINE 4 5 PAPER EMPTY 12 No Connection 34 35 Return 23 Return 28 36 DATA LINE 5 6 BUSY 11 5 Volts 18 Return 24 Return 29 DATA LINE 6 7 Return 25 DATA LINE 7 8 Return 26 DATA LINE 8 9 Return 27 DATA STROBE 1 Return 19 PAPER INSTRUCTION 15 Return 29 PRIME 31 Return 30 NOTE The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not exceed 15 feet 5 meters 282 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals Centronics Parallel Interface Signals Table 13 Centronix Parallel Interface Signals Signals Purpose Data Lines 1 through 8 Provide eight standard or inverted levels from the host that specify character data plot data or acontrol code Data Line 8 allows access to the extended ASCII character set You may enable or disable this line via the Data Bit 8 parameter on the Centronics Parallel submenu Data Strobe Carries a low true 100 ns minimum pulse from the host that clocks data into the printer Acknowledge A low true pulse from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data transfer Online A high true level from the printer to indicate t
136. Pivoting Deck CAUTION Oils from your hands can damage the light brown area heating elements of the printhead Do not touch the light brown area when you handle the printhead assembly 4 Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise The pivoting deck will swing upward exposing the bottom of the printhead assembly 296 Pivoting Deck Lower Tab 2 Printhead Assembly 183421a Printhead Cover Release Tab CAUTION Replacing the Printhead Printhead Retainer Clip 2 Pull Tab Printhead Controller Cable Assembly Upper Media Sensor Cable Assembly Release Tab Power Supply Cable Assembly Figure 8 Replacing the Printhead Assembly To prevent electrostatic damage to electronic components ground yourself by touching an unpainted part of the printer frame before handling and installing the printhead 5 Touch an unpainted part of the printer frame before touching the printhead 6 Behind the pivoting deck gently pull the lower tabs of the retainer clips upward to release the printhead assembly You only need to pull the tabs a small amount to release the printhead assembly Hold the printhead assembly by the printhead cover as it is released Push the release tab down on the power supply cable assembly and remove the cable from the printhead assembly 9 Use the pull tab to remove the printhead controller cable assembly from the printhead assembly 2
137. Print Mode submenu is located in the QUICK SETUP menu See Main Menu on page 84 for details 15 Verify the printhead pressure is properly set See Printhead Pressure Adjustment on page 52 16 Verify the pressure blocks are properly positioned See Printhead Pressure Block Adjustments on page 53 17 Verify the Gap Mark Sensor selection matches the type of media installed See Sensing Different Media Types on page 59 Loading Roll Media For direct thermal operation no ribbon required e If you have not run an Auto Calibrate do so now See Running Auto Calibrate on page 60 e If you have already run an Auto Calibrate complete the following steps a Close the media cover b Press the FEED key once to verify that the media advances c Press the PAUSE key to place the printer online For thermal transfer operation which uses a ribbon Complete the ribbon loading procedure see Loading Ribbon on page 40 35 Chapter 2 _Loading Media and Ribbon Loading Fanfold Media Media Cover Fanfold Tension Arm Fanfold Media aT Media Pivoting Hanger Deck Guide Media Hanger Bottom Panel Opening Deck Lock Lever 1 Open the media cover 2 Slide the media hanger guide outward to the end of the media hanger and rotate it upward to a horizontal position to remove any roll media 3 Place the fanfold media either behind or beneath the printer depending on t
138. Prints a table of the coax interface s current character set This operation is valid only when the coax interface is selected Translation Tbl SPC Twinax Prints a table of the twinax interface s current character set This operation is valid only when the twinax interface is selected 220 Emulation Submenus Translation Tbl TN5250 Twinax Prints a table of the twinax interface s current character set This operation is valid only when the twinax interface is the current interface True Vert 1 10 e Disable factory default When disabled and in High Resolution a vertical line s length in one inch and 1 10 inch increments is interpreted as 70 72 inch and 7 72 inch respectively e Enable When enabled a vertical line s length is interpreted exactly which is 72 72 inch in one inch increments Trunc Dyn Data This submenu allows the user to truncate the dynamic data up to the maximum data length specified in Create Mode e Disable factory default If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length an error will report e Enable If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length the data truncates Truncate Alpha e Enable factory default Prevents the printing of Error 48 Element Off Page Error if alphanumeric data including spaces extends beyond the right side of the form e Disable Twinax Type This parameter defines the printer emulation as follows e IPDS 256 Bytes factory default e IP
139. RAMS Submenus Kerberos Enable e Disable factory default Disables Kerberos authentication in the wireless network interface e Enable Enables Kerberos authentication in the wireless network interface Kerb Pwd 01 15 First 15 characters of the Kerberos password maximum number of characters is 40 Chapter 3 258 KERBEROS PARAMS Kerb Pwd 16 30 Characters 31 to 40 of the Kerberos password maximum number of characters is 40 Kerb Pwd 31 40 Characters 31 to 40 of the Kerberos password maximum number of characters is 40 Reset Kerb Pwd Resets Kerberos password to an empty string KDC Port Number KDC Key Distribution Center port number is the 2 byte UDP TCP port used for Kerberos Communication The range is 0 65535 and the factory default is 88 Clock Skew Units The options are Seconds and Minutes and the factory default is Seconds Clock Skew SEC Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in seconds SEC or minutes MIN as specified by the Clock Skew Units that Kerberos authentication will tolerate before assuming that a Kerberos message is invalid e Seconds The range is 60 900 and the default is 300 e Minutes The range is 1 15 and the default is 5 NOTE Whatever submenu is selected in Clock Skew Units will display on the Clock Skew SEC menu For example if you select Minutes the Clock Skew SEC menu name will change to Clock Skew MIN Tckt Life U
140. Right to Left Host Override Format Max Print Control Width Disable Disable 13 2 inches Enable Enable Printer Width 5 This menu appears only if you select the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu 156 Twinax Setup Primary Sets and Secondary Sets TWINAX SETUP from page 156 Primary Sets 0037 English US 0037 Eng Nether 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg New 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK 0892 OCRA 0893 OCR B 0424 Hebrew 0803 Hebrew Old 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril Old 0423 Greek Old 875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Kata 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0256 Intern 1 1112 Balt Mult 0924 Euro Lat 9 1122 Estonian 1140 Euro Eng 1141 Euro Aust 1142 Euro Dan 1148 Euro Finn 1144 Euro Ital 1145 Euro Span 1146 Euro UK 1147 Euro Fren 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice 0500 Internat 5 Secondary Sets English US Austrian German Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish Norweg Finnish Swedish French Italian Japanese Eng Japanese Katak Portuguese Spanish Spanish Speak English UK Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Latin 2 ROECE Yugoslavian Multinational Notes Factory Default Although these options are listed
141. S 314 E03C DSI BAT PL 314 E03C DSI BAT PS 314 EO3E DSI CXIWX 314 E03F DSI CXOWX 314 E03G DSI ECXIWX 314 E03H DSI ECXOWX 314 E04A ISI NO TRA 314 E04B ISI DIRECT 314 E04C ISI PROTEC 314 E06 NOT ALIGNED 314 E07 ILLEGAL INS 314 E08 FLOATINGPNT 314 Fault message 06 HOST REQUEST 309 08 HOLD PRINT TIMEOUT 309 15 COMM CHECK 309 203 DPI 310 22 INVALID ADDR 309 27 CU TIMED OUT 310 28 CU NOT ENAB 310 300 DPI 310 33 HEAD OPEN Timeout 310 399 40V POWER FAIL 310 Ambient light Validator failure 311 BAD VFU CHANNEL 311 BAR CODE IMPROPER Data Format 311 BAR CODE QUIET Zone too small 311 BUFFER OVERFLOW 311 BUFFER OVERRUN 312 CALIBRATION Warning 312 Calibration warning 312 CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel Off 312 Checksum Failure 312 CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH 313 CONTRAST TOO LOW Check media 313 CUTTER FAULT Check Cutter 313 DIAGNOSTICS PASSED 313 DIRECT THERMAL Remove Ribbon 313 DO NOT POWER OFF 313 DOWNLOADING TO VALIDATOR 314 EC SOFTWARE FAIL 315 E NET INIT 314 E NET READY 314 E NET RESET 315 ENTER to Stop 315 ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID 315 ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX 315 ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM 315 ERROR IPDS needs 300 DPI Head 315 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED 315 ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING QUEUES 317 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM 315 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH 316 ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE 316 ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID 316 ERROR SECURI
142. TY KEY NOT DETECTED 316 ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXxX 316 ERROR WRITING TO FLASH 316 ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM 316 FAN FAULT 317 FILE EXISTS Enable Overwrite 317 FILE SYS INVALID Optimize amp Reboot 317 FILE SYS WRITE Check Flash 317 FILE SYSTEM FULL Add Flash 317 FILE SYSTEM FULL Delete Files 317 FILE SYSTEM FULL Optimize amp Reboot 317 FILE UPLOADING 317 FPGA FILE NOT FOUND 318 FRAMING ERROR 318 GAP NOT DETECTED See Manual 318 GRF CHK ERROR PRESS PAUSE 318 Half Speed Mode 319 HEAD POWER FAIL 319 IGP PGL ERROR 320 INCOMPATIBLE WITH CUTTER 320 INSUFFICIENT RAM Reboot Add RAM 320 LABEL MISSING Check Paper Path 321 LABEL WRAP Open Head To Clear 322 LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX 323 LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH 323 MENU MODE QUICK SETUP 323 NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED 323 OPTION NOT INSTALLED 324 OVERALL GRADE FAIL 324 P S MISMATCH 327 PAPER OUT Load Paper 325 PAPER OUT TIMEOUT 326 PARITY ERROR 326 PLEASE WAIT 326 POOR SCANNING Check Head amp Heat 326 POOR SCANNING Check media 326 POOR SCANNING Inspect head 326 POWER SAVER MODE 326 PRINT HEAD COLD See Manual 327 PRINT HEAD HOT 327 PRINT HEAD UP Close Print Head 327 PRINTER HOT 327 PRINTER UNDER REMOTE CONTROL 327 PWR SUPPLY HOT 328 RBN TAKEUP FULL Remove Used Rbn 328 Remove Label 328 RESETTING PLEASE WAIT 328 RESTORING BOOT CODE 328 RIBBON BROKEN Reload Ribbon 329 RIBBON FAULT Timeout 329 RIBBON LOAD BAD R
143. This option interprets the ESC d command as even dot plot e Double high This option interprets the ESC d command as double high Select this option for backward compatibility EVFU Select Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting e Enable factory default Selects P Series compatible Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU e Disable Disables all EVFU processing Expanded Font PGL Expanded font allows you to print characters in different sizes with specified parameters and to select which font face to use e Scalable factory default Uses scalable fonts e Block Uses block fonts Alt Block 1 Uses alternative block fonts with a different character set Expanded Font VGL Expanded font allows you to print characters in different sizes with specified parameters and allows you to select block or non block font face e Scalable factory default Uses Gothic font as default Other font faces can be selected by using the IFONT command e Block Uses Block font Emulation Submenus Expanded Fonts IPDS This option specifies which algorithm is used for expanding a character string in Write Graphics Compatible A resizing and smoothing algorithm will be performed on the bitmapped font Scalable factory default A substitution will be done to a scalable outline font Using Scalable will increase performance and quality however the substitution will only be done for Latin 1 characters of resident
144. UPC EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if there is no human readable data Upr Case Select Controls how the printer handles lowercase characters it receives from the host computer When enabled all characters are printed in uppercase Disable factory default Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as lowercase prints uppercase characters received from the computer as uppercase Enable Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as their corresponding uppercase equivalents prints uppercase characters received from the computer as uppercase User Def Ratio This option allows you to ignore the user defined barcode ratio and replace it with the default ratio X1 Enable factory default Allows the user defined barcode ratio Disable The user defined barcode ratio will be replaced with the default ratio X1 Emulation Submenus User Defined St1 Start Code 1 This option allows you to define your own value in ASCII characters for the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu St1 specifies Start Code 1 See Lead in Chars on page 208 for additional information The range is 40 FF and the factory default is 5F User Defined St2 Start Code 2 This option allows you to define your own value in ASCII characters for the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu St2 specifies Start Code 2 See Lead in Chars on page 208 for additional inf
145. UTF 8 Hebrew Old Data Gen Turk Hebrew New DEC Turkish Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish Latin 1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish Win CP 1255 PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish Notes Factory Default To access the desired basic character set use the and keys To select the set press the J key After you have selected the basic set access the subset selection menu by pressing the 4 key Once in the subset menu access the desired subset by pressing the and keys and select it by pressing the key 189 Chapter 3 Character Group EPSON FX SETUP Character Group and Character Sets VGL From page 171 This menu item selects the character set used by the printer The available character sets are shown below 190 Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 Azeri Factory Default Standard Arabic Sets Cyrillic Sets European Greek Sets Sets Sets 0 ASCII ASMO 449 Code Page 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek 1 German ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Code Page 852 ELOT 928 Greek 2 Swedish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 3 Danish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek 4 Norwegian MSDOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek 5 Finnish MSDOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek 6 English Sakr CP714 Cyrillic 7 bit Slavic 1250 Greek 851 7 Dutch Aptec CP715 Ukrai
146. WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED 387 Appendix J Software License Agreement OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package
147. WPA passphrase Reset WPA P Phs Allows you to reset all 32 bytes of the WPA passphrase at once KERBEROS PARAMS KERBEROS PARAMS Submenus Factory Default 1 This menu displays only if a Symbol LA4121 RF card is installed KERBEROS PARAMS from page 94 Kerberos Kerb Pwd Kerb Pwd Kerb Pwd Reset Kerb KDC Port Enable 01 15 16 30 31 40 Pwd Number Disable 88 Enable 0 65535 Clock Skew Clock Skew Tckt Life Tckt Life Renew Life Renew Life Units SEC Units SEC Units SEC Seconds 300 Seconds 43200 Seconds o Minutes 60 900 Minutes 300 259200 Minutes 0 604800 Hours Hours Days Days Notes 2 3 These two menus work in conjunction Whatever submenu name is selected in the first menu will display on the second menu For example if you select Minutes MIN will display in the name of the second menu 4 The factory default and values depend on the unit selected in the Clock Skew Units menu See Clock Skew SEC on page 258 for more information 5 The factory default and values depend on the unit selected in the Tckt Life Units menu See Tckt Life SEC on page 259 for more information 6 The factory default and values depend on the unit selected in the Renew Life Units menu See Renew Life SEC on page 259 for more information KERBEROS PA
148. Wide Spectrum combination Inventory tracking Wax Most commonly used Product labeling Low environmental durability Compliance labeling Low abrasion resistance Longer life than direct thermal Thermal Transfer Paper Label Printronix Wax Mid range wax resin Same as economy Tag Resin Blend performance and applications with Synthetic Label characteristics at economy advantage of Tyvek and wax prices supporting Valeron Darker razor sharp smudge Polypropylene proof images Polyethylene Polyolefin and Valeron media Thermal Transfer Paper Label Printronix Better environmental Retail applications Tag Specialty Resin durability where labels are Synthetic Label Better abrasion resistance handled than wax Excellent for most More expensive than wax applications Good aesthetic appearance Compliance labeling Thermal Transfer Synthetic Label Printronix Harsh High environmental durability High temperature Environment Resin High physical durability Excellent aesthetic appearance Most expensive label tag combination environments Medical applications Outdoor environments Environments with chemicals Compliance labeling 346 Accessories Field installable accessories available for your thermal printer are listed below Contact your authorized supplier for more details Coax Twinax Host Interface GPIO Internal Rewind Kit Media Cutter 4 6 and 8 inch Media Cutter Tray used with a Media Cutter opti
149. _SETUP commands will be processed by the base emulation The CTHI emulation will not process PTX_SETUP commands Since there is no disk on a flash based printer DISK_IO commands are now called FILE_IO However for backwards compatibility DISK_IO and FILE_IO are synonymous The PTX_SETUP command set is case sensitive all PTX_SETUP commands are in upper case characters only The white space separating commands may be any number of spaces and tabs This allows a PTX_SETUP file to be formatted for easier readability The PTX_SETUP and PTX_END command should be followed by a new line character Any unknown command will terminate the PTX_SETUP processing The offending command will be the first line of printed text Although the original implementation of PTX_SETUP allowed for only a single parameter separated from the sub command by a single semicolon character the new PTX_SETUP command set allows for multiple parameters separated by commas semicolons spaces or tabs 361 Appendix G The PTX_SETUP Commands 362 General Commands The original PTX_SETUP commands were implemented on the disk based legacy laser printers however many commands are also supported for thermal printers This section describes the existing commands which work across all platforms and provides a general description of how commands are formed Each emulation has modes in which the PTX_SETUP commands could get missed For this reason it is high
150. a is received or when the printer is put offline 1 If the emulation and SFCC are correct additional diagnostic information can be obtained by selecting the desired option under the xxx Diagnostics menu found under the Emulations menu Afer selecting the desired option rerun the job to obtain the additional diagnostic information ONLINE status indicator is flashing Check the LCD for a specific fault message Press the PAUSE key and if a fault message displays refer to the LCD Message Troubleshooting table on page 309 Check for an Out of Media condition or missing labels in the middle of a roll Load the correct media Check that the ribbon and label stock are correctly routed Load ribbon and label stock correctly POWER FAILURES Printer fails to turn on the display is not backlit and the fan is not running Check that the printer AC power cord is correctly attached to the printer and to the AC power outlet Have a qualified electrician test the AC wall outlet for the correct power range Locate the printer in an area that has the correct power range Check the AC power cord Replace a damaged AC power cord or one that you suspect may be bad Call your authorized service representative 301 Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors Table 17 Printer Problems and Solutions continued Symptom Solution Explanation PRINT QUALITY e Label s
151. abel Width Ver Image Shift Hor Image Shift Orientation Gap Mark Sensor Auto Calibrate Validator Funct 3 Active IGP Emul xxx Diagnostics Save Config Power Up Config SMT Status PAA Select Tool 84 RFID VALIDATOR 2 CONFIG CONTROL 2 CONTROL page 104 Refer to the RFID Refer to the Online Save Config Labeling Reference Data Validator Load Config Manual User s Manual Print Config Delete Config Power Up Config Protect Configs Name Config 1 Name Config 2 Name Config 3 Name Config 4 Name Config 5 Name Config 6 Name Config 7 Name Config 8 Reset Cfg Names Auto Save Press to select the next main menu Press 4 or T to move within each main menu Press or to cycle through each possible option or value NOTES Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User under PRINTER CONTROL 1 Gap Mark Sensor and Paper Out Sensor work in conjunction as shown in Table 6 on page 127 If you change the Gap Mark Sensor or Paper Out Sensor you must recalibrate the media 2 This menu appears only if an RFID encoder is installed 3 This menu appears only if a Validator is installed 4 This menu will not appear on Direct Thermal only printers 5 This menu appears only if RFID is installed and there is no CST bundle in the Flash File System This menu appears only if RFID is not installed and there is a CST bundle in the Flash File System xxx represents the emulation name selected
152. abled Default Code Pag This item allows you to select the desired default codepage to be used when IPDS is not activating a Code Page ID Refer to the IPDS Programmer s Reference Manual for a list of the code pages The factory default is English USA Can Default Font This item allows you to select the desired default resident font to be used when IPDS is not activating a Font Global ID Refer to the PDS Programmer s Reference Manual for a list of the fonts The factory default is Courier 10 195 Chapter 3 196 EPSON FX SETUP Define CR code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code 0D hex from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a carriage return it inserts an additional Line Feed code 0A hex into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer NOTE For this menu to take effect in PGL PGL Normal needs to be set to PGL Menu e CR CR factory default Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return e CR CR LF Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line Define LF code PGL Serial Matrix Proprinter XL Epson FX This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs This can be used in most installat
153. ace option 139 Host Override option 205 Host PI option 205 Hour option 263 l 2 5 Selection option 205 Idle Response option 238 IEEE 1284 interface 284 operating modes 284 Ignore Lxx Cmd option 206 Ignore Ch 1 option 206 Ignore Ch 2 option 206 Ignore Chars option 206 Ignore Dots option 206 Ignore Mode option 206 Ignore Spaces option 207 402 Ignore Text option 207 IGP PGL ERROR fault message 320 IGP100 Compatibl option 207 ILL NVM VALUE 5 320 ILL NVM VALUE 6 320 ILL NVM VALUE 7 320 Impact commands 369 Improving processing time 292 INCOMPATIBLE WITH CUTTER fault message 320 Indicators 23 Indicators and switches 336 Installing the paper path 43 Installing the printer 19 INSUFFICIENT RAM Reboot Add RAM fault message 320 Interface options 342 Interfaces 281 Centronics parallel 282 Dataproducts Long Lines 282 IEEE 1284 284 Interfacing 293 Internal rewinder 13 43 47 341 Internat Mode option 255 Intervention Req option 207 IP Address option 245 250 IPDS Data Port option 247 IPDS for use with ethernet and twinax host interface 342 IPDS SETUP menu 160 Italic Print option 207 J Job Control option 248 Job In Process indicator 23 K KDC Port Number option 258 Keep Alive Timer option 247 Kerb Pwd 01 15 option 257 Kerb Pwd 16 30 option 258 Kerb Pwd 31 40 option 258 Kerberos Enable option 257 KERBEROS PARAMS menu 257
154. ad The thermal printer operates differently from a line matrix or laser printer because the thermal printer uses a printhead with heating elements and special paper or ribbon The Printing Process The thermal printhead allows two modes of operation e Direct Thermal During direct thermal printing the thermal printhead selectively heats small rectangular thermal dots When these contact the coated thermal paper the dyes and developers in the coating react to the heat and develop an image This mode of printing is generally used for short term labeling applications Thermal Transfer During thermal transfer printing the heated thermal dots contact a thermal ribbon The heat reacts with the ribbon and bonds the image to the paper This method is used especially for abrasive long storage applications and for specialized applications such as in extreme environmental conditions or where tamper proofing is required NOTE Thermal transfer is not supported on 4 inch DT model printers Dynamic Print Control Dynamic Print Control Dynamic print control is a unique feature of your thermal printer that provides excellent print quality by preventing unevenness of print density Print quality largely depends on how the thermal paper or the thermal ribbon and thermal transfer paper responds to the heat of the thermal printhead During printing the thermal printhead must reach a set temperature in the shortest possible time Then i
155. ad Yes Normal power up No action required Installed message The printer is running its initialization routine and indicating DPI resolution of the installed printhead 300 DPI Head Yes Normal power up No action required Installed message The printer is running its initialization routine and indicating DPI resolution of the installed printhead 310 Fault Messages Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution Ambient light Yes Ambient light is 1 Minimize the ambient light Validator failure BAD NVM CALL 1 BAD NVM CALL 2 BAD NVM CALL 3 BAD NVM CALL 4 BAD NVM CALL A compromising proper scanning NOTE The Validator scanning laser cannot work properly in a room with excessive ambient light including direct sunlight Printer firmware code error around the validator This may require moving the printer to a darker area of the room 2 Press the PAUSE key to clear the fault message Cycle power If the problem persists follow the instructions for Diagnostics for EOxx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors on page 299 and contact your authorized customer service representative BAD VFU CHANNEL The user tried to use an undefined VFU channel Use defined channels BAR CODE IMPROPER Data Format BAR CODE QUIET Yes Zone too small Data validation error improper data format Data val
156. adhesive on the printhead Clean the printhead Verify that Print Mode in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu is set for Transfer and not Direct Thermal Printer cuts melts through the transfer ribbon Verify that Print Intensity is set to the proper level in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu Verify that Print Mode in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu is set for Transfer and not Direct Thermal Printing stops and the ONLINE status indicator flashes Check that the media sensor is clean and undamaged Check that the gap between the bottom of a label and the top of the next label is at least 0 100 inch Use only labels and tag stock approved for this printer Inspect for a jammed label Remove the jammed label Check that the transfer ribbon and label stock are routed correctly 307 Chapter Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors Table 17 Printer Problems and Solutions continued Symptom Solution Explanation Narrow width ribbon breaks The Ribbon Width value in the MEDIA CONTROL menu is set frequently too large which causes too great a ribbon take up and ribbon supply spindle torque Reduce the Ribbon Width value to decrease the torque on the ribbon spindles The Ribbon Width value should be very close to the Label Width value To reduce the torque further set Ribbon Length in the MEDIA CONTROL menu from Save As Paper to Set In Menu Then set a value les
157. aiaa Taaie aisa 347 C ASCII Control Codes oc cece cececceceececeeeeeeeeees 349 Table of Contents D Media Cutter Installation ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 351 Prepare the Printer ienesis iieii a vac Mena eeee cece ceueeds toeealeee 351 Installing the Cutter ceccceceseeesseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeseeneeesaees 352 Restore the Printer To Operation ccccseeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeees 353 Removing the Media Cutter 0 ccccecsceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeneaeeenaes 353 E Media Cutter Tray Installation 0 ceee 355 Assembling the Media Cutter Tray ccccccccseeeeeneeeeeeeseteeeeneeeeneees 355 Installing the Media Cutter Tray c ccccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeseaeeseneeenaees 356 F Selecting Supported RFID Tag Types 06 359 Read this First geroer urriena aiat A ADEA EAE RE EE 359 Selecting RFID Tag TyP S c cceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseaeeneeeeeneeess 359 G PTX_ SETUP Comman5s cccceeeeeeeeeee eee 361 QveNie W ai a e a a onl e aa aaa 361 The PTX_SETUP CommandS s ssssesestsrersesstntrtntttrtninnnnnntntne nenet na 361 General COMMANGG cccccceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeseneessaees 362 Thermal Commands cccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseneeeseaeeeseaeeneeeeees 369 H CUSIOMErSUDDOM eel eel 371 Printronix Customer Support Center ccccccceeseeceeeeeseteeeeeaeeseeeeeaees 371
158. ainless steel cutter guides Adhesive oil must be cleaned from the blade and guides with a dry cloth to prevent dust attraction Do not use isopropyl alcohol to clean the cutter blade it dissolves oils required for lubrication 7 Place the cutter in the up closed position 8 Install the cutter top cover and tighten the two captive thumbscrews 9 Properly route the media through the printer and cutter 10 Close the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise 11 Set the printer power switch to On 12 Test the printer cutting operation by pressing the TEST PRINT key and selecting one of the test patterns to print 3 Overview Configuring The Printer This chapter provides information about e Setting saving modifying and printing configurations e Configuration menus e Downloading emulation and operating system software Setting Printer Configuration Parameters Configuration parameters are set from the control panel or are retrieved from the printer s memory The parameters define how the printer will respond to command and interface signals from the host computer The configuration menu structure consists of main menus and the options applicable to each menu NOTE Some configurations refer to printer options that may not be present in your printer If you select an option or feature that is not present no action will be performed by the printer or an OPTION NOT INSTALLE
159. ameters are loaded when the reset command is executed e Power up config The power up configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed e Current config The currently selected configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed e Factory config The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed Resident Fonts This option selects either a bit mapped font Compatible or a scalable font Scalable as the default font e Compatible factory default Selects a bit mapped font as default e Scalable Selects a scalable font as default Ret Status Port This option selects the port for the Return Status Commands i e STATUS PGL and HS PPI ZGL to send the status data back to the Host The options are Serial factory default E NET Stat Port USB IEEE 1284 Disable and E NET Data Port Emulation Submenus Right Margin Set in characters Character zero is defined as the far right edge of the page and column numbering increments from right to left The range is 0 369 characters and the factory default is 0 characters Rot Char Size e Adjusted factory default Rotated clockwise counterclockwise expanded characters have a different size than an unrotated character with the same size parameters e Not Adjusted Rotated expanded characters will be the same size as unrotated characters with the same size parameters Scalable Size This option dete
160. amp NL Host Format End Override Control Off Off Off On Disable Disable On On On Off Enable Enable Lead in User User User Change Set Text Chars Defined Stl Defined St2 Defined Stp Case Orientn Set 1 lt gt 5F 5F 5B Dual Case Left to Right Set 2 40 to FF 40 to FF 40 to FF Mono Case Right to Left Set 3_ _ User Defined Max Print Width 13 2 inches Printer Width Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 This menu appears only if the TN5250 TN3270 option and the correct security key is installed TN3270 Setup Primary and Secondary Sets 3270 SETUP from page 164 Primary Sets 0037 English US 0037 Eng Nether 0285 English UK 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0287 Danish Alt 0278 Finnish 0288 Finn Alt 0297 French 0500 Internat 5 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0289 Span Alt 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg New 0803 Hebrew Old 0424 Hebrew 0892 OCRA 0893 OCR B 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril Old 0423 Greek Old 875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Kata 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0905 Turk Old 0256 Intern 1 0924 Euro Lat 9 1140 Euro Eng 1141 Euro Aust 1142 Euro Dan 1143 Euro Finn 1144 Euro Ital 1145 Euro Span 1146 Euro UK 1147
161. and VGL emulations This is regarded as Inverse Landscape using PPI ZGL q 4 inches gt FEED A pa OLE 6 inches ogos an E O O Sf E gt D Leto F amp a0 y Leading Edge Inv Portrait Inverse Portrait refers to vertical page orientation where the height of a page is greater than its width The top edge of the image is parallel to the trailing edge of the media The following illustration is an example with the operator viewing the front of the printer NOTE Inverse Portrait orientation applies to PGL and VGL emulations This is regarded as Portrait using PPI ZGL Trailing Edge 4 4inches p FEED The top edge of the image is parallel to the left edge of the 6 inches media Leading Edge 113 Chapter 3 114 MEDIA CONTROL Inv Landscape Inverse Landscape refers to horizontal orientation where the width of a page is greater than its height The top edge of the image is the right edge of the media the left edge of the image is the trailing edge of the media The following illustration is an example with the operator viewing the front of the printer NOTE Inverse Landscape orientation applies to PGL and VGL emulations This is regarded as Landscape using PPI ZGL lt a 4inches FEED A s ew y jo aBpe do su 6 inches eipaw y Jo aHpa 43 OY 0 ja ered Leading Edge Auto Map Select This opt
162. ange will not take effect until you run an Auto Calibrate again This will raise the Gap Mark threshold high enough so that the printer will not falsely use the antenna or noise as the gap top of form 65 Chapter 2 _ Printing Adjustments 66 Media Sensor Position 4m FEED 1023 0767 0511 Paper Out 301 JL 0255 Gap 160 17 H J A 0000 eQLvEsL Detected Amplitude Detected Amplitude Indicates Type of Gap Mark of the ans of the Gap Sensing Selected Running Manual Calibrate Manual Calibrate should be performed only when the values derived from Auto Calibrate fail to improve the media sensors ability to sense label length indicators on the installed media You must first enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu before accessing or initializing Manual Calibrate in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu NOTE Verify the Gap Mark Sensor option Gap Mark Advanced Gap Advanced Notch or Disable matches the installed media See Sensing Different Media Types on page 59 Ensure the media sensors are horizontally positioned to permit sensing of the label length indicators See Positioning the Media Sensors on page 54 Ensure the Print Mode option selected in the QUICK SETUP menu matches the media installed Select Direct for heat sensitive media no ribbon required or Transfer for thermal transfer media ribbon required If yo
163. aning The media damper and its media width guides see page 32 can accumulate parts of labels adhesive and paper dust residue that can prevent the proper guiding of labels e Cleaning Agent Use an isopropyl alcohol wipe or isopropyl alcohol on a clean cloth e Schedule Clean the media damper and its width guides each time you clean the printhead 6 Clean the media damper by rotating it counterclockwise and remove any label parts from its bottom surface Then use an isopropyl alcohol wipe or clean cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol to remove all remaining debris and adhesive from the damper and its inboard and outboard guides All adhesive must be completely removed to prevent future die cut labels from being accidently peeled away from their liner Cutter Option Cleaning The cutter requires only periodic cleaning Keep your fingers away from the cutter blades They are sharp Perform the following procedure whenever too much dust or debris is visible 1 Set the printer power switch to O Off Rotate the deck lock lever fully clockwise until the deck swings upward Remove the cutter top cover by loosening the two captive thumbscrews Place the cutter in the down open position a fF oO DN Use a vacuum or can of compressed air with a nozzle around the area of the cutter blade to remove any dust or debris 6 Use a cloth with a light amount of WD 40 oil to clean adhesive from the cutter blade and upper or lower st
164. ata input cable s to the printer 21 Set the printer power switch to On 22 Using the configuration printout s you made in step 1 on page 270 restore the printer configurations 271 Chapter 4 Downloading Software through the USB Port Downloading Software through the USB Port 272 Normally the host communicates with the printer s USB port with a Windows driver To download a file using the USB port it needs to be remapped To download software through the USB Port perform the following steps 1 10 11 Using Windows Explorer create a directory named download at the root level of your C hard drive C download Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer s CD drive Open the readme txt file on the CD There are two emulation sets with corresponding part number files from which to choose CT IPDS PGL VGL ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL TN PGL VGL ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL Both emulation sets include the LP emulation They are offered in two file formats exe and prg Use prg files to download through the USB Identify which emulation set you want to download into the printer and note the filename that corresponds to that emulation The filename is a six digit number plus prg For example 123456 prg This is the file you will download into the printer Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 1 Make the printer sharable on the host PC This is
165. ate complete the following steps a Close the media cover b Press the FEED key once to verify that the media advances c Press the PAUSE key to place the printer online For thermal transfer operation which uses a ribbon Complete the ribbon loading procedure see Loading Ribbon on page 40 39 Chapter 2 _Loading Media and Ribbon Loading Ribbon Skip this section for 4 inch DT models or when using direct thermal printing Ribbon Take Up Core wa Ribbon LAN Take up Spindle Pivoting Deck Ribbon Supply Spindle Ribbon Roll Deck Lock Lever 1 Install the ribbon take up core on the ribbon take up spindle NOTE The first ribbon take up core comes with the printer Thereafter use the core from the old used up ribbon 2 Slide the ribbon roll onto the ribbon supply spindle until it stops against the spindle flange 3 Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise until the deck swings upward 40 Ribbon Printhead Media Loading Ribbon ome D9 fl Rear Ribbon Guide Roller 4 Thread the end of the ribbon under the rear ribbon guide roller then between the platen and the printhead You can also refer to the arrows on the printer frame or to the upper right corner of the label inside the media cover for ribbon loading instructions 41 Chapter 2 IMPORTANT 42 Lo ading Me
166. ated on the control panel directly below the key Example Press the key for ENTER e Liquid Crystal Display LCD messages are printed in uppercase letters inside quotation marks Chapter 1 Thermal Consumables Example When OFFLINE appears on the LCD you may release the PAUSE key e LCD fault messages display the specific fault in uppercase letters on the top line A corrective action in upper and lowercase letters displays on the bottom line Example PAPER OUT Load Paper e Key combinations are indicated by the plus symbol Example Press 7 4 means Press the Up 7 key and the Down 4 key at the same time Thermal Consumables Media Selection Since there are two print modes of operation there are two kinds of thermal media e Direct thermal media e Thermal transfer media Direct thermal media is paper coated with special chemicals that act as an accelerator acceptor dye and binder During direct thermal mode the heat from the thermal printhead contacts the paper and causes a chemical reaction Thermal transfer media requires ribbon A wide range of Printronix thermal transfer media is available such as film or synthetic paper substitutes Most of these media options can be die cut for easy label applications The wide selection of media sizes and face stocks have been tested with Printronix ribbons for print quality and usage Consult your Genuine Printronix Supplies Catalog call th
167. ation number The footer will be the DOWNLOAD END command The operator should be aware that the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD commands use a secondary copy of the menu structure which does not affect the printer s active configuration This allows the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD commands to operate without affecting the printer s current configuration If the operator intends to use one of the DOWNLOADed configurations the operator should reboot the printer to ensure proper operation This can be accomplished by adding the RESET command as the last command in your 367 Appendix G The PTX_SETUP Commands 368 setup file This is necessary because the printer caches the active configuration Rebooting the printer ensures that the desired configuration is correctly read from FLASH NOTE While an upload or download is in progress the Front Panel will be unavailable The Configuration Save and Delete commands from the front panel can be blocked by using the Protect Configurations feature This is intended to prevent someone from inadvertently reconfiguring a printer The PTX_SETUP commands however will override the protect configurations feature All PTX_SETUP commands will be honored regardless of the value of the Protect Configurations feature Operation of the FILE_IO Command When a file is opened for writing with the FILE_IO CAPTURE filename command the system will allocate RAM for file control blocks and 1 Kbyte for data If the file already exists
168. ault 0 to 272 characters 1 All three Form Length submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically 2 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 3 The factory default value depends on the width of the printer model 4 All three Form Width submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically 179 Chapter 3 EPSON FX SETUP EPSON FX SETUP 180 Notes Factory Default EPSON FX SETUP 13 from page 91 Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Character Character Epson Group Set Set 10 0 CPI 6 0 LPI Letter Gothic Standard Sets Epson Set ASCII USA 12 0 CPI 8 0 LPI Courier Arabic Sets OCR A French 13 3 CPI 10 3 LPI OCR A Cyrillic Sets OCR B German 15 0 CPI OCR B European Sets Multinational English 17 1 CPI Greek Sets Code Page 850 Danish 20 0 CPI Hebrew Sets CP 858 EURO Swedish Turkish Sets IBM PC Italian UTF 8 Spanish Japanese See page 188 Norwegian Danish Il Latin Am II French Canadian Latin Am Horizontal Vertical Prop Italic Slashed Left E DPI DPI Spacing Print Zero Margin 120 DPI 72 DPI Enable Disable Disable 0 characters 60 to 400 D
169. bel and the transitions detected without error between a label and its label length indicators 10 Press the PAUSE key until OFFLINE displays 11 Press the FEED key several times Each time you press FEED the media advances one label length and stops NOTE After a form feed the position of the leading edge of the next label depends on the type of Media Handling mode selected under the QUICK SETUP menu Tear Off and Tear Off Strip Media Handling positions the label edge at the tear bar while Continuous positions the label edge under the printhead 12 Once the correct values are confirmed save them to the desired configuration menu before powering off the printer See Saving a Configuration on page 76 67 Chapter 2 Cleaning Cleaning Depending on the media used the printer may accumulate residues media dust adhesives etc as a by product of normal printing To maintain top printing quality you should remove these residues by cleaning the printer periodically WARNING Set the printer power switch to O Off prior to performing any cleaning tasks Leave the power cord connected to keep the printer grounded and to reduce the risk of electrostatic damage IMPORTANT When the printer is powered Off menu settings that were changed and 68 CAUTION not saved an any print data remaining in the print buffer will be lost To prevent the loss of recent menu changes see Saving a Configuration on
170. bel is complete it will print the second 4 width label Finally once both of those labels have been printed the printer will print a blank 4 label File Contents Print Output Label 1 Label 1 Label 2 ane Label 2 Blank Label Auto Label Width The width of a single label to be printed or the maximum width of the media that will be used for the print file The value is selectable from 00 1 inch through the maximum print width of the printer NOTE The maximum Auto Label Width value will be limited to the current MEDIA CONTROL Label Width value selected in the configuration menu The default value depends on model width and size of DRAM installed 117 Chapter 3 118 MEDIA CONTROL Num Auto Labels The desired number of labels to be printed vertically adjacent on the form The value is selectable with a range of 2 through 40 T5X04 2 through 21 T5X06 and 2 through 17 T5X08 The factory default is 2 Slew Speed The speed at which the printer moves media without actually printing on it e Automatic factory default Always the same as the print speed see Print Speed on page 96 e Manual Allows you to set the slew speed The maximum speed depends on your printer model see Table 19 on page 333 The slew speed can be set to Automatic Manual 6 ips or 1 to 10 ips Print Direction This option determines the basic print image orie
171. bitmapped fonts and the type is limited to Courier and Gothic A scalable font cannot be selected directly and an LF3 format cannot be downloaded Ext Execute Copy Disable factory default Dynamic data overlay data etc are not allowed if the optional Form Count parameter number of forms to print is specified as part of the Execute command This setting is IGP 100 compatible Enable Dynamic data overlay data etc are allowed within a form where the Form Count parameter is specified in the Execute command In this case the same form is printed for whatever the Form Count is Incremental data is not incremented since the printing page is the same The overlay data is only printed with the first form and not on subsequent forms and each form is printed on a separate page Extended Subset This item allows selection of the desired extended character subset used by the printer The options are Code Page 437 factory default and Code Page 850 FF After Job Determines the print position after an operator initiated local copy print screen function Off factory default Performs an automatic new line command after completing a print buffer unless a new line form feed or carriage return command was the last one executed The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the next line On Performs an automatic form feed command unless a form feed was the last one executed The printer is set to print at print positio
172. ble Enable 6 to 10 VGL Text Length Text Length Autoeject Copy Count Host Form Slash 0 Repeat 4 Legnth Form 66 Disable 1 Enable Disable Disable 1 to 255 Enable 1 to 999 Disable Enable Enable Ignore Dots Append Truncate True Absorb UPC Rotated Alpha Vert 1 10 After PY Descenders Disable Disable Enable Disable Absorb Motion Enable Enable Enable Disable Enable Absorb All Disable Disable Select SO Rot Char Ignore Ignore Lxx Midline PY Width Char Size Spaces Cmd Limit 14 Adjusted Disable Disable Disable Disable 0 to 255 Not Adjusted Enable Enable Enable Enable Absorb After Expanded Auto FF PDF Size C128 Mode _ APN Font at PN Comp Comp Disable Scalable Disable Disable Disable Enable Block Enable Enable Enable Notes 170 Factory Default VGL SETUP from page 170 C39 Ignore Ignore Ch 1 Ignore Ch 2 Data Bit 8 Cmd Compatbl Chars Resolution Disable Disable 0 0 Enable Low Resolution Enable Char 1 0 to 255 0 to 255 Disable High Resolution Char 2 Char1 amp 2 Dnn Dot Barcode var Character Standard Uniform Prop Line Slew Group Sets Fonts Length Low Resolution Low Resolution Standard Sets 0 ASCII Disable Enable High Resolution High Resolution Arabic Sets 1 German Enable Disable Cyrillic Sets 2 Swedish European Sets 3 Danish Greek Sets 4 Norwegian Hebrew Se
173. borne particulate matter without compromising performance Optional Features Ask your authorized representative about the following enhancement options Coax Twinax Host Interface Provides connection to a host computer system using a coaxial or twinaxial interface Fonts A selection of purchasable fonts can be loaded from the host computer into printer memory GPIO General Purpose Input Output Enables a T5R printer to interface with an external device such as a label applicator system GPIO is available as a factory option or field installable kit that also includes a mating connector for field interface installation instructions and operation manual Internal Label Rewinder In label peel off mode peels off labels one ata time before printing the next label and rewinds the liner into a discardable roll In batch rewind mode rewinds printed labels into a removable roll IPDS Available for coax twinax a NIC or a combination of both The printer may be ordered with this option installed and the required hardware to support it or it can be field installed by an authorized service representative at a later date The printer must have a coax twinax interface or NIC and 300 dpi printhead installed to support this field installed option NOTE RFID is not supported in IPDS applications Media Cutter Automatically cuts printed media when the media exits the printer Available for 4 6 and 8 inch printers Media Cutter Tray
174. brate has failed or the Gap Mark Threshold or Paper Out Threshold values derived from Auto Calibrate do not improve the media sensors gap or mark sensing capability To initiate Manual Calibrate press J when Manual Calibrate displays under the CALIBRATE CTRL menu You will then be prompted for the remaining steps Example REMOVE RBN amp MEDIA Press Enter or LOAD RBN ONLY Press Enter etc During the last stage of Manual Calibrate the printer uses the statically derived values advances media stops at the Top of Form position and momentarily displays the Sensed Distance This process takes longer than Auto Calibrate and the end result is a change to the Gap Mark Threshold Paper Out Threshold and Sensed Distance values that the printer will use These value changes take effect immediately within the current configuration menu Manual Calibrate is completed successfully when the displayed Sensed Distance correctly matches that of the installed media When Gap is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing edge of one gap to the trailing edge of the next gap or one label one gap When Mark is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark Manual Calibrate supports label lengths up to 24 inches CALIBRATE CTRL Submenus Pwr Up Action Disable No movement at power up Auto Cal factory defaul
175. by this Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance by us under or related to this Agreement are limited to the remedies specified by this Agreement 5 California law governs this Agreement Termination of License Agreement This License shall continue until terminated This license may be terminated by agreement between you and Printronix Inc or by Printronix Inc If you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not corrected within thirty 30 days after notice When this License is terminated you shall return to the place you obtained them the printer and all copies of the Software and documentation U S Government Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 242 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 Acknowledgement of Terms and Conditions YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTAND IT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT OR REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT NO CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH PARTY BY USING THIS
176. can occur when serial interface settings of the printer do not match those of the host computer e Enable factory default If a framing error occurs a fault message will display on the control panel e Disable If a framing error occurs a fault message will not display on the control panel Offline Process e Disable default When set to disable the printer does not process serial data while offline e Enable When set to enable the printer continues to process but not print the current serial job while the printer is offline until the printer s buffer is full C T PORT Submenus C T PORT C T PORT from page 92 Port Type Twinax Coax Disable Device Timeout Report Status Address Address 1 10 sec Disable Address 0 6 5 60 sec Enable Notes Factory Default 1 This menu appears only if the CTHI option is installed C T PORT Submenus Port Type This item selects the desired active CTHI interface and appears only when the CTHI option is installed The factory default is Twinax Device Address Allows you to set the device address from 0 through 6 The host directs data and commands on the twinax line to a specific device based on its unique device address After the address has been changed a Power On Reset POR status is sent to the host The factory default is 1 Timeout This item allows you to set the time that the printer when it has not received data from its ho
177. ccess the desired subset by pressing the and keys and select it by pressing the key Character subsets are accessed and selected in the same manner Standard Arabic Sets Cyrillic Sets European Greek Sets Hebrew Sets Sets Sets ASMO 449 Cyrillic 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek Hebrew Old ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Code Page 852 ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 Hebrew DEC ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek Latin 1 Hebrew MSDOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek Win CP 1255 MSDOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek Sakr CP14 Cyrillic 7 bit Slavic 1250 Greek 851 Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 IBM CP 864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 IBM CP 1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO Arabic Lam One Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO Arabic Lam Two Polish POL1 Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 Toop pekia Cicer Prensas uee Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic2 Data Gen Turk CP 774 DEC Turkish CP 775 IBM Turkish ISO 8859 4 Siemens Turkish PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 Azeri Code Page Code Page OCR A OCR B Multinational CP 858 437 850 iii EURO ASCII USA EBCDIC Notes Emulation Submenus Character Set P
178. ch the length from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark Auto Calibrate supports label lengths up to 35 inches Media Profile This feature provides a graphical printout showing the relationship of the Paper Out Threshold and the Gap Mark Threshold The profile printout assists you in setting the thresholds for difficult media This includes pre printed labels and labels with poor gap media dynamic range When selected the printer will advance media and print the media profile along the length of each label The printer will continue to print the profile until you press The factory default is Print Profile Sensed Distance This value in inches represents the distance that was sensed between the TOF of one label to the TOF of the next label With gapped media installed the distance equals the physical label length plus one gap notch or hole trailing edge of one gap notch or hole to the trailing edge of the next gap notch or hole With black mark media installed the distance equals the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next This value is automatically determined only after successful completion of Auto or Manual Calibrate and cannot be changed manually The factory default is 0 00 inches Gap Mark Thresh This menu item sets a value that when exceeded by the output of the media sensor is recognized by the printer as a gap or black mark When Auto or
179. ching does not support simultaneous switching between coax and twinax interfaces However autoswitching supports all interfaces including coax or twinax Auto Switching is described on page 281 Coax Twinax and RS 422 Panel RS 422 Twinax Connection RA a SS 21 Chapter _ 1 _ Setting Up the Printer If your printer is equipped with the optional Wireless and Optional GPIO it will appear as illustrated below Wireless And GPIO Interface Panel Wireless eee Antenna Wireless ae Interface 0000 00000 HO Oo GPIO Connection 183385a c Coax Connection Attach a suitable coaxial cable from the computer to the coax connector located in the I O plate in the back of the printer d Twinax Connection Attach a suitable twinax cable from the computer to the twinax connector located in the I O plate in the back of the printer e NIC Connection Insert a suitable NIC cable from your hub or switch to the NIC connector located in the I O panel in the rear of your printer 22 2 Operation Controls and Indicators Power Switch The power switch is located on the bottom back panel of the printer To apply power place the switch in the ON position When you first power on the printer a series of initialization messages will appear on the Liquid Crystal Display LCD on the control panel To remove power place the power switc
180. ckground labels with gaps 57 Dark background media with notches or holes 58 Data Bit 8 option 195 230 Data Carrier Detect DCD signal RS 232 serial interface 288 Data exchange 292 Data lines 1 through 8 signal Centronics parallel interface 283 Data Polarity option 232 Data Protocol option 235 Data Set Ready DSR signal RS 232 serial interface 288 Data strobe signal Centronics parallel interface 283 Data Term Ready option 238 Date submenu 263 DATE menu 263 Day option 263 Default Code Pag option 195 Default Font option 195 Default WEP Key option 255 Define CR code option 196 Define LF code option PGL Serial Matrix Proprinter XL Epson FX 196 Define LF code option P Series P Series XQ 196 397 Del Char frm Fish option 142 Del Char frm RAM option 143 Del Set frm Fish option 143 Del Set from RAM option 143 Delete Config option 105 Delete Files option 144 Device Address option 241 DHCP option 245 250 Diagnostic tests 226 DIAGNOSTICS menu 225 submenus 226 Diagnostics 291 Bad NVM Error 299 EOxx Error 299 Diagnostics ILLNVM Error 299 DIAGNOSTICS PASSED fault message 313 Direct thermal printing 14 DIRECT THERMAL Remove Ribbon fault message 313 Display indicators 24 Display Language option 141 Display Ribbon option 122 Do FF at TOF option 197 DO NOT POWER OFF fault message 313 Download File Download Mode 277 Online PGL Only 276 Downloading Software Firmware Download U
181. ct Configs Enabled under CONFIG CONTROL the following error message displays CONFIG EXISTS Delete First If the above occurs see Modifying a Saved Configuration on page 79 step 4 5 Print your configuration and store it in a safe place for future reference Refer to Printing a Configuration on page 81 Auto Save Configuration If you make any changes to the current configuration menu items you will be prompted to save the changes to Config when you place the printer online equals the next available unassigned configuration number When prompted press one of the following keys e Enter Saves to Config 1 or the next available Config and becomes the Power Up config NOTE If all eight Configs are assigned you will be prompted to select which Config to overwrite e Pause Changes will be implemented but saved only temporarily until deliberately saved as a new configuration or until you power off the printer All changes will be lost when you power off the printer 77 Chapter 3 _ Overview 78 Specifying a Power Up Configuration You can specify any one of the nine configurations 1 8 or Factory as the power up configuration 1 Pressthe key until the following message displays MENU MODE CONFIG CONTROL 2 Press the key until the following message displays Power Up Config 1 3 Press the or key to cycle through the options 1 8 and Factory When the
182. ctory default is 3 minutes Ethernet Speed This menu appears only if a 10 100Base T Network Interface Card NIC is installed The Ethernet Speed menu has five different speed modes to allow compatibility with different systems and networks e Auto Select factory default Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to perform an auto detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half Duplex 10 Full Duplex 100 Half Duplex or 100 Full Duplex e 10 Half Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 10 Megabits per second using half duplex e 10 Full Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 10 Megabits per second using full duplex e 100 Half Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 100 Megabits per second using half duplex e 100 Full Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 100 Megabits per second using full duplex 247 Chapter 3 248 ETHERNET PARAMS Job Control Standard factory default The NIC waits for the entire job to be received before it indicates the job is done Enhanced The NIC waits for the entire job to be printed before it indicates the job is done Fast Standard The EOJ End of Job packet is acknowledged immediately Use this option if the job is timed out due to a delay in the acknowledgement of the EOJ packet because of the amount of data being printed Off There is no synchronization between the NIC and the printer when printing a job NOTE For detailed inf
183. current configurations will be lost unless changes made to it are saved via the CONFIG CONTROL menu To save configuration information permanently or to select it as the power up default see Saving a Configuration on page 76 Changing Printer Settings You can change or configure printer settings such as print speed or emulations through the control panel as follows 1 Press the key until the following message displays MENU MODE QUICK SETUP 2 Press the 4 key to cycle through these options e Print Intensity e Print Speed e Print Mode e Media Handling e Paper Feed Shift e Label Length e Label Width e Ver Image Shift e Hor Image Shift e Orientation e Gap Mark Sensor e Auto Calibrate e Validator Function if the validator option is installed Refer to the Online Data Validator User s Manual e Active IGP Emul e xxx Diagnostics xxx denotes Active IGP emulation e Save Config e Power Up Config 75 Chapter 3 _ Overview e SMT Status if RFID is installed Refer to the RFID Labeling Reference manual e PAA Status if RFID is not installed 3 When the desired submenu displays press the or key to scroll through the values or options 4 Press the key to select a value An asterisk displays next to the selected value or option 5 If there are more submenu values or options you want to change use the t 4 and keys to access the value and the key
184. d only when the internal rewinder is installed The internal rewinder is a factory or field installed option 334 l Tag Specification Mark Sensing Black Mark on underside ll Tag Specification Gap Sensing lll Label Specification Gap Sensing O S 1 KG K i i K D D i i a C 1 A O Direction of Media Motion Direction of Media Motion Direction of Media Motion Figure 9 Media Dimensions Table 21 Media Specifications T5X04R T5X06R T5X08R SL5X04R SL5X06R A Label Width Range 1 00 4 5 in 2 0 6 8 in 3 0 8 75 in 19 1 114 3 mm 50 8 172 7 mm 76 2 222 3 mm B Backing Width Range 0 75 4 5 in 2 0 6 8 in 3 0 8 75 in 19 1 114 3 mm 50 8 172 7 mm 76 2 222 3 mm C Min Gap Hole Notch Height 0 10 in 0 10 in 0 10 in 2 54 mm 2 54 mm 2 54 mm K Min Refl Mark Height 0 10 in 0 10 in 0 10 in 2 54 mm 2 54 mm 2 54 mm l Min Refl Mark Width 0 5in 0 5 in 0 5 in 12 7mm 12 7mm 12 7mm E Media Thickness Range 0025 010 in 0025 010 in 0025 010 in 0635 254 mm 0635 254 mm 0635 254 mm G Width of Inter label gap hole 0 25 0 50 in 0 25 0 50 in 0 25 0 50 in 6 35 12 7 mm 6 35 12 7 mm 6 35 12 7 mm D Media Length Range Continuous Batch Mode Tear Off Strip Mode Tear Off Mode Peel Off Mode Cut Mode 0 25 in 6 35mm 99 in 2515mm 0 25 in 6 35mm 99 in 2515mm 1 in minimum 25 4 mm 99 in 2515 mm 1 in minimum 25
185. data has been received for the selected Time Out period e Session Close Allows Autoswitching only when the Network Socket is closed Prime Signal e Disable factory default The parallel port will not perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the Prime Signal e Enable The parallel port will perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the Prime Signal 231 Chapter 3 232 PARALLEL PORT Data Polarity The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your host computer Standard factory default Does not expect the host computer to invert the data Inverted Expects the data received on the data lines from the host computer to be inverted Ones become zeros and vice versa Resp Polarity The Response Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity of your host computer Standard factory default Does not invert the response signal e Inverted Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer Busy on Strobe e Enable factory default Asserts a busy signal after each character is received e Disable Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full Latch Data On Specifies whether the data is read on the leading or trailing edge of the data strobe signal The options are Leading factory default and Trailing Offline Process e Disable factory default When set to disable the printer does not process parallel network data w
186. de Contact your local waste agency for the correct disposal procedure BE be Bk Bo eCos eCos the Embedded Configurable Operating System Copyright 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 Red Hat Inc Copyright 2002 2003 John Dallaway Copyright 2002 2003 Nick Garnett Copyright 2002 2003 Jonathan Larmour Copyright 2002 2003 Andrew Lunn Copyright 2002 2003 Gary Thomas Copyright 2002 2003 Bart Veer Copyright 1982 1986 1991 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Unix System Laboratories Inc All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the Unversity of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co or Unix System Laboratories Inc and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories Inc Copyright 1995 1996 1997 and 1998 WIDE Project All rights reserved Copyright 2000 Brian Somers Copyright 1998 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright 1997 Niklas Hallqvist All rights reserved Copyright 1998 Stephen Deering Copyright 1992 1993 The Regents of the Unversity of California All rights reserved This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Stephen Deering of Stanford Unversity Portions of eCos code are distributed under several BSD style licenses Other portions of eCos code are distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License with a non copylef
187. de ii Fonts Disable See page 162 Enable Notes Factory Default 1 This menu appears only if the IPDS emulation and correct security key is is installed 160 IPDS Setup Default Font and Default Code Pag IPDS SETUP from page 160 Default Font Courier 10 Prestige 10 Courier it 10 OCRA APL 12 Courier 12 Prestige 12 Courier it 12 Prestige it 12 Boldface PSM Courier 15 Courier 17 1 Gothic 20 Times Roman 6 Times Roman 8 Times Roman 10 Times Roman 12 Times Roman B10 Times Roman B12 Times Roman B14 Times Roman B18 Times Roman B24 Times Roman 110 Times Roman 112 Times Roman BI10 Times Roman BI12 OCRB Default Code Pag English USA Can English US Intl Internat Set 1 Symbols Set 7 Canadian French Austrian German Belgian Old Brazilian Canada French Danish Norw Finnish Swedish Italian Japanese Eng Portuguese Spanish Speak English UK Aust Germ ALT Dan Norw ALT Fin Swed ALT Spanish ALT Katakana French Azerty Graphic Escape Int Typographic Arabic Greek Hebrew PC Internat Set 5 Hebrew ALT PC Multilingual Latin 2 ROECE Icelandic Cyrillic Old OCRA OCR B DCF US Text Subset Turkish Latin 5 Euro US Can Euro Aust Germ Euro Dan Norw Euro Fin Swed Euro Italian Euro Spanish Euro UK Ireland Euro French Euro Internat Euro Icelandic Notes Factory Default Although these options are listed vertically here use
188. desired number displays press the key to select it The following message displays Power Up Config NOTE If the configuration number has not been saved previously the following error message displays CONFIG DOES NOT EXIST Save First If this error message displays see Saving a Configuration on page 76 Once you have saved a configuration repeat the steps in this procedure Modifying a Saved Configuration Modifying a Saved Configuration You can change a saved configuration by rewriting over it For example you can modify Config 1 shown below Suppose you want to keep all the settings but you want to select the parallel Centronics interface instead of the IEEE 1284 interface 1 Load the configuration to be changed for example Config 1 a Pressthe key until the following message displays MENU MODE CONFIG CONTROL b Press the 4 key until the following message displays Load Config Factory c Press the or key to cycle through the options Factory 1 8 d When the desired number displays press the key to select it The following message displays Loading Saved Configuration Then the following message displays when it is loaded Load Config x Move through the menu and change all the desired values In this example press the key until PARALLEL PORT displays Press the 4 key until Port Type IEEE 1284 displays Press the key until Centronics
189. dia and Ribbon OOS Media Cover Media and Ribbon Loading Instructions Ribbon Take up Core Ribbon Take up Spindle Do not attach the ribbon to the ribbon take up spindle without a fiberboard take up core installed 5 10 11 12 Attach the ribbon to the ribbon take up core on the ribbon take up spindle using the adhesive on the ribbon leader Manually rotate the spindle clockwise until the clear leader has passed the printhead Close the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise Verify that Print Mode in the QUICK SETUP menu is set for Transfer See QUICK SETUP on page 95 for more information If you have not run an Auto Calibrate with this media and ribbon do so now See Running Auto Calibrate on page 60 Press the FEED key once to verify that the media and ribbon advance Press the PAUSE key to place the printer online Close the printer media cover if the rewinder is not needed Batch Rewind Mode Using the Optional Internal Rewinder The printer can be set up to rewind labels after they have been printed Batch Rewind Mode or to automatically peel labels from their backing and dispense them one at a time while rewinding the liner Peel Off Mode Both modes require an internal rewinder which is available as a factory installed or a field unit option Batch Rewind Mode Batch Rewind allows you to automatically rewind printed labels into a roll using the op
190. dle the media labels or tag stock e Tear Off Strip factory default Printer prints on the media and sends it out the front until the print buffer is empty then positions the last label over the tear bar for removal e Tear Off After each label is printed the printer positions the label over the tear bar and waits for you to tear off the label before printing the next one on demand printing A Remove Label message will display to remind you to remove the label before the next one can be printed e Peel Off Prints and peels die cut labels from the liner without assistance The printer waits for you to take away the label before printing the next one on demand printing When the optional internal rewinder is installed with liner attached a Remove Label message will display to remind you to remove the label before the next one can be printed See Peel Off Mode on page 124 and Peel Present on page 123 for more information NOTE The Tear Off and Peel Off options are not allowed if the cutter is installed The error message INCOMPATIBLE WITH CUTTER displays e Cut When the optional media cutter is installed it automatically cuts media after each label is printed or after a specified number of labels have been printed when a software cut command has been issued It cuts continuous roll paper labels or tag stock NOTE The Cut option is not allowed if the cutter is not installed The error message
191. does not by itself cause the resulting work to be covered by the GNU General Public License However the source code for this file must be made available in accordance with section 3 of the GNU General Public License This exception does not invalidate any other reasons why work based on this file might be covered by the GNU General Public License Alternative licenses for eCos may be arranged by contacting Red Hat Inc at http sources redhat com ecos ecos license 386 OpenSSL License The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license i e both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit See below for the actual license texts Actually both licenses are BSD style Open Source licenses In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openss core openssl org iD epee cote eee eee ee ee ee ee ee Copyright c 1998 2011 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution
192. done through the printer s Properties Sharing tab Make note of the printer s shared name Start a command prompt session The Start Menu icon is usually labeled MS DOS Prompt or Command Prompt At the command prompt type NET USE LPT1 Comp_Name Shared_Name Persistent YES lt Enter gt where Comp_Name is the computer name found in the computer s System Properties Computer Name tab and Shared_Nameis the printer s shared name found in the printer s Properties Sharing tab This command should be all on the same line It redirects output on LPT 1 to the shared printer To check status of connection type Net View Comp_Name lt Enter gt where Comp_Name is the computer name found in the computer s System Properties Computer Name tab Now the printer is ready To use the COPY command to send the program file to the printer type COPY b filename prg 1pt1 lt Enter gt where filename prg is the file name you noted in step 4 To stop using LPT1 for USB type NET USE LPT1 DELETE lt Enter gt Downloading Software through the Printronix Windows Driver The Printronix Windows Driver contains an option that allows you to download software to the printer To download software to the printer perform the following steps 1 Using Windows Explorer create a directory named download at the root level of your C hard drive C download Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer s CD drive Ide
193. dows Driver A TrueType font can be downloaded from a PC through the Printronix Windows Driver 1 Load the Printronix Windows driver provided with your printer on the Manuals and Utilities CD on Windows 2000 NT XP Server 2003 Vista 2 Once the printer driver is installed on the PC right click the printer driver and select Properties 3 Click the TT Font Download tab to access all the available system TrueType fonts 4 Select the TrueType font s from the Available System TrueType Fonts pane you want to download 5 Click the Download button to download font s to the printer while it is online PGL Emulation Online A TrueType font can be downloaded by creating a file that appends a PGL command to the font and then sending that file to the printer Use the PGL FONTLOAD command FONTLOAD FontName FontSize DISK where FontName TrueType font name e g arial ttf FontSize TrueType font size e g file size for arial ttf DISK Specify the download location to Flash For example FONTLOAD arial tif 60548 DISK Insert binary data of arial ttf here END After the file is created it can be copied to the appropriate I O port of the printer while the printer is online just like any other print file for example copy b filename ext 1pt1 276 Download Mode Download Mode To download a TrueType font to the printer through Download mode first add a header to the font then place the printer in Download m
194. e Media or Liner Lever 3 Turn the release lever on the rewinder counterclockwise and lock it in place This forms a raised ridge along the width of the rewinder 4 Insert the leading edge of the media into the closest slot of the rewinder and slide the media against the back flange 5 Hold the media edge in the slot and manually rotate the rewinder one full revolution counterclockwise until the media is taut 45 Chapter 2 IMPORTANT 46 Using the Optional Internal Rewinder Media Cover 183401a xX A x Deck Lock Lever 6 Press down on both sides of the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock lever counterclockwise against its stop to place the printhead assembly into the printing position 7 Press the FEED key to advance the media to the next TOF Top of Form position 8 Press the PAUSE key until ONLINE displays 9 Close the media cover The rewinder supports a maximum diameter of five inches of printed labels Exceeding this diameter can cause printed labels to rub on the bottom pan Batch Rewind Mode Removing Printed Media from the Rewinder 183401a Release Lever Rewinder Printhead 1 Open the media cover 2 Press the FEED key to advance the last printed label past the printhead and tear the liner from behind the last printed label 3 Manually rewind the remaining printed labels onto the rewinder by turning the rewinder counterclockwise Turn
195. e threshold 324 Fault Messages Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution PAPER OUT Yes The printer does not Install media If a break Load Paper sense media occurred reinstall the e Media was not installed or has run out e A break in media has occurred e Media was not routed or installed correctly e The media sensor is not positioned correctly e Media is installed correctly but the sensor is not detecting it e Gap Mark Threshold value may be set too high and or Paper Out Threshold may be set too low The printer detected a false PAPER OUT when changing from Advanced Gap or Advanced Notch to Gap or Mark sensing or vice versa media Press the PAUSE key to clear the fault message Check the media installation procedures on page 28 Verify the lower media sensor is properly positioned under the media If Advanced Gap or Advanced Notch is selected verify the upper media sensor is positioned above the lower media sensor Run Auto Calibrate to improve the ability of the sensor to detect the installed media Check if the Gap Mark Threshold is too high or the Paper Out Threshold is too low Lower the Gap Mark Threshold or raise the Paper Out Threshold value If using media with no gaps or black marks perform Auto Calibrate to establish a valid Paper Out Threshold If the printe
196. e 159 Primary Sets Primary Sets SPC Type SPC Type Translation Tbl Translation Tbl Logical Buf Size SFCC Char PA1 Buffer Print Intervention Req User Defined St1 PA2 Twinax Type Buffer Print User Defined St2 Buffer Reprint Active Char Set Translation Tbl User Defined Stp Buffer Print Secondary Sets PA1 SPC Char Set Coax Type 5225 World Trade PA2 Translation Tbl Active Char Set Cancel IGP DCU Buffer Reprint Buffer Print Secondary Sets Lead in Chars User Null Handling Early Print Cmpl Defined St1 SPC Null Supp SCS Buffer Cntrl User Defined S12 5 SPC Space Supp Alt Set 80 9F User Defined Stp SFCC Char Intervention Req Alt Set 80 9F User Defined St1 CR At MPP 1 Graphic Chek Err User Defined St2 NL At MPP 1 Graphic Chek Cod User Defined Stp 5 Position Aft FF LAC Option NL At MPP 1 Last Char FF LAC Approx Null Suppression Set Text Orientn FF Validity Host Override Auto Skip At End Format Control FF After Job Max Print Width CR EM amp NL Translate Table Host Override Format Control Cancel IGP DCU Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Gap Mark Sensor and Paper Out Sensor work in conjunction as shown in Table 6 on page 127 If you change the Gap Mark Sensor or Paper Out Sensor you must recalibrate the media 2 Appears only if the CTHI option is installed 3 Appears only if selected as the Port Type under C T PORT 4 Appears only if the CTHI
197. e Printronix Customer Support Center see page 371 or access the Printronix web page at www printronix com NOTE The term media used in this manual refers to all the different kinds of paper or tag stock that can be used in the printer See Genuine Printronix Media on page 345 for more information Ribbons Ribbons Printronix offers a wide range of ribbons specifically engineered to enhance printing capabilities and to prevent premature printhead wear Therefore you should use a Genuine Printronix Thermal Ribbon in your printer See Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons on page 344 for more information Setting Up the Printer CAUTION CAUTION Frame Unpacking the Printer The printer is shipped in a carton and protective bag The top lid of the carton has instructions for removing the internal packing material Keep all packing material in case repacking is required Avoid touching the electrical connectors to prevent electrostatic discharge damage while setting up the printer The discharge of accumulated electrostatic energy can damage or destroy the printhead or electronic components used in this device Do not place the printer on its backside during unpacking or handling because you may damage the printer interface connector ere Tape Strips 2 A ae Media Cover 4 Foam Pads 2 1 Remove the tape strips from the media cover Lift open the media cover 2 Remove the tape s
198. e displayed or a fault message displayed run Manual Calibrate as described on page 66 or see Table 18 on page 309 NOTE The amount of media sampled during Auto Calibrate is based on the 6 7 length of a label and transitions detected without error between a label and its label length indicators Press the PAUSE key until OFFLINE displays Press the FEED key several times Each time you press FEED the media advances one label length and stops NOTE After a form feed the position of the leading edge of the next label depends on the type of Media Handling mode selected under the QUICK SETUP menu Tear Off and Tear Off Strip Media Handling will position the label edge at the tear bar while Continuous will position the label edge under the printhead Press the PAUSE key until ONLINE displays Once the Sensed Distance value is confirmed you will need to save it to the desired configuration menu before powering off the printer See Saving a Configuration on page 76 61 Chapter 2 62 Printing Adjustments Running Media Profile The Media Profile printout shows the relationship of the Paper Out Threshold and the Gap Mark Threshold values illustrates if and when each label length indicator is detected and shows the difference between the label length indicators and the label The profile printout see Figure 1 on page 63 helps you set the thresholds for difficult media This includes pre printed label
199. e form length will be determined by the Form Length menu in the LP menu Ignore Mode This parameter instructs the IGP to ignore the character selected under the Select Character menu e Disable factory default The IGP does not ignore any characters e Enable The IGP ignores the character specified in the Select Character menu Emulation Submenus Ignore Spaces e Disable factory default Trailing spaces are not deleted from alphanumeric elements in a graphics pass e Enable Trailing spaces are deleted from alphanumeric elements in a graphics pass Ignore Text e Disable factory default When disabled text in normal mode will be printed Attributes to be printed depend on the PGL Normal menu setting e Enable When enabled any line of text non PGL commands in normal mode will be ignored IGP100 Compatibl This parameter forces the output to correspond with IGP 100 printer output in cases where there are differences The options are Disable factory default and Enable Intervention Req e Send To Host factory default The printer sends a signal to the host computer when a printer fault or hold mode time out occurs NOTE If you select Send To Host make sure the Error Recover option under MEDIA CONTROL is set to Disable If Error Recover is not set to Disable Intervention Req will not work properly e Do Not Send No signal will be sent to the host computer Italic Print e Disable factory default
200. e installed media When Gap is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing edge of one gap to the trailing edge of the next gap or one label one gap When Mark is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark When you have completed Auto or Manual Calibrate you can verify the new values are correct by pressing the FEED key several times Each time you press FEED media advances one label and stops at the correct Top of Form position of the next label Once you confirm the correct values save them to the desired configuration menu before powering off the printer See Saving a Configuration on page 76 Running Auto Calibrate You can initiate Auto Calibrate via the TEST PRINT key described in detail below or via the CALIBRATE CTRL or DIAGNOSTIC menus in Menu mode NOTE Verify that the Gap Mark Sensor option Gap Mark Advanced Gap Advanced Notch or Disable matches the installed media See Sensing Different Media Types on page 59 Check that the media sensors are horizontally positioned to permit sensing of the label length indicators See Positioning the Media Sensors on page 54 Make sure the Label Length value entered in the QUICK SETUP menu matches the physical length of the installed media Entering the correct length forces the printer to advance media far enough during calibrate for
201. e left edge of the image is the trailing edge of the media The following illustration is an example with the operator viewing the front of the printer NOTE Inverse Landscape orientation applies to PGL and VGL emulations This is regarded as Landscape using PPI ZGL lt q 4inches FEED sosai e TEE o2F5 4 o20S 2 Q 7o00 53279 6 inches aa Q DZ Leading Edge Gap Mark Sensor The available options specify the sensor type needed for detecting the Top of Form position on media with label length indicators gaps notches holes or black marks e Disable Select when using media with no label length indicators no gaps notches holes or black marks or when you want the printer to ignore all existing label length indicators on the installed media NOTE When you select Disable the length of each label is based on the Label Length value entered in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu or the value sent via host software e Mark Select when using media that has horizontal black marks located on the underside of the label liner or tag stock The Top of Form position is the leading edge of the black mark 101 Chapter 3 QUICK SETUP 102 e Gap An alternative to Advanced Gap The Top of Form position is the leading edge of the die cut label trailing edge of the gap notch or hole e Advanced Gap factory default Select when using media with a liner space between die cut labels or when usin
202. e printer while reloading labels because you can lose data Pivoting Deck Loading Roll Media Loading Roll Media 183386a Media Cover Media Hanger Media Hanger Guide Media Width Guide Media Damper Deck Lock Lever 1 Open the media cover 2 Slide the blue media hanger guide outward to the end of the media hanger and flip it up horizontally 3 Open the pivoting deck by rotating the blue deck lock lever fully clockwise 4 Slide the blue media width guide close to the outside end of the media damper 29 Chapter 2 _Loading Media and Ribbon Media Roll Media Hanger Media Hanger Guide 183387a 5 Slide a roll of media onto and towards the back of the media hanger The media feeds from the top of the roll and towards the front of the printer 6 Place the media hanger guide under the media hanger and against the lower part of the label core at a 45 degree angle as shown This position provides the required tension for a new label roll and the desired drag for a partial label roll 30 Loading Roll Media Media and Ribbon Loading Instruction Media Printhead Media Damper Platen Rubber Drive Roller 7 Thread the media under the media damper and then between the platen rubber drive roller and the printhead You can also refer to the arrows on the printer frame or to the label inside the media cover for media loading instruct
203. e problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative ERROR WRITING Yes No Hardware or software Power off the printer for 15 TO FLASH fault in flash memory seconds then power back on If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative ERROR WRONG Yes No The printer received Power off the printer for 15 CHECKSUM the complete program but the checksum did not match The data may have been corrupted during download seconds then power back on If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative 316 Fault Messages Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message Patek Explanation Solution ERROR Yes An interim message Wait When the asterisk OCCURRED displays while the stops rotating a different fault FLUSHING QUEUES FAN FAULT FILE EXISTS Enable Overwrite printer discards host data it cannot use because a fault condition exists While this message displays the asterisk rotates The printer detected that the power supply fan did not rotate The printer operator tried to save a file using the name of an existing stored file message will appear troubleshoot the final message Contact your authorized customer service representative Verify that the fan rotates when the printer is first powered up and when the printer moves media or prints Call your authoriz
204. e the printhead pressure dial is set properly for the media thickness installed Skin oils can adhere to the surface of label stock causing fingerprints which inhibit thermal transfer Wipe label stock with a cloth or remove a few feet of labels to expose a clean area Handle labels by the edges Check that the media has not been mishandled before or during installation in the printer Soiled media or media with fingerprints will prevent proper ribbon transfer Check that media has not been installed inside out Surfaces on both sides may look identical but can produce big differences in print quality Make sure the correct ribbon and media combination are being used Use the correct ribbon type Check the ribbon for creases or folds across its surface Smooth out the ribbon to remove any creases Reduce the Print Speed value through the QUICK SETUP menu MEDIA CONTROL menu or via host software If using ribbon Transfer Print mode do not use direct thermal media 304 Solving other Printer Problems Table 17 Printer Problems and Solutions continued Symptom Solution Explanation PRINTER OPERATION Advances several labels when FEED key is pressed Check that labels are loaded correctly See Loading Media and Ribbon on page 28 Check that the Label Length in the QUICK SETUP menu MEDIA CONTROL menu or sent by the host computer agrees with the length of the media installed A
205. ecuring the foam pad to the inside of the media cover 3 Remove the foam pad between the front door and the frame Setting Up the Printer 1 Chapter eL8eesL 4 Remove the foam pad between the pivoting deck and the frame Pivoting Deck E SJ EWR li K TR i N N yo o Zhe Ree Kl A S A S f eC8eeslL Platen A J paa Foam Pad Deck Lock Lever Printhead 5 Open the pivoting deck by rotating the blue deck lock lever fully clockwise 6 Remove the foam pad from between the printhead and the platen rubber roller 7 Close the pivoting deck and media cover 18 Installation Installation The following sections will guide you through the printer installation process 1 Place the printer on a flat level surface that allows easy access to all sides of the printer CAUTION Never operate the printer while it is resting on its side or upside down 2 Check that the printer power switch is in the OFF O position WARNING Failure to properly ground the printer may result in electric shock to the operator In compliance with international safety standards this printer has been equipped with a three pronged power cord When inserted in a correctly wired power outlet the ground conductor will ensure that the printer chassis is at ground earth potential Do not use adapter plugs or remove the grounding prong from the cable plug If an extension cord is required
206. ed service representative Enter the PRINTER CONTROL menu and enable the Overwrite Files feature to overwrite the existing file FILE SYS FULL Add Flash Yes No Insufficient flash memory available to store file For additional flash contact your authorized service representative FILE SYS FULL Delete Files Insufficient flash memory available to store file Enter the PRINTER CONTROL menu Use Delete Files to delete unwanted files FILE SYS FULL Optimize amp Reboot Insufficient flash memory available to store file Enter the PRINTER CONTROL menu and use the Optimize amp Reboot feature FILE SYS INVALID Optimize amp Reboot File system not detected or flash was corrupted Enter the PRINTER CONTROL menu and use the Optimize amp Reboot feature FILE SYS WRITE Yes No Problem writing to flash Power off the printer for 15 Check Flash memory seconds then power back on If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative FILE UPLOADING Yes File is uploading to Wait for upload completion Please Wait PNE before accessing printer front panel 317 Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued f Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution FPGA FILE Yes No The program file was 1 Download the program file NOT FOUND not downloaded again succ
207. ed Notch Paper Out Manual Pwr Up HeadClose etl Online Gap Sensor Calibrate Action Action Auto Cal Windowing Transmissive Run Calibrate Disable Disable Disable Disable Reflective Auto Cal Auto Cal Enable Enable Seek TOF Seek TOF Gap Length Cal in peel Min Calib Use Label Threshold Mode Delta Length Range 0 12 inches Disable 080 3 E nable 50 0 05 to 1 00 inches Enable 048 to 200 Disable 5 to 95 Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Gap Mark Sensor and Paper Out Sensor work in conjunction as shown below Table 6 ple G e Paper Out Sensor puo ap defaults to Sensor Disable Reflective Mark Reflective Gap Reflective Advanced Gap Transmissive Advanced Notch Transmissive If you change the Gap Mark Sensor or Paper Out Sensor you must recalibrate the media 2 When Admin User is enabled in the PRINTER CONTROL menu you can change the unit value to millimeters Under the Units submenu in the MEDIA CONTROL menu enable the In Millimeters option 3 When Gap Mark Sensor Disable Gap or Mark the default is 48 When Gap Mark Sensor Advanced Gap or Advanced Notch the default is 80 127 Chapter 3 128 CALIBRATE CTRL CALIBRATE CTRL Submenus Gap Mark Sensor The available options specify the sensor type needed for detecting the Top of F
208. eeee 282 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals cccccceeseeesseeeeeseeeeees 283 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface ccccseecccceeeeccceeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeaeeneeees 284 Compatibility MOde ceccccceeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeneaeeseaees 284 Nibble Mode iniaiaiai irae ie iaeia iri a aan 284 Be Mode is ectevy shceceteeleneee E E A OE ET checeee 284 SONAS a a a aa a a a a aa once 285 RS 232 and Optional RS 422 Serial Interfaces ceceeeeesteeeeeees 287 PS 282 e eee ht eee Neel a S 287 RS422 PEPER CECE NPE a a e nee A a a 288 US a EE EA thet E T A 289 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 08 291 Printer TOSS eraa amaa ches pad aude need a aae d daina ao darid daeaestedeieanss 291 Troubleshooting Common Situations cccccceeseeceeeesteeeeestteeeeeeaaes 291 Improving Processing Time asssseesssssessrnesssrnesrrnnesrennesrnnnenrenneenena 292 Data Exchange an aa a a a e e aa 292 Controlling Print Quality 2 0 ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeaeenenees 294 Determining Printhead Wear a sssassssesssrsesssrnesrsnnesrnnnesrnnnenrnnneerena 295 Replacing the Printhead iesenii enrarir nea enna iA a NERS 296 Restore the Printer to Operation cccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeseeeeeeeees 298 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors nsss 299 Solving other Printer Problems cccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeenees 300 Printer Alaris isuct a ices a
209. efault Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full e Off Line or BF Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is offline or the internal serial buffer is full e On Line Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online e False Never asserts the RTS signal e True Continuously asserts the RTS signal Poll Character This option is for the Series1 protocol Whenever the printer receives this character it sends a response to the host indicating the current state of the printer see Series1 protocol The range is 00 FF Hex and the factory default is 00 Hex Poll Response This option is for the Series1 protocol After receiving a poll character the printer will wait the poll response time in milliseconds before sending the response The range is from 0 to 30 ms and the factory default is 0 ms Idle Response This option is for the Series1 protocol e Disable factory default e Enable The printer sends a response character every two seconds while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer size SERIAL PORT Submenus One Char Enquiry The One Char Enquiry mode uses the Poll Character to detect a request from the host and sends a response back to the host This option also allows you to turn on and off this feature Table 8 One Char Enquiry Response Characters Printer State Response hex Online and Buffer Not Ful
210. eload Ribbon 329 Ribbon Low 329 RIBBON OUT Load Ribbon 329 SECURITY CODE VIOLATION 329 SECURITY VIOLATION 329 SOFTWARE ERROR Recycle Power 330 Speed Exceeds Validator Limit 330 TESTING HARDWARE PLEASE WAIT 330 Unscannable xx Missing Codes 330 Validator not communicating 331 WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD 331 WIRELESS ADAPTER NOT COMPATIBLE 331 Fault Message ILL NVM VALUE 5 320 Fault Message ILL NVM VALUE 6 320 Fault Message ILL NVM VALUE 7 320 Fault Message Troubleshooting Table 309 Fault messages 308 E00 EXE ADDRO 314 Fault Message Troubleshooting Table 309 HOO PCI SLOT 319 H01 PCI J24 319 H02 PCI J25 319 operator correctable 308 requiring field service attention 309 Fault mode 27 Feature File option 227 Feed Key Online option 148 FF After Job option 199 FF valid at TOF option 200 FF Validity option 200 FILE EXISTS Enable Overwrite fault message 317 FILE SYS INVALID Optimize amp Reboot fault message 317 FILE SYS WRITE Check Flash fault message 317 FILE SYSTEM FULL Add Flash fault message 317 FILE SYSTEM FULL Delete Files fault message 317 FILE SYSTEM FULL Optimize amp Reboot fault message 317 FILE UPLOADING fault message 317 Filename extensions not shown in Menus 279 Firmware Download Utility downloading software 266 Flash Avail option 144 Flash Contains Boot Code downloading software 274 FLASH Installed option 227 Flash Memory load 265 Fonts 13 Downloading TrueType 27
211. em meets the following technical standards e EN 300 220 1 2000 Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters Short Range Devices Radio equipment to be used in the 25 MHz to 1000 MHz frequency range with power levels ranging up to 500 mW e EN 55022 Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment e EN 55024 Electromagnetic Immunity Requirements for Information Technology Equipment e EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Printronix cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non recommended modification of the product including the fitting of non Printronix option cards This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits of Class A Information Technology Equipment according to European standard EN 55022 The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices WARNING This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures 382 CE Symbol CE Taiwan CHABEGR ZAMS ASH EFT Oa HAREA EST EE BSS MAW RSS RRE ZS RW Ki SHASE 2 eEARSPERMAERTECLBE CRRATERR E BVA CkESRIBSASRMER MAAK KEE EMER
212. emulation under PRINTER CONTROL is set to Simp Prot Conv 5 Appears only if the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu is selected 8 Does not appear if IPDS is installed 7 Does not appear if CTHI emulation under Printer Control is set to Simp Prot Conv IPDS SETUP 2 page 160 3270 SETUP page 164 Default Font Default Code Pag Code Page Subset Emulation Early Print Comp Host Form Length Null Suppression Page Rotation VPA Check Expanded Fonts Resident Fonts XOH SMO Support Hexdump Mode Print IPDS Fonts NOTES Primary Sets Translation Tbl Active Char Set Secondary Sets Early Print Cmpl Alt Set 80 9F Intervention Req CR At MPP 1 NL At MPP 1 Position Aft FF Last Char FF Null Suppression FF Validity Auto Skip At End FF After Job CR EM amp NL Host Override Format Control Lead in Chars User Defined Stl 5i User Defined St2 j User Defined Stp 4 Change Case Set Text Orientn Max Print Width 5250 SETUP 3 page 166 PGL SETUP page 168 Primary Sets Translation Tbl Active Char Set Secondary Sets Lead in Chars User Defined Stl 4 User Defined St2 4 User Defined Stp 4 Alt Set 80 9F Graphic Chek Err Graphic Chek Cod Set Text Orientn Host Override Format Control Max Print Width Character Group Standard Sets Select LPI Define CR Code Define LF Code Autowrap Auto Uppercase Slash 0 Select SFCC Host Form
213. en the Logical Label Length is less than the Physical Label Length the printer will print the entire image and leave blank space the remaining length of the physical label as it advances to the Top of Form of the next label This is true regardless of the Clip Page setting The allowable Label Length range is 00 1 to 99 0 inches 2 5 2514 6mm The factory defaults are listed below Table 3 Factory Default Label Length Printer Inches mm Lines T5X08 6 152 4 36 Maximum Label Length range is dependent on the Label Width value selected printhead installed 203 or 300 DPI and the amount of DRAM installed in the printer See Appendix A for specifications NOTE See Set Label Length on page 123 Label Width This option specifies the physical width of the image to be printed The value can be specified in inches or millimeters depending on the setting of the Units submenu under the MEDIA CONTROL menu The allowable range in inches is 00 1 to the maximum print width of the printer The allowable range in millimeters is 2 5 to the maximum width of the printer The default value depends on model width and size of DRAM installed Ver Image Shift This option specifies the amount to shift an image vertically up or down for precise positioning on the label The actual height of the image is not affected by this parameter The allowable range is 1 00 inches to the current Label Length value setting up to a
214. end print jobs through any interface with auto switching selected as host interface It also allows a particular interface from the menu to be selected The options are Auto Switching Centronics Serial IEEE 1284 Twinax Coax Ethernet and USB NOTE The Twinax and Coax options appear only if the CT emulation is installed The factory default is Auto Switching Active IGP Emul This function allows you to activate any IGP emulation listed in the menu The choices are PGL ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL IEGL MGL and VGL See page 12 for descriptions of each emulation The default is PGL There are two methods for selecting the desired emulation e Select the emulation under the Active IGP Emulation menu option and save it as Power up Config e Send a host command to switch the emulation automatically refer to the appropriate Programmer s Reference Manual for details 139 Chapter 3 140 PRINTER CONTROL xxx Diagnostics This menu sets the error reporting capability of the printer for emulation XXX PGL ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL and VGL XXX corresponds to the selected option of the Active IGP Emul menu For PGL the options are as follows On default Full error checking reported Any element that falls off the current page is reported as an error Debug Mode Puts the printer in debug mode whenever a form is defined in CREATE mode Each line of the CREATE form will be printed along with an error if o
215. entative while saving a configuration the printer is out of memory and will not save that or subsequent configurations Previously saved configurations are still okay configurations to seven 323 Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message Cae Explanation Solution OPTION NOT Yes If the printer is Check that the cutter INSTALLED powered on with the option is installed cutter enabled in the connected in the up Media Handling menu position and the upper but the cutter itself is enclosure installed before open in the down powering on the printer poston orthe cutter Install the cutter option or Upper enclosure change to the correct removed the printer Media Handling option in Cannot astect the the QUICK SETUP menu cutter When using the cutter the printer must If the error persists be powered on with the contact your authorized cutter in the up position customer service and the cutter upper representative enclosure installed OVERALL GRADE Yes Overall data validation Press Pause to clear the FAIL failure decodeability message percent decode defects modulation EC Min Rmin and or symbol contrast Adjust the parameter that is causing the failure Run a Scan Report to see which parameter failed Lower the Overall Grade to a point where the worst parameter grade will be above the Overall Grad
216. ently selected SFCC The range is 17 255 and the factory default is 94 Emulation Submenus Select SO Char Allows you to specify a decimal code from 0 through 255 to be used in place of SO Shift Out as the control code which allows access for the alternate set of control function characters See the description of the Code 128 barcodes in the PGL Programmer s Reference Manual for details The range is 0 255 and the factory default is 14 Set Text Orientn Coax Twinax Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page This allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of left to right e Control By Host factory default Allows printers configured as a 4234 to use the Set Text Orientation command from the host e Left to Right e Right to Left When you select a right to left language the host will be notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online Set Text Orientn TN3270 TN5250 Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page This allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of left to right e Left to Right factory default e Right to Left When you select a right to left language the host will be notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online SFCC Char SPC Coax SPC Twinax Determines what character is printed when an EBCDIC Logical Not character Hex 5F
217. er Empty CR Online and Buffer Full 3 Offline and Buffer Empty 0 Offline and Buffer Full 2 e Series1 2 Char This protocol behaves exactly the same as the Series 1 Char except there is a two character response to the host The response characters are described in the following table Printer State Response Online and Buffer Empty 1CR Online and Buffer Full 3 CR Offline and Buffer Empty OCR Offline and Buffer Full 2 CR e ENQ ACK Enquiry Acknowledge The host controls the flow of communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the block with an Enquiry ENQ character When the printer receives the ENQ Character it acknowledges the ENQ thereby acknowledging it has received the entire block of data Status will also be sent before the ACK The status is as follows Printer State Status Online 40 06 Online or Paper Motion Fault 43 Platen Open or Paper Out 47 e DTR The printer controls the data flow by sending this hardware signal to the host If there is enough room in the printer buffer the printer will send a high signal if the buffer is full the printer will send a low signal DTR tells the host if it is safe to send more data If the host sends data during an unsafe condition data will be lost DTR is not available when RS 422 is selected 236 SERIAL PORT Submenus Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for
218. er to support this feature the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use For example if the printer is printing a job from the serial port and then receives a second print job from the parallel port the data from the parallel port will trickle bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast This function is not applicable for C T hotport The options are 1 4 1 2 1 2 4 8 and 16 seconds and Off The factory default is 1 4 second Timeout This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and check the other selected port types for data to print When the printer has not received data from the host after a certain period of time it needs to time out in order to service the other ports The range is 1 60 seconds and the factory default is 10 seconds Report Status e Disable factory default When a fault occurs on the printer only the active port reports the fault to the host Enable The port will report any fault even when it is not the current active port Switch Out On e Data Timeout factory default Allows Autoswitching when no
219. eral retail and industrial use Media 410 Media 510 3 3 mil direct thermal film Permanent acrylic adhesive 4 0 mil white thermal transfer polyolefin Permanent acrylic adhesive Excellent moisture resistance and tear strength for applications such as baggage tags etc Durable satin finish for chemical pails and drums and general outdoor and industrial use Media 520 Media 580T Smudge proof white thermal transfer polyolefin Permanent acrylic adhesive 8 5 mil smudge proof thermal transfer Poly tag stock Outdoor exposures especially chemical drums etc provides a markable smudge proof topcoat Outdoor nursery lumberyard and industrial environment hangtag and insert tag Media 700 s 2 0 mil polyester label stock thermal transfer White bright amp matte chrome UL CSA compliant nameplate labels harsh environment and laboratory labels 345 Appendix B _ Supplies and Accessories Besides the standard roll label configuration Genuine Printronix ThermaLine labels are also available in fanfold configurations Type Media Stock Ribbon Features Typical Applications Direct Thermal Paper Label Not Used Low cost Shipping Tag Ease of use Inventory tracking Synthetic Label Low environmental durability Limited label life Will fade and or discolor when exposed to heat sunlight or chemicals Thermal Transfer Paper Label Printronix Lowest cost thermal transfer Shipping Tag
220. esaeeeeneeenaes 15 Warnings and Special Information cccceccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeneeteaes 15 Manual ConventiOns ccccccccecceeeeeceeneeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseeeesnees 15 Thermal Consumables cccececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeneeeeeaes 16 Media Selection ecccececceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeccaeeeeaaeseeneeseeeeeaeeeeaeeseneeees 16 RRIDDONS siecss22e bated bede ta dedid td Shand adieavv cited acti acdienz TOT 17 s tting Upithe Printer eis isau nt a aa edie a ages 17 Unpacking the Printer soertar eiaei dk Eei iapa 17 Installation a a E a EEA ENS 19 CREAN OG ee reas Oh ML ha asc 23 Gontrols and IndiCators siiri ceeds aa eea aa aet a 23 Power SWC a a a A a Aa A 23 Control Panelen aata ta a a a a 23 Powering On the Printer 0 c cceccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeseaeeneneeeeaes 27 Operating Modes cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeeeeneeee 27 Media Handling Modes s nuserie n a AEE EAE EN RAAE ARETA 27 Loading Media and Ribbon sssssssssissssinsssrrssrirrssrirnssrinnsstnnnnstnnnnsennn 28 Loading Roll Media ceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeneaa 29 Loading Fanfold Media erosen esna a E Ea 36 Loading RIGDOM iss sche a e T E aie ad 40 Using the Optional Internal Rewinder ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneteneees 43 Batch Rewind Mode cccccceesecceeeeeneeeeeecneeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeneaa 43 Label
221. eserve compatibility with respect to barcodes you may not always be able to make them equal in size This is due to the various dot per inch differences between printer types When an exact match cannot be made the barcode is reduced in size so that the form bounds will not be compromised and the barcode will be readable e Default factory default Use for optimum performance e Laser Forces the output to correspond with the Printronix laser line of printers e P5000 Forces the output to correspond with the P5000 line of line matrix printers e 13000 Forces the output to correspond with the T3000 line of thermal printers e 11006 Forces the output to correspond with the T1006 line of thermal printers Del Char frm Fis This option deletes downloaded character s from flash memory PRINTER CONTROL Submenus Ld Char from Fis This option loads downloaded character s from flash memory Save Char to Fis This option saves downloaded character s to flash memory Del Char frm RAM This option deletes downloaded character s from RAM Ld Char at PwrUp This option loads downloaded character s from flash memory at Power Up The options are Disable factory default and Enable Del Set frm Fish This option deletes downloaded overlay set s from flash memory Ld Set from Fish This option loads downloaded overlay set s from flash memory Save Set to Fish This option saves downloaded overlay set s to flash
222. essfully 2 Ifthe message reappears contact your authorized customer service representative FRAMING ERROR Yes Serial framing error Match the serial interface over a serial interface settings of the printer to those of the host computer GAP NOT Yes The printer is set for 1 Check that the setting of DETECTED Gap or Mark sensing the Gap Mark Sensor in but a gap notch or the CALIBRATE CTRL black mark is not being menu matches the detected installed media The di 2 Check the position of the e owermecta lower and upper media SAROS not sensors See Positioning positioned correctly ithe Media Sensors on 54 When Advanced Gap pageot or Advanced Notch is 3 Cleanthe sensor assembly selected the upper and paper path media sensor is not 4 Run Auto Calibrate to positioned above the improve the sensor s ability lower media sensor to detect the media in use Gap Mark Threshold is 5 Run the Media Profile set too high or Paper printout in the CALIBRATE Out Threshold is set CTRL menu too low 6 Run Manual Calibrate See Running Manual Calibrate on page 66 7 Manually change the Gap Mark Threshold and or Paper Out Threshold values GRF CHK ERROR Yes In the CT emulation Press the PAUSE key twice PRESS PAUSE over a twinax interface the printer received a non printable character 318 Fault Messages Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message pelea
223. est pattern and check no image prints in Thermal that the image appears on the used portion of ribbon If the Transfer mode image is on the ribbon the ribbon may be installed with the transfer side against the printhead instead of against the media 2 The ribbon may be designed for another model printer 3 The ribbon may not be compatible with the media When narrow media is installed the media moves but no image prints Verify the Label Width value in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu agrees with the width of the installed media Too large a value will start the image too far to the right and off the media 302 Solving other Printer Problems Table 17 Printer Problems and Solutions continued Symptom Solution Explanation Printing is faded or of poor quality Clean the printhead Check that both latches on the pivoting deck are closed and latched Close the printhead by pressing down on both sides of the pivoting deck and rotating the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise Verify that the head pressure adjustment dial is properly set Try increasing the pressure Verify that the Print Speed and Print Intensity values are correct Adjust Print Speed and Print Intensity in the QUICK SETUP menu MEDIA CONTROL menu or via host software Print is light on the left or right side of the label Check if the pressure blocks are set for the width of the media being used Set each bl
224. eteeeees 73 Selecting a Menu Option ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeess 74 Changing Printer Settings 0 ccccceesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeneeeeeneees 75 Saving a Configuration ccccceeececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeeeseeneees 76 Auto Save Configuration ccccceccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeeeenaees 77 Specifying a Power Up Configuration cccccescceeeesseeeeeseeeenees 78 Modifying a Saved Configuration ccccesceceeceeeeeeeeseneeeeneeeeeeees 79 Printing a Configuration cccccceeceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 81 Loading A Saved Configuration ccccccceesceceeeeeseeeeeeseeeeneeteneees 81 Menu Oveniew sc iini wi a nan 82 Main MONU sotnie EEA EE E EA E T 84 QUICK SETUP a a a E a i 95 QUICK SETUP Submemnts c cceceeeceeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaes 96 CONFIG CONTROL 0 0c ccccceeeeeeeeeeee aaa aaue tahaha eaaa aa aatan 104 CONFIG CONTROL SubmemtS ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeneeesaees 105 MEDIA CONTRO Leasicsssgeatateascessterevatascnaed cqzecessactesengtaaze sisgeensdcazameasaas 107 MEDIA CONTROL Submenu cceceeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeenaeeseeeeeees 108 CALIBRATE CT RE raana ie ee i al es 127 CALIBRATE CTRL Submenu ccccccceeeteceeceeeeeeeeseeeteeeesaes 128 PRINTER CONTROL riie nana a an a TA a a aie 135 PRINTER CONTROL Submene ccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 137 E
225. ets Auto Label Width to 2 configures the Num Auto Labels to 3 and enables the Auto Label Mapping feature Printer Operation for Solution 2 The printer will print the first 2 label by itself the second 2 label by itself and finally the last 2 label by itself Label 1 Label 2 Label 3 Label 1 Label 2 Label 3 MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Example 3 Past Maximum File Width Problem A file has been constructed with three horizontally adjacent 4 labels The user now desires to use this file with a printer that has a 8 physical width The user should have used a solution similar to one of the solutions in the section above but the user erroneously enters an Auto Label Width of 12 and a Num Auto Labels of 3 Printer Operation Maximum Num Auto Labels 20 12 1 67 rounded up to 2 The printer will automatically reduce the Num Auto Labels to 2 Example 4 Blank Label Case Problem A file exists with two horizontally adjacent 4 labels The user now wants to use this file with a printer that has a 4 physical width The user decides to set the Num Labels to 3 and the Label Width to 4 despite the fact that these values are not optimum Printer Operation The maximum Num Auto Labels 20 4 5 The selected value of 3 is legal After the file is sent the printer will begin by printing the first 4 width label Once that la
226. excess data onto the next physical page The media sensor looks for the gap notch hole or black mark only after the media has advanced the distance specified by the Label Length value in the MEDIA CONTROL menu or by the Host Forms Length value sent via the software Any gaps notches holes or black marks that exist prior to reaching the Label Length or Host Forms Length value are ignored When Clip Page is set to Disable Mark and Gap media sensing reliability can be improved and the sensor problems described below can be fixed e The image starts to print at an erroneous distance from the top of form especially towards the end of a roll where the media is severely curled or scalloped e The image is incorrectly positioned as a result of the media sensor triggering off of a dark pre printed image on the label or multiple gaps within the label e The printer starts to print one label and then another all on the same physical label especially at the end of a roll where the media is severely curled e An occasional blank label appears within a print job in between printed labels When Clip Page is set to Disable the printer ignores any pre printed dark marks or multiple gaps on a label that could mistakenly be detected as the next top of form position based on the specified Label Length value The Label Length option is in the MEDIA CONTROL menu NOTE When Clip Page Disable the correct Label Length value must be entered I
227. f ghi j0123456789 Letter Gothic Bold ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Courier Bold ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Times Roman ABCDEFGH IJabcdefghij01 23456789 Times Roman ABCDEFGH IJabcdefghijO1 23456789 Times Roman ABCDEFGH Jabcdefghij0 123456789 Times Roman ABCDEFGH Jabcdefghij0 123456789 Times Roman ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Times Roman ABCDEFGH1Jabcdefghij0123456789 Times Roman ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Times Roman ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0 1234567 89 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij 0123456789 Times Roman Italic 16b7 10 ABCDEFGH I Jabcdefghij0 23456789 Times Roman Italic 16b7 12 ABCDEFGH Wabcdefghij01 23456789 Times Roman Bold Ital 16cb 10 ABCDEFGH I Jabcdef ghij0123456789 Times Roman Bold Ital 16cb 12 ABCDEFG HI Jabcde fghijO123456789 32 Resident Bitmap Fonts Typographic 2 Scalable Fonts PS Proportionally Spaced SC Scalable NOTE The Scalable fonts are currently rendered at 12 points They are scalable to any integer point size Figure 3 IPDS Fonts 4028 Emulation Sample Printout 162 IPDS Setup Print IPDS Fonts cont T5308 Resident IPDS Fonts 3816 Emulation FGID FONT Hex Deci WIDTH PRINTSAMPLE 0003 3 144 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 ooo5 5 144 ABCDEFGHI JaBcDEFGHI 30123456789 000b 11 144 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Prestige Pica 000c 12 144 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Courier Italic 0012 18 144 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 OCR A 0013 19 144 AB
228. f the value is too long the printer will ignore the actual gap or mark it needs to detect When using Gap sensing the Label Length value is equal to the physical length of a die cut or removable label When using Mark sensing the Label Length value is the physical distance from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark 121 Chapter 3 122 MEDIA CONTROL Error Recover This option determines how the printer handles data that was printing when an error occurred e Disable factory default The printer will not reprint the label that was printing when the error condition occurred Enable The printer reprints the label that was printing when the error condition occurred Ribbon Width When Same As Paper is selected the printer automatically adjusts the ribbon operating parameters to match the installed media width In those cases where the media width is less than the installed ribbon width the Set In Menu option should be selected After selection the ribbon width is set to the proper value by pressing the J key and choosing the actual ribbon width using the and keys The chosen width is then selected by pressing the J key The factory default is Same As Paper Display Ribbon When enabled and the printer online 1 to 4 asterisks will display on the LCD indicating the approximate amount of ribbon remaining on the supply spindle Online Roin 470 to 625m wee 314 to 469m
229. file printout represent the last values determined from a successful Auto or Manual Calibrate or the factory default values if no Auto or Manual Calibrate was performed Press 4 until Media Profile Profile Print displays and then press J The printer will 183412a Running Media Profile 40767 0 Paper Out 578 J J 0511 Gap Mark 421 4 0255 Figure 1 Media Profile Printout Gap Sensing This figure shows a Media Profile printout of a smart label where Gap Mark Sensor is set to Gap in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu In this example the gap threshold value the printer selected represented by the Gap Mark dotted line is too close to the amplitude of the antenna pulse This may cause the printer to falsely use the antenna as the gap top of form Media Sensor Position FEED S 1023 0767 0511 Paper Out 441 7 7 0255 A H Gap 209 F Fy rn K ran eee A ae 0000 183413a Detected Amplitude Indicates Type of Gap Mark Detected Amplitude of the Gap Sensing Selected of the Antenna 63 Chapter 2 _ Printing Adjustments 64 To avoid this problem increase the Threshold Range value to 60 or 70 in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu the default is 50 then run an Auto Calibrate again Cross Ref to Auto Calibrate NOTE Any changes to Threshold Range will not take effect until y
230. fined St2 4 Defined Stp 4 Char Set MODE PTX NI User Defined 5F 5F 5B 0500 Internat 5 MODE 219 Set 1 lt gt 40 to FF 40 to FF 40 to FF 0037 English US MODE P5000 Set2 0273 Austr Germ MODE IBM Set 3_ _ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0290 Japan Kata 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK Translation Buffer Tbl Print Disable Enable Notes Factory Default 1 This menu appears only if the CTHI option is installed 2 This menu appears only if Port Type under C T PORT is set to Twinax 3 Appears only if CTHI emulation under PRINTER CONTROL is set to Simp Prot Conv 4 This menu appears only if you select the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu 159 Chapter 3 IPDS SETUP IPDS SETUP IPDS SETUP from page 87 Default Default Code Code Page Emulation Early Print Host Form Font Pag Subset Comp Length See page 161 See page 161 Version 0 4028 IPDS Off Disable Version 1 3816 IPDS On Enable Null Page VPA Check Expanded Fonts Resident XOH SMO Suppression Rotation Fonts Support Disable 0 Enable Scalable Compatible Enable Enable 90 Disable Compatible Scalable Disable 180 270 Hexdump Print IPDS Mo
231. following printout options Current Factory Power Up All 1 8 customized configurations 4 When the desired option displays press the key The printer prints the specified configuration NOTE If the configuration you want to print has not been saved the following message displays momentarily CONFIG DOES NOT EXIST Save First This message indicates that no configuration menu has been saved under the configuration value you have selected and therefore cannot be printed You must either select another configuration to print or load and then save a configuration to that configuration value first Loading A Saved Configuration To use a different configuration 1 Press the PAUSE key until OFFLINE displays 2 Press the JOB SELECT key until the desired configuration displays 3 Press J Loading Saved Configuration displays 81 Chapter 3 Menu Overview Menu Overview RFID CONTROL VALIDATOR CONFIG CONTROL MEDIA CONTROL Set the basic RFID encoder Online data Name store and Control various menus neededto setup and status validator setup retrieve up to parameters configure the reporting and status eight custom related to print printer reporting printer quality media configurations and ribbon CALIBRATE PRINTER SELECTED DIAGNOSTICS PARALLEL CTRL CONTROL EMULATIONS FA PORT Selectthe correct Select the Emulations Select various Select vari
232. for data to print When the printer has not received data from the host after a certain period of time it needs to time out in order to service the other ports The range is from 1 to 60 seconds and the factory default is 10 seconds Report Status When a fault condition occurs in the printer normally only the active port reports the fault to the host With this menu item enabled the port will report any fault even when it is not the current active port The options are Disable the factory default and Enable 237 Chapter 3 238 SERIAL PORT Data Term Ready Stands for Data Terminal Ready This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the Data Terminal Ready DTR signal is generated This signal indicates if the printer is ready to receive data e True factory default Continuously asserts the DTR signal e On Line and BNF buffer not full Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full e Off Line or BF buffer full Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is offline or the internal serial buffer is full e On Line Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online e False Never asserts the DTR signal Request to Send This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the Request to Send RTS signal is generated This signal indicates whether or not the printer is ready to receive data e On Line and BNF factory d
233. from the liner without assistance The printer waits for you to take away the label before printing the next one on demand printing When the optional internal rewinder is installed with liner attached a Remove Label message will display to remind you to remove the label before the next one can be printed e Cut When the optional media cutter is installed it automatically cuts media after each label is printed or after a specified number of labels have been printed when a software cut command has been issued It cuts continuous roll paper labels or tag stock e Continuous Printer prints on the media and sends it out the front See Continuous Mode on page 124 for more information Paper Feed Shift This option represents the distance to advance shift or pull back shift the stop position of a label when Tear Off Strip Tear Off Peel Off or Cut media handling option is enabled The allowable range is 0 50 inches to the current Label Length value setting up to a maximum of 12 80 inches in 01 inch increments The factory default is 0 00 inches 97 Chapter 3 QUICK SETUP 98 Label Length This option specifies the user selected Label Length in inches or millimeters In most applications the user selected Label Length will match the physical label length Physical label length is the actual label length of the media installed When setting label length consider the following Label Length can also be
234. fter each label is printed or can cut the media after a specified number of labels have been printed using a software cut command Once you have decided on the mode configure the printer See Chapter 3 for more information Loading Media and Ribbon CAUTION CAUTION IMPORTANT 28 NOTE This section describes the procedures for loading various types of media and ribbon You can also refer to instructions on the printer itself on a label on the inside of the media cover The term media in this manual refers to all the different kinds of paper label or tag stock material that can be printed on by the printer Your thermal printer can print on continuous paper adhesive backed labels or non adhesive tags packaged in roll or fanfold form DO NOT TOUCH the printhead or the electronic components under the printhead assembly The discharge of electrostatic energy that accumulates on the surface of the human body or other surfaces can damage or destroy the printhead or electronic components used in this device Do not close the pivoting deck without label stock installed between the printhead and the platen because debris on the platen may damage the printhead Adhesive backed labels that DO NOT lay flat on the liner can jam the printer This can cause the label to peel off the liner The exposed edges can stick to the label guides and rollers inside the printer If you run out of labels while printing do not turn off th
235. g tag stock with notches or holes as label length indicators on white background media or when using media that has liner gaps between die cut labels with black background The Top of Form position is the leading edge of the die cut label trailing edge of the gap notch or hole e Advanced Notch Select when using media with notches or holes that interrupt a black vertical line on the underside of the media The Top of Form position is the leading edge of the die cut label trailing edge of the gap notch or hole Auto Calibrate This feature is used to improve the sensitivity and reliability of the Media Sensor in detecting gaps notches holes or black marks on the installed media as well as a paper out condition NOTE Prior to running Auto Calibrate you must enter the physical length of the installed media in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu Selecting the correct Label Length forces Auto Calibrate to increase media advancement for long labels to detect actual gaps notches or marks and decrease advancement for short labels You can initiate Auto Calibrate from the TEST PRINT key the CALIBRATE CTRL menu or the DIAGNOSTIC menu When Auto Calibrate displays on the LCD press the key The printer advances media the distance needed to accurately detect the label length indicators then stop at the Top of Form position and momentarily displays the Sensed Distance The process takes a few seconds to complete and results in
236. g the Media Sensors on page 54 37 Chapter 2 _Loading Media and Ribbon Media left edge Guide Notch 12 Align the left inside edge of the media with the guide notch located on the front edge of the tear bar Pivoting Deck 13 Close the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise This locks the pivoting deck and printhead assembly into the printing position IMPORTANT Ensure the pivoting deck is down and locked before attempting to advance media or print Failure to do so will cause the PRINTHEAD UP fault message to display 14 Verify that Print Mode submenu is set for the media type installed direct or transfer The Print Mode submenu is located in the QUICK SETUP menu See Main Menu on page 84 for more information Also if thermal transfer media is installed see Loading Ribbon on page 40 38 15 16 17 Loading Fanfold Media Verify the printhead pressure is properly set See Printhead Pressure Adjustment on page 52 Verify the pressure blocks are properly positioned See Printhead Pressure Block Adjustments on page 53 Verify the Gap Mark Sensor selection matches the type of media installed See Sensing Different Media Types on page 59 For direct thermal operation no ribbon required e If you have not run an Auto Calibrate do so now See Running Auto Calibrate on page 60 e If you have already run an Auto Calibr
237. gical Label Length is greater than the Physical Label Length and Clip Page Enable in the MEDIA CONTROL menu the printer will clip the bottom portion of the image that exceeds the Physical Label length In this case the printable data that was not printed will be lost When the Logical Label Length is greater than the Physical Label Length and Clip Page Disable the printer will continue to print the image onto the next physical label and ignore the gap or mark based on the label length value set in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu When the Logical Label Length is less than the Physical Label Length the printer will print the entire image and leave blank space the remaining length of the physical label as it advances to the Top of Form of the next label This is true regardless of the Clip Page setting QUICK SETUP Submenus The allowable Label Length range is 00 1 to 99 0 inches 2 5 2514 6mm The factory defaults are listed below Table 2 Factory Default Label Length Printer Inches mm Lines T5X04 6 152 4 36 T5X06 4 101 6 24 T5X08 6 152 4 36 Maximum Label Length range is dependent on the Label Width value selected and printhead installed 203 or 300 DPI See Appendix A for specifications NOTE See Set Label Length on page 123 Label Width This option specifies the physical width of the image to be printed The value can be specified in inches or millimeters depending on the setting
238. grammer s Reference Manual MGL Refer to the MGL Programmer s Reference Manual IEGL Refer to the JEGL Programmer s Reference Manual P Series page 172 P Series XQ page 174 Serial Matrix page 176 Proprinter XL page 178 Epson FX page 180 You can select emulation default parameters directly from the control panel or by control codes as explained in the appropriate Programmer s Reference Manual BEFORE you reconfigure an emulation print a configuration sheet to see all current settings 149 Chapter 3 150 EMULATIONS Standard C T Interface With a standard coax interface the printer emulates the following IBM coax printer models e 3287 Models 1 and 2 e 4234 Models 1 With a standard twinax interface the printer emulates the following IBM twinax printer models e 4234 Model 2 e 5225 Models 1 2 3 and 4 NOTE The standard Coax Twinax emulation selection will only be available if coax or twinax is selected from the C T PORT menu For more information refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual Simple Protocol Converter The Simple Protocol Converter SPC option allows those who use third party add on coax or twinax protocol converters to produce the same output on a Printronix thermal printer with the Coax Twinax CTHI capability as done using anon CT printer with the third party converter interfaces The SPC gives the printer the operational ability to connect to any PC or
239. gt It will launch in its own window Use the FDU to enter the emulation part number to select the I O connection and its corresponding settings and to initiate the download IMPORTANT Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller PCBA incompletely loaded and the printer may not boot up 15 16 17 18 19 When the new software has successfully downloaded into flash memory and the printer has reset itself set the printer power switch to O Off Remove the CD from your computer and store it with the printer If required reconnect the data input cable s to the printer Set the printer power switch to On Using the configuration printout s you made in step 1 page 266 restore the printer configurations Downloading Software through the Parallel Port 1 Make a configuration printout of all saved configurations See page 81 Set the printer power switch to O Off Disconnect the data signal cable s from the printer interface connectors Connect a parallel data printer cable to the LPT1 port of a computer running the Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Server 2003 or Vista operating system Connect the data cable to the appropriate I O port of the printer On the printer control panel press and hold down the and J keys Without releasing the keys power the printer on When you see B01 STATUS on the on the LC
240. h in the O OFF position Control Panel The control panel is located on the front of the printer and includes an LCD indicators and control keys buttons These are described in the following tables Also refer to Chapter 3 Online Status Indicator Liquid Crystal Display LCD Job In Process Indicator 23 ve Online Status Liquid Crystal Display LCD Job In Process Indicates when the printer is online offline or when there is a fault condition A backlighted liquid crystal display with two rows of 16 characters each Indicates when the printer is receiving or processing data Function in Online Mode Stays lit when the printer is online ready to print and accept data from the host Flashes during a fault condition Displays ONLINE the interface type and emulation in use During a fault condition displays the specific fault message and the corrective action Flashes when receiving data Function in Function in Offline Mode Menu Mode Off when the printer is offline Flashes during a fault condition Displays OFFLINE During a fault condition displays the specific fault message and the corrective action Flashes when receiving data Flashes during a fault condition Displays main menu submenu or option During a fault condition displays the specific fault message and the corrective action None sjojesipu Aejdsig p
241. haracters 0 to 451 linespaces 0 to 451 linespaces CR CR LF 172 Notes Factory Default 1 This menu is available only when you enable Admin User under PRINTER CONTROL 2 This menus does not appear when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 3 This menu appears only if the emulation is selected in the LP Emulation submenu P SERIES SETUP from page 172 Auto LF Define LF Control Control Bold Overstrike Code Code 06 Code 08 Disable LF CR LF 8 0 LPI Elongated Disable Enable Enable LES LEF 10 3 LP Backspace Enable Disable 6 0 LPI p Select EVFU Alt SFCC d PSeries Dbl FF valid at SFCC Select Set 80 9F Command High TOF 1 Enable Control Code Even dot plot Normal Enable 0 to 7F Disable Printable Double high P3 4 6 9 Compat Disable Text Host Reset Cmd Form Form Position Command CFG Ld Length gt Length gt Bottom of Line Enable Disable 4 or 6 inches 101 6 or 152 4 mm Top of Line Ignore All Power up config 00 0 to 24 0 inches 00 0 to 609 6mm Ignore CPI Current config Ignore LPI Facotry config i Form Form Form Form Length Width 5 Width Width 41 66 or 85 characters 0 to 272 characters 04 1 06 6 or 08 5 inches 104 1 168 0 or 215 9mm 00 0 13 6 inches 00 0 345 4mm 2
242. hardware component used to link two devices by common physical interconnection signal and functional characteristics IPS Label Liner backing Label Taken Sensor Media Media Sensor Memory Nonvolatile Memory NVRAM Parity check PCBA The speed at which the media is printed based on a rate of Inches Per Second The material labels are attached to during their manufacturing process Attachment is usually accomplished with an adhesive After printing labels can be easily removed from the liner and the liner discarded or recycled A sensor located at the front of the printer to detect the presence of a label extended out the front of the printer The sensor is used only during Peel Off and Tear Off Media Handling to sense a label and then detect its removal prior to printing the next label Material onto which data is printed by the printer The types of media supported by the printer are die cut labels or tag stock supplied in roll or fanfold format Media is further described by the type of sensing used to detect the Top of Form position based on the label length indicators used Transmissive Gap media uses a liner gap notch or hole between labels and Reflective Mark media uses a horizontal black mark located on the underside of the tag stock or label liner Continuous media with no label length indicators uses no sensing method and the operator determines which label length is desired The sensor
243. hat the printer will wait before it advances media to the tear bar position When Media Handling is set to Peel Off or Tear Off Label Wait Time specifies the number of seconds the printer will wait after a label is removed from the peel tear bar before starting to print the next label The range is 0 1 to 60 0 seconds and the factory default is 0 1 second 119 Chapter 3 120 MEDIA CONTROL Pre Peel Mode Disable factory default Enable When Media Handling Peel Off and Peel Off Mode Standard enabling Pre Peel Mode adds a forward and reverse motion to each label prior to printing The added forward pre peel motion temporarily breaks the die cut label from the liner and the reverse motion places the label back on the liner prior to printing peeling or dispensing the label Pre Peel Mode is usually enabled only when using die cut labels with an aggressive adhesive that makes automatic label removal from the liner difficult Pre Peel Adjust When Pre Peel Mode Enable Pre Peel Adjust represents the selectable distance that the label advances during Pre Peel Mode The Pre Peel Adjust distance selected is automatically used when Pre Peel Mode is enabled The range is from 0 00 to 2 00 inches in 01 inch increments The factory default is 1 00 inch LbI Missing Fit Allows the Label Taken Sensor to first detect the presence of a label at the tear bar Full Label The printer generates a fault condition if a missi
244. he printer is ready for data transfer and the PAUSE key on the control panel has been activated When the printer is in online mode it may accept data from the host Paper Empty PE A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is in a paper empty or paper jam fault Busy A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer cannot receive data A high true level from the host to indicate the printer should perform a warm start printer is reset to the power up configuration values Paper Instruction Pl Carries a VFU signal from the host with the same timing and polarity as the data line Fault A low true level from the printer indicates a printer fault 283 Chapter 5 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface 284 The IEEE 1284 supports three operating modes which are determined by negotiation between the printer and the host Compatibility Mode This mode provides compatibility with Centronics like host I O see Table 12 Data is transferred from the host to the printer in 8 bit bytes over the data lines Compatibility Mode can be combined with Nibble and Byte Modes to provide bidirectional communication Nibble Mode Eight bits equals one byte When a byte of data is sent to the printer the eight bits are sent over eight data lines Some devices cannot send data over their eight data lines To bypass this the IEEE 1284 permits data to be sent as ha
245. he desired fanfold supply location Insert the first few labels through either the rear or bottom panel opening 4 Place the media over the media hanger flush against the back of the printer 5 Flip up the media hanger guide and slide it in against the outer edge of the fanfold media 6 Flip the fanfold tension arm down by pushing on it through the opening at the top of the media hanger guide CAUTION _Donotallow the tension arm to snap down on the media hanger this could cause the tension arm to break Instead gradually lower the tension arm onto the media hanger 7 Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise until the deck swings upward 36 Media Guard Loading Fanfold Media Lower Media Sensor Media Sensor Handle Fixed Guide Media Width Media Damper QY Guide 8 9 10 11 Slide the media width guide outward to the end of the media damper Thread the media under the media damper and then between the platen rubber drive roller and the printhead You can also refer to the arrows on the printer frame or to the label inside the media cover for media loading instructions Verify that the left inside edge of the media is against the fixed guide on the bottom of the media damper Slide the media width guide inward against the outer edge of the media Check the horizontal position of the lower media sensor located under the media guard and refer to Positionin
246. he pivoting deck by Head To Clear Handling was selected and the Lbl Missing Fault menu was set to Early Detect The Label Taken Sensor did not detect the first 1 3 inches of a label indicating that the label has likely wrapped around the platen roller A label wrap occurs when a die cut label is incorrectly torn at the tear bar by the user and adhesive is exposed under the leading edge of the next label When the printer pulls this next label back to TOF the adhesive contacts the platen and when this label advances forward during printing ora Form Feed it wraps around the platen rotating the deck lock lever clockwise 2 Open the front door and loosen the two thumbscrews for better platen access 3 Remove the wrapped label by slowly pulling and unwrapping it from the platen NOTE Even though power is removed from the platen motor some drag will be felt as the platen rotates CAUTION Never use a sharp object against the platen as cuts and gouges in the platen may cause voids in the printed image and require platen replacement 4 When all of the label is removed from the platen use an isopropyl alcohol wipe Printronix PN 254945 901 to remove all adhesive from the platen to help prevent any future label wraps 5 Tighten the printer front door thumbscrews 6 Avoid label wraps by having the user practice careful tear off techniques and ensuring that the label cross pe
247. he printer control panel to take the printer offline and into Menu mode Press 4 and J together until ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED displays Press until RFID CONTROL displays Press J until Tag Type displays a ewy Press lt or until the desired tag type displays If the desired tag type does not display use the tag types listed in the Printer Menu Selection column on the RFID Smart Label Specifications web page referenced earlier 359 Appendix F _ Selecting RFID Tag Types 6 Press 4 to select the tag type An asterisk displays next to the selected tag type 7 If you want this selection to remain permanent save the configuration and set the configuration to be the Power Up Config in the QUICK SETUP or CONFIG CONTROL menu 360 G Overview PTX _ SETUP Commands The PTX_SETUP commands are a superset of commands which allow the printer to perform several tasks by parsing commands either stored in flash or sent to the printer by the host Commands range from re routing debug statements to downloading complete printer configurations This appendix describes the PTX_SETUP commands specific to thermal printers as well as the commands which are not platform specific The PTX_SETUP Commands Some concepts to keep in mind are as follows 1 PTX_SETUP commands are not emulation specific In a system with an IGP the IGP level emulation will process the PTX_SETUP commands In a system without an IGP the PTX
248. he same manner Emulation Submenus Character Group and Character Sets PGL From page 168 This menu item selects the character set used by the printer The available character sets are shown below Character Group PGL Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 Azeri Standard Arabic Sets Cyrillic Sets European Greek Sets Sets Sets 0 ASCII ASMO 449 Code Page 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek 1 German ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Code Page 852 ELOT 928 Greek 2 Swedish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 3 Danish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek 4 Norwegian MSDOS CP710 ISO915 Roman 8 ABG Greek 5 Finnish MSDOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek 6 English Sakr CP714 Cyrillic 7 bit Slavic 1250 Greek 851 7 Dutch Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 8 French CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 9 Spanish IBM CP864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 10 Italian IBM CP1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO 11 Turkish Arabic Lam One CP 1048 Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO 12 CP 437 Arabic Lam Two Polish POL1 13 CP 850 Win CP1256 Win CP 1250 14 15 Reserved Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 16 23 Dwn Overlay Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 24 31 User Def 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 _ Hebrew Sets Turkish Sets __
249. he value shown at the bottom of the dial is the active setting In general adjust printhead pressure to the lowest value which produces the desired print quality Die cut labels usually require a setting of 4 while heavy stock requires a setting of 6 to max The numbers on the printhead pressure adjustment lever are relative only and do not indicate a specific printhead pressure or media thickness By following this procedure you will minimize printhead wear 52 Printhead Pressure Block Adjustments Printhead Pressure Block Adjustments Right Pressure Block Left Pressure Block Right Pressure Block Pointer Pressure Block Adjustment Scale Lead Screw Left Pressure Block Handle 183406a Printhead pressure block adjustments are used to obtain a uniform print density across the width of the installed media under a variety of media and ribbon conditions Left Pressure Block Under normal printing conditions the left block should be set with its handle aligned with the bold mark on the pressure block adjustment scale When using media or ribbon widths less than one third the printer s maximum printing width you may need to manually slide the left pressure block further to the left Right Pressure Block The right pressure block should be positioned with its pointer handle on 4 inch printer models near the right edge of the media or ribbon in use Turn the lead screw knob clockwise to move the block right or c
250. hes of liner Exceeding this diameter can cause the liner to rub on the bottom pan The rewinder is designed to support the full amount of liner from a standard 8 inch diameter media roll 50 Removing the Paper Path Removing Label Liner from the Rewinder 2 3 4 on Open the media cover Open the front door Tear the liner at the tear bar Manually rewind the remaining liner onto the rewinder by turning the rewinder counterclockwise Turn the release lever on the rewinder clockwise Slide the roll of label liner off the rewinder and discard Removing the Paper Path Remove the paper path from the front door when using Tear Off or Tear Off Strip media handling because you will need to tear the label downward against the tear bar Tear Bar Front Door Groove Open the front door by pulling it upward then forward Grasp the upper right corner of the paper path and pry it off of the top of the front door After removing the paper path close the front door Open the pivoting deck and load paper and ribbon normally see Loading Media and Ribbon on page 28 51 Chapter 2 _ Printing Adjustments Printing Adjustments Printhead Pressure Adjustment Active Pressure Setting Printhead Pressure Adjustment Dial 183406a Sometimes you will need to adjust printhead pressure because of variations in media thickness and width The printhead pressure adjustment dial is shown above T
251. hese options are listed vertically here use your plus and minus keys to cycle through the options when you are operating your printer 155 Chapter 3 TWINAX SETUP TWINAX SETUP TWINAX SETUP 12 3 from page 86 Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 This menu appears only if the CTHI option is installed 2 This menu appears only if Port Type under C T PORT is set to Twinax 3 This menu appears only if the CTHI emulation under PRINTER CONTROL is set to Standard 4 This menu does not appear if the IPDS emulation is installed Primary Translation Buffer Print Twinax Type Active Char Secondary Sets Sets Tbl 4 Set See page 157 Disable IPDS 256 Bytes Secondary Set See page 157 Enable IPDS 1024 Bytes Primary Set 5225 4234 5225 Cancel Lead in User User User World Trade IGP DCU Chars Defined Stl Defined St2 Defined Stp Standard Char Enable User Defined 5F 5F 5B Extended Char Disable Set 1 lt gt 40 to FF 40 to FF 40 to FF Set 2 Set 3_ _ Alt Graphic Chek Graphic Chek LAC Option LAC Approx Set Text Set 80 9F Err Cod Orientn Printable Enable 60 Enable On Control By Host Control Code Disable 40 to FE Disable Off Left to Right
252. hile offline e Enable When set to enable the printer continues to process but not print the current network parallel job while the printer is offline until the printer s buffer is full SERIAL PORT SERIAL PORT from page 91 Port Type Baud Rate Word Stop Parity Data Lenght Bits Protocol RS 232 9600 BAUD 8 1 None XON XOFF RS 422 19200 BAUD 7 2 Odd ETX ACK Disable 38400 BAUD Even ACK NAK 57600 BAUD Mark Series1 1 Char 115200 BAUD Sense Series1 2 Char 600 BAUD ENQ ACK 1200 BAUD DTR 2400 BAUD 4800 BAUD Buffer Size Trickle Timeout Report Data Term Request to iagi In K Time Status Ready Send 16 1 4 sec 10 sec Disable True On Line and BNF 1 16 1 2 sec 1 60 sec Enable On Line and BNF Off Line or BF 32 1 sec Off Line or BF On Line 64 2 sec On Line False 4 sec False True 8 sec 16 sec Off Poll Poll Idle One Char Printer Framing Character Response Response Enquiry Status Errors 00 Hex 0 ms Disable Disable Disable Enable 00 FF Hex 0 30 ms Enable Enable ENQ STX Disable ENQ Offline Process Disable Enable Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 233 Chapter 3 234 SERIAL PORT SERIAL PORT Submenus Por
253. ical DPI Primary Subset Prop Spacing Extended Subset Italic Print Horizontal DPI Slashed Zero Vertical DPI Left Margin Prop Spacing Right Margin Italic Print Top Margin Slashed Zero Bottom Margin Left Margin 7 Print Char Set Right Margin 2 Define CR code Top Margin Auto LF Bottom Margin Define LF code Print Char Set Control Code 06 Define CR code Compressed Print Auto LF Bold Define LF code Elong Alt Font Control Code 06 Gothic Typeface Control Code 08 EVFU Select Bold Upr Case Select Overstrike Slew Relative Select SFCC Text Position EVFU Select Host Command Alt Set 80 9F Reset Cmd CFG Ld SFCC d command Form Length inches gt 4 PSeries Dbl High Form Length mm gt 4 FF valid at TOF Form Length lines 4 Text Position Form Width inches 35 Host Command Form Width mm gt gt Reset Cmd CFG Ld Form Width char gt SER MATRIX SETUP page 176 Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Character Group Character Set Primary Subset Extended Subset Horizontal DPI Vertical DPI Prop Spacing Italic Print Slashed Zero Left Margin 3 Right Margin 2 Top Margin Bottom Margin Print Char Set Define CR code Auto LF Define LF code Control Code 06 Bold Overstrike Printer Select Alt Set 80 9F ESC d command Text Position Host Command Reset Cmd CFG Ld Form Length inches Form Length mm gt 4 Form Length lines 4 Form Width inches es Form Width mm Form Width char
254. idation error Quiet Zone error Fix application so it sends data in the correct bar code format 1 Fix application 2 Disable Quiet Zone Error reports BUFFER Yes OVERFLOW Host sent data after the printer buffer was full serial interface 1 Make a configuration printout 2 Verify that the printer matches the host serial interface configuration settings for Data Protocol Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Data Terminal Ready and Request to Send 7 Set printer serial interface parameters to match those of the host 311 Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message BUFFER OVERRUN Can User Correct Explanation Receive overrun serial interface Solution Make a configuration printout Verify that the printer matches the host serial interface configuration settings for Data Protocol Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Data Terminal Ready and Request to Send Set the printer serial interface parameter to match those of the host Calibration warning The validator has detected that it needs calibration This is a reminder message and does not halt printing Press the PAUSE key to clear the message Perform the calibration procedure described in the Data Validator User s Manual CALIBRATION FAIL Calibration values derived from Manual Calibrate were n
255. ied number of labels is printed Internal Rewinder The internal rewinder supports Peel Off and Batch Rewind Media Handling modes The printer can be ordered with a rewinder or it can be field installed at a later date by an authorized service representative Media Cutter Tray This option is used exclusively with the media cutter option to collect cut labels or tag stock This option can be field installed by the operator Online Data Validator This option provides the capability for verifying printed barcode quality during the printing process The printer may be ordered with the Online Barcode Validator installed or the option can be field installed by an authorized service representative Real Time Clock RTC The RTC is a clock chip with internal battery The clock keeps track of the year month day hour minute and second values It will continue to operate when the printer is off NOTE To preserve the battery the clock will not run when it leaves the factory it will start running when it is set for the first time Graphic languages can use the RTC values to program fields in labels to indicate the date and or time This is useful for printing production and expiration dates 341 Appendix B _ Hardware Options Interface Options Coax Twinax Host Interface The coax twinax host interface option mounts inside the printer and functions as a protocol converter to allow the direct connection of the printer to a h
256. iers of those products Printronix encourages owners of information technology IT equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed Printronix offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products Information on these product recycling offerings can be found on Printronix s Internet site at http www printronix com Before using this information and the product it supports read the information and Communication Notices on page 381 380 If you are viewing this information softcopy the photographs and color illustrations may not appear For online versions of this book we authorize you to e Copy modify and print the documentation contained on the media for use within your enterprise provided you reproduce the copyright notice all warning statements and other required statements on each copy or partial copy e Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you transfer the related Printronix product which may be either machines you own or programs if the program s license terms permit a transfer You must at the same time destroy all other copies of the documentation You are responsible for payment of any taxes including personal property taxes resulting from this authorization Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization Upon termination you must destroy your machine readable documenta
257. igh reaction temperatures which means that it takes a great deal of heat to make a clear image Resin ribbons and film media may require higher print intensity for a quality image The printer provides two ways to increase the heat e Running the printer slower by changing the print speed via the host or the MEDIA CONTROL menu e Setting the print intensity to a higher value with the Print Intensity function accessed via the host or through the MEDIA CONTROL menu This causes more heat to be transferred into the media thereby generating a darker image Proper printhead pressure adjustment will affect print quality To adjust pressure rotate the printhead pressure adjustment dial see Figure 6 For more information refer to Printhead Pressure Adjustment on page 52 Also the printhead should be cleaned frequently to ensure that foreign material does not accumulate on the printhead and interfere with heat transfer If smears voids or white lines appear in the printed form the printhead should be cleaned with a printhead cleaning pen see Figure 6 The cleaning should be done as a matter of routine whenever you install a new ribbon thermal transfer mode or when you install new media direct thermal mode Printhead Pressure Adjustment Dial VA W Printhead Elements vO Deck Lock Lever Figure 6 Cleaning the Printhead 294 Determining Printhead Wear Determining Printhead Wear The most com
258. imeout Report Switch Out Prime Data Resp Status On Signal Polarity Polarity 10 sec Disable Data Timeout Disable Standard Standard 1 60 sec Enable Session Close Enable Inverted Inverted Busy on Latch Offline Strobe Data On Process Enable Leading Disable Disable Trailing Enable Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when Admin User is enabled in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Available only when E Net Adapter is installed 2 Available only when the Centronics option is enabled in the Port Type submenu of PARALLEL PORT 229 Chapter 3 230 PARALLEL PORT PARALLEL PORT Submenus Port Type This menu item selects the type of printer parallel port interface to be used with the host The options are IEEE 1284 factory default Disable Centronics and Ethernet Data Bit 8 e Enable factory default The PI line is not passed directly from host to printer all 8 bits are used for data bits and characters in the hex 80 FF range can be accessed e Disable When the host PI line is enabled data bit 8 internally indicates PI line status To use the PI line disable data bit 8 and enable the Host PI configuration option under the PI Ignored option NOTE Data bit 8 is interpreted as either data bit 8 or PI signal but never both When enabled as data bit 8 data bit 8 has priority over the Pl signal and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data and not to interpre
259. in Set Code Code Code 06 0 linespaces CR CR Disable LF CR LF 8 0 LPI 0 to 451 linespaces CR CR LF Enable LF LF 10 3 LPI 6 0 LPI Compressed Bold Elong Gothic EVFU Upr Case Print Alt Font Typeface Select Select gt Char 01 SOH Disable Elno BS Font SO Char 02 STX Enable Disable Char 03 ETX Enable Elng SO font BS Char 03 ETX Disable Enable Char 09 HT Char 09 HT Notes 174 Factory Default This menu is available only when you enable Admin User under PRINTER CONTROL 2 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 3 The presence of this menu depends on the LP Emulation selection under PRINTER CONTROL P SER XQ SETUP from page 174 Slew Relative 1 to 15 lines Text Position 1 to 16 lines Top of Line Form Host Command Bottom of Line Enable Disable Ignore All Ignore CPI Current config Ignore LPI Factory config Length 1 2 101 6 or 152 4 mm 8 00 0 to 609 6 mm Form Length Form Width 2 4 24 or 36 lines 3 0 to 144 lines 04 1 06 6 or 08 5 inches 3 00 0 to 13 6 inches Reset Cmd CFG Ld Power up config 00 0 to 24 0 inches 4 or 6 inches 3 Form Width 2 4 104 1 168 0 ir 215 9 mm 3 00 0 to 345 4 mm bl Form Width 4 41 66 or 85 characters 3 0 to 272 characters Notes Factory Default 1 All three Form Length submenus work in conjunct
260. in the Active IGP Emul menu 7 MEDIA CONTROL page 107 CALIBRATE CTRL Print Intensity Print Speed Print Mode Media Handling Paper Feed Shift Label Length Label Width Ver Image Shift Hor Image Shift Orientation Auto Map Select Auto Label Width Num Auto Labels Slew Speed Print Direction Label Wait Time Pre Peel Mode Pre Peel Adjust Lbl Missing Flt Clip Page Error Recover Ribbon Width 3 Display Ribbon 7 Ribbon Low 3 Rbn Takeup Full 3 Units Set Label Length Peel Present Peel Off Mode Continuous Mode TOF Detect Fault Ticket Save Mode TOF Adjust Mode TOF Adjust Ribbon Calibrate Reverse Speed Vertical DPI Adj NOTES page 127 Gap Mark Sensor Auto Calibrate Media Profile Sensed Distance Gap Mark Thresh Paper Out Thresh Paper Out Sensor i Manual Calibrate Pwr Up Action HeadClose Action Online Auto Cal Gap Windowing Gap Length Cal in Peel Mode Min Calib Delta Use Label Length Threshold Range PRINTER CONTROL page 135 SMT Status PAA Select Tool LP Emulation CTHI Emulation Active IGP Emul xxx Diagnostics Host Interface Power Saver Time Pwr Save Control Display Language Alarm Power up State Ptx Setup SFCC Cancel Key Rev Status Port Ret Status Port Compatibility Del Char frm Fls Ld Char from Fls Save Char to Fls Del Char frm RAM Ld Char at PwrUp Del Set frm Fish Ld Set from Flsh Save Set to Flsh Del Set from RAM
261. in the QUICK SETUP menu or the value sent via host software If the printer detects a false PAPER OUT message when you change from Advanced Gap or Advanced Notch to Gap or Mark sensing or vice versa press the PAUSE key and run Auto Calibrate 2 Press to enable the displayed option An asterisk appears next to the selection Press PAUSE until OFFLINE appears on the LCD Review Calibrating the Media Sensors on page 60 Perform the Auto Calibrate procedure on page 60 59 Chapter 2 60 Printing Adjustments Calibrating the Media Sensors Due to manufacturing differences in media and ribbon the media sensors may have difficulty differentiating between the label and the liner or the label and the black mark When this occurs the printer may intermittently skip a label or display a fault message such as GAP NOT DETECTED See Manual or PAPER OUT Load Paper Media sensor sensitivity and reliability can be improved by changing the Gap Mark Threshold and or Paper Out Threshold values You can change these values automatically by performing the Auto Calibrate or Manual Calibrate procedure in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu or change them manually by entering your own Gap Mark Threshold or Paper Out Threshold values The changes take effect immediately within the current configuration menu Auto or Manual Calibrate is completed successfully when the displayed Sensed Distance value correctly matches that of th
262. inax Programmer s Reference Manual Simp Prot Conv Simple Protocol Converter The Simple Protocol Converter SPC option allows those who use add on coax or twinax protocol converters to produce the same output on a Printronix thermal printer with the Coax Twinax CTHI capability as done using anon CT printer with the third party converter interfaces The SPC gives the printer the operational ability to connect to any PC or network system supporting parallel or serial interfaces and to three different IBM host systems e System 3x e AS 400 e 327x Control Units PRINTER CONTROL Submenus The SPC will support the same models as Printronix standard Twinax printers The printer emulations supported by the SPC are Twinax 5225 and Coax 3287 The SPC also provides a range of interfaces available in your thermal printer Centronics serial coax and twinax Also supported are Epson Proprinter XL P Series Serial Matrix VGL and PGL emulations The SPC has the ability to handle multiple print jobs concurrently through coax twinax and parallel and serial interfaces This is accomplished through the Auto Switching feature see Auto Switching on page 281 Because of hardware restrictions coax and twinax cannot be selected together For more information refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual for the Simple Protocol Converter Option The factory default is Standard Host Interface This option allows you to s
263. inches FEED A eip w y 6 inches jo p Bulpes y 0 j jered s ewl y jo p do au y Leading Edge e Landscape Landscape refers to horizontal orientation where the width of a page is greater than its height The top edge of the image is the left edge of the media The following illustration is an example with the operator viewing the front of the printer NOTE Landscape orientation applies to PGL and VGL emulations This is regarded as Inverse Landscape using PPI ZGL lt q 4inches p FEED 6 inches The top edge of he image is parallel to the left edge of the media Leading Edge Inv Portrait Inverse Portrait refers to vertical page orientation where the height of a page is greater than its width The top edge of the image is parallel to the trailing edge of the media The following illustration is an example with the operator viewing the front of the printer NOTE Inverse Portrait orientation applies to PGL and VGL emulations This is regarded as Portrait using PPI ZGL 100 QUICK SETUP Submenus Trailing Edge lt q 4inches _ FEED The top edge of A the image is 4 parallel to the trailing edge of the media 6 inches y Leading Edge e Inv Landscape Inverse Landscape refers to horizontal orientation where the width of a page is greater than its height The top edge of the image is the right edge of the media th
264. inter control panel press and hold down the and 4 keys Without releasing the keys power the printer on Continue holding down the and Jkeys When you see BO1 STATUS on the LCD release the and 4 keys 7 Wait until you see PROGRAM DOWNLOAD on the LCD before proceeding This can take about a minute to appear depending on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer 8 Start a command prompt session The Start Menu icon is usually labeled MS DOS Prompt or Command Prompt 9 Make note of the file name with the dwn extension of each file you want to download to the printer 277 Chapter 4 Downloading TrueType Fonts 10 At the command prompt type copy b filename dwn LPT1 lt Enter gt where filename dwn is file name you noted in step 9 NOTE If you are loading the file using the LPT2 port on the computer type the following command copy b filename dwn LPT2 lt Enter gt where filename dwn is a file you noted in step 9 If you are loading the file using the serial port on the computer type the following commands mode COM1 9600 N 8 1 P lt Enter gt copy b filename dwn COM1 lt Enter gt where filename dwn is a file you noted in step 9 The 9600 baud rate is the only selection some systems can use The baud rate information entered in the above commands must match the Baud Rate setting in the SERIAL PORT menu saved in the Power Up Config You can download the fonts one at a time b
265. inter to print the currently selected character set Printer PI e Disable factory default The LP Emulation is configured with the PI line disabled e Enable The LP Emulation is configured with the PI line enabled Printer Select e Disable factory default Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes e Enable Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received Prop Line Length e Enable factory default The position of the next graphic element will be determined by the physical length of a text string when using a proportional spaced font e Disable The position of the next graphic element will be determined as if the font was monospaced all characters had the same specified width Prop Spacing Each printed character is contained inside a character cell The width of the character cell includes the character and the space around the character e Enable factory default The width of each character cell varies with the width of the character For example i takes less space to print than m Using proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed documents giving text a typeset appearance e Disable Each character cell is printed with the same width Each column in the printed text will line up PSeries Dbl High This menu option allows printing compatibility between the current and older models of Printronix printers e
266. ion When you change the setting in one submenu the values in the other two submenus change automatically 2 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 3 The factory default value depends on the width of the printer model 4 All three Form Width submenus work in conjunction When you change the setting in one submenu the values in the other two submenus change automatically 175 Chapter 3 _SERIALMATRIX SETUP SERIAL MATRIX SETUP SERIAL MATRIX SETUP 3 from page 90 Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Character Character Primary Group Set Subset 10 0 CPI 6 0 LPI Letter Gothic Standard Sets IBM PC ASCII USA 12 0 CPI 8 0 LPI Courier Arabic Sets Multinational French 13 3 CPI 10 3 LPI OCR A Cyrillic Sets EMCA Latin1 German 15 0 CPI OCR B European Sets DEC Mult English 17 1 CPI Greek Sets CP 858 EURO Danish 20 0 CPI Hebrew Sets Swedish Turkish Sets Italian UTF 8 Spanish Japanese See page 191 French Canadian Latin American Norwegian Danish II Spanish II Latin Am II Extended Horizontal Vertical Prop Italic Slashed Subset DPI DPI Spacing Print Zero Code Page 437 120 DPI 72 DPI Enable Disable Disable Code Page 850 60 to 400 DPI 72 to 400 DPI Disable Forward Slant Enable Backward Slant Left Right Top Bottom Pri
267. ion specifies the maximum print width to be used by the application The IGP Auto Label Mapping feature allows backward compatibility of programs written for P5000 line matrix printers using the Printronix PGL graphics language It allows the printer to print two up or other multi up labels Instead of printing multiple labels across the printer it prints the leftmost label and the rightmost label so the printout will be twice as long but half as wide When enabled the printer will automatically reposition the horizontally adjacent labels to a vertically adjacent position or a combination of horizontal and vertical positions based on the values selected under the Auto Label Width and Num Auto Labels menu items When disabled excess data in any program sent to the printer with horizontally adjacent labels that exceed the physical page width of the printer will be clipped or wrapped depending upon the setting of the Autowrap menu option The options are Disable factory default and Enable MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Examples All of the examples below assume that the logical form length is set to the label length Example 1 Simple Case Problem A file has been constructed with two horizontally adjacent 4 labels for a printer with a physical width of 8 The user now wants to use this file with a printer that has a 4 physical width Solution The user sets Auto Label Width to 4 the width of the label configures the N
268. ions 31 Chapter 2 _Loading Media and Ribbon Lower Media Sensor Media Sensor Handle Media Guard Fixed Guide Media Width Guide Media Damper 8 Verify that the left inside edge of the media is against the fixed guide on the bottom of the media damper 9 Push the blue media width guide in until it is flush with the outer edge of the media 10 Check the horizontal position of the lower media sensor located under the media guard and refer to Positioning the Media Sensors on page 54 32 Loading Roll Media f amp s 183390a Visible Red Beam Lower Sensor Upper Sensor Handle Media Guard Opening 11 Slide the upper sensor directly over the lower sensor Media left edge Guide Notch Ca 183391a 12 Align the left inside edge of the media with the guide notch located on the front edge of the tear bar 33 Chapter 2 _Loading Media and Ribbon Pivoting Deck Deck Lock Lever 13 Close the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise This locks the pivoting deck and printhead assembly into the printing position IMPORTANT Ensure the pivoting deck is down and locked before attempting to 34 advance media or print Failure to do so will cause the PRINTHEAD UP fault message to display 14 Verify that Print Mode in the printer configuration menu is set for the media type installed Direct or Transfer The
269. ions but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer NOTE For this menu to take effect in PGL PGL Normal needs to be set to PGL Menu e LF LLF factory default Does not perform an automatic carriage return The next print position will be at the current print character position on the next line e LF CR LF Performs an automatic carriage return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line Define LF code P Series P Series XQ e LF CR LF factory default Forces an automatic carriage return with each Line Feed command received The next print position is position 1 of the next line e LF LF Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a Line Feed command is received The next print position will be the current print position on the next line Emulation Submenus Do FF at TOF Determines whether the printer with media already set at the TOF Top of Form position will advance media to the next TOF position upon receipt of an FF command e Enable factory default The printer will advance media from the present TOF position to the next TOF position upon receipt of an FF command causing a blank form e Disable The printer will not advance media from the present TOF position to the next TOF position upon receipt of an FF command Early Print Cmpl Coax TN3270 Early Print Complete capability allows the printer to send print order complete stat
270. is to see exactly what data is received by the printer in order to debug forms for example When enabled the hexdump mode translates all host interface data to its hexadecimal equivalent then prints the hex code and its printable symbol if one exists Figure 5 shows a partial example of a hex dump After the printer enters hexdump mode all characters it prints including any in the printer s input buffer are printed in two forms as a two symbol hexadecimal code and as the character s printable symbol if it has one A non printable code is printed as a period symbol Up to 16 characters can be printed per line of hexdump printout While the printer is in hexdump mode it does not act upon any control codes other than to print their hexadecimal equivalents The 16 characters printed per line on the hexdump are formatted so that the 16 printable symbols are printed in columns 1 through 16 The 17th column is blank Column 18 contains either a p PI line active or a blank PI not active Columns 19 and 20 contain the hexadecimal code for the first character followed by a blank The PI line condition and hexadecimal code for the second character are printed in columns 22 23 and 24 followed by a blank The third through 16th characters are printed in a similar manner The hexadecimal code for the 16th character is printed in columns 78 79 and 80 NOTE Values will vary based on printhead width IMPORTANT Emulation Submenus
271. isable in the Gap Mark Sensor submenu under CALIBRATE CTRL See Sensing Different Media Types on page 59 Perform an Auto Calibrate See Running Auto Calibrate on page 60 55 Chapter 2 _ Printing Adjustments Sensing Media with Gaps Notches or Holes Gap Upper Sensor Visible Red Beam from Lower Sensor Media Guard Opening Position the lower media sensor for detecting gaps notches or holes in media with a white background If using direct thermal media position the upper sensor away from the lower sensor NOTE The 4 inch SL T5R media guard is divided into three open sensor areas Make sure the media sensor is placed in an open area 1 Position the lower sensor directly under the center of the gap notch or hole 2 Check the position of the lower sensor by looking through the long narrow opening in the media guard Use the visible red light emitting from the lower sensor as a reference pointer 3 Use the sensor handle to manually position the sensor to the center of the gap notch or hole in the media 4 Select Gap in the Gap Mark Sensor submenu under the CALIBRATE CTRL menu See Sensing Different Media Types on page 59 5 Perform an Auto Calibrate See Running Auto Calibrate on page 60 56 Positioning the Media Sensors Sensing Media with Dark Background Labels with Gaps Advanced Gap Upper Sensor Visible Red Beam Lower Sensor eOLVESL Upper Sens
272. ists contact your authorized customer service representative 22 INVALID ADDR Yes Invalid Address poll Have the system administrator time out on the twinax interface indicating the unit address is not recognized by printer make sure the printer address is correct 309 Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message Cae Explanation Solution 27 CU TIMED OUT Yes Controller Unit Timed Check the cable connection Out the printer was not and host system Refer to the enabled for one minute line problem determination or more on a coax procedures as recommended interface by the host system 28 CU NOT ENAB Yes Controller Unit Not Check the cable connection Enabled Poll time out and host system Refer to the error The printer was line problem determination not polled for one procedures as recommended minute across a coax by the host system interface 33 HEAD OPEN Yes Status message in the Close and latch the printhead TIMEOUT CT emulation The Press PAUSE to put the printer printer was offline more online than 10 minutes and the Intervention Required parameter is set to Send to Host 40V POWER FAIL Yes 40 VDC an internal Power off the printer for 15 power failure seconds then power back on If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative 203 DPI He
273. ity by selecting the Diagnostics Printer Tests menu and printing one of the test patterns Refer to DIAGNOSTICS on page 225 To save the configuration parameters refer to Saving a Configuration on page 76 Removing the Media Cutter 1 Set the printer power to O OFF Pull the cutter assembly to the down open position Using the appropriate metric hex key remove the two screws securing the cutter bracket to the lower support assembly Unplug the RJ 11 connector from the RJ 11 receptacle Remove the media cutter from the printer Install the front door assembly on the printer lower support assembly 353 Appendix D _ Removing the Media Cutter 354 E Media Cutter Tray Installation Assembling the Media Cutter Tray Slots eal Flanges 4 Cutter Tray Bin Oo uw N S a Cutter Tray Base Figure 1 Attaching the Cutter Tray Bin to the Cutter Tray Base 1 Align the flanges of the cutter tray bin with the slots in the cutter tray base 2 Push the flanges into the slots then push the cutter tray bin downward to secure it 3 Attach the cutter tray bin in a position so that the labels will not interfere with cutter operation For longer labels attach the cutter tray bin toa lower position for shorter labels attach it to a higher position 355 Appendix E _ Installing the Media Cutter Tray Installing the Media Cutter Tray 183426a Base Pan
274. ivoting deck and lock the deck lock lever Position the printhead pressure adjustment dial to the desired head pressure setting Print is too small or too large Ensure the proper printhead is installed 203 or 300 dpi 306 Solving other Printer Problems Table 17 Printer Problems and Solutions continued Symptom Solution Explanation e Print quality is good but the printer skips every other label e An occasional blank label occurs within a print job but no labels are lost Make sure that the label is not formatted too close to the top edge of the form Leave white space equal to eight dot rows at the top of the label 300 dpi 0264 inches 203 dpi 04 inches Check that Clip Page Enable in the MEDIA CONTROL menu Clip Page Enable causes any printable data to be clipped off and lost once the next TOF position transmissive gap notch hole or reflective mark is detected Clip Page Disable allows the printer to ignore a gap or mark The printer looks for the gap or mark after the specified Label Length is first reached RIBBON Printer advances media but the ribbon does not advance Make sure the ribbon is installed correctly A poor ribbon media combination can cause insufficient friction between the media and ribbon Verify that the correct ribbon and media are being used The printhead pressure may not be set high enough Set the pressure higher There may be
275. ization and routing continues displaying this message when the CT emulation is installed the expansion CT board may not be connected to the controller PCBA Unscannable Yes Data validation error Check the paper and ribbon for xx Missing Codes missing barcode cleanliness wrinkles etc or an obstructed validator beam If there is no validator beam at all or if the LED is not flashing as barcodes pass through the validator beam recycle validator power If the problem persists contact your service representative NOTE xx represents the number of missing barcodes on the form that caused the warning fault to be declared 330 Fault Messages Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution Validator not Yes The Validator Funct Check that the validator signal communicating Enable in the cable is securely connected to VALIDATOR menu but the validator unit when the printer was first powered up it could not communicate with the validator WAITING FOR Normal message when Complete the downloading PROGRAM the printer is powered software procedure See DOWNLOAD up while holding down Downloading Software both the MENU key on page 265 and the DOWN arrow key in preparation to download software to the printer Exit this procedure by cycling printer power WIRELESS The type of wireless The PCMCIA radio ca
276. king 292 Software downloading 265 Solving printer problems 300 SPC 150 SPC Char Set option 218 SPC COAX SETUP menu 158 SPC Null Supp option 218 SPC TWINAX SETUP menu 159 SPC Type option SPC Coax Setup 219 SPC Type option SPC Twinax Setup 219 Specifications 333 acoustic noise levels 339 cutter 337 environmental information 339 host interface 338 indicators and switches 336 media 334 media dimensions 335 memory 336 physical dimensions 339 power 338 power consumption 338 printer model 11 printing 333 ribbon 336 Specifying a power up configuration 78 Speed Exceeds Validator Limit fault message 330 SSID Name option 254 Standard C T Interface 150 Standard Chars option 147 Standard features 12 Standard host interfaces 281 Standard Sets option 219 Status and Display Indicators matrix 24 Status indicators 24 Status Port Numb option 262 Stop Bits option 234 Subnet Mask option 245 250 Summary CONFIG command 367 Supplies Department 371 Supported RFID Tag Types 359 Switch Out On option 231 243 T Tag Types RFID 359 Tall Characters option 147 Tckt Life SEC option 259 Tckt Life Units option 258 Tear Off strip media handling 27 Tear Off media handling 27 Technical support 371 Test Count option 226 Test labels printing 291 TESTING HARDWARE PLEASE WAIT fault message 330 Text Length option 219 Text Position option 219 Thermal consumables 16 Thermal printer series
277. kish Danish Norwegian Swedish Win CP 1254 Swedish Finnish Italian Code Page 857 Italian English Spanish Spanish Dutch Japanese Japanese French French Canadian French Canadian Spanish Dutch CP 858 Latin American Italian Finnish EURO Norwegian Turkish Swiss Danish II Japanese Spanish II Extended Subset Latin Am Il Multinational Extended Subset Barcode 10 cpi Code Page 437 Mult DP 10 cpi Notes Code Page 850 a ie ai Factory Default To access the desired basic character set use the and keys To select the set press the key After you have selected the basic set access the subset selection menu by pressing the key Once in the subset menu access the desired subset by pressing the and keys and select it by pressing the key Primary and extended character subsets are accessed and selected in the same manner 191 Chapter 3 192 EPSON FX SETUP Character Group and Character Sets Proprinter XL From page 178 This menu item selects the character set used by the printer The available character sets are shown below Character Group Proprinter XL Factory Default To access the desired basic character set use the and keys To select the set press the J key After you have selected the basic set access the subset selection menu by pressing the 4 key Once in the subset menu a
278. l 22 Online and Buffer Full 23 Offline and Buffer Not Full 20 Offline and Buffer Full 21 The Poll Character is removed from the data stream If the Data Protocol is setto ETX ACK ACK NAK or Series1 One Char Enquiry is automatically disabled The options are Disable factory default and Enable Printer Status e Disable factory default Printer status ignored e ENQ STX see Table 9 e ENQ see Table 10 When enabled the printer will respond to an ENQ character by sending a status byte to the host The type of status byte is determined by a Front Panel Menu selection The selections allowed are ENQ STX and ENQ The ENQ is removed from the data stream Table 9 ENQ STX Status Byte Printer Status Set when the printer is not online or the buffer is full Set when the printer is offline Clear during a paper out or RibbonMinder fault Always set Set during a Head Open fault Set during a buffer overflow fault Set during a parity or framing error fault Always clear 239 Chapter 3 240 SERIAL PORT Table 10 ENQ Status Byte Bit Printer Status Set when the label has printed Set when the label is presented Set while the printer is online Always set Set printing in the batch mode Set during a Ribbon fault Set during a Paper Out fault 7 Set during a Head Open fault Framing Errors These are possible errors that
279. l wrap to the next line when the line of text exceeds the right margin e Disable factory default Truncates the text beyond the right margin until a CR or CR LF is received e Enable Automatically inserts a CR LF after a full print line Barcode var This command only applies for IBARC barcode command format e Low Resolution factory default Sets barcode ratio dot values to be interpreted as line matrix printer dots 60 x72 e High Resolution Sets barcode ratio dot values to be interpreted as print engine dots 300 x 300 or 203 x 203 185 Chapter 3 186 EPSON FX SETUP Bold e Disable factory default Text is printed normally e Enable Textis printed with a heavy line thickness Bottom Margin Defined in linespaces starting from line zero at the bottom of the page and incrementing from the bottom up The range is 0 451 linespaces and the factory default is 0 linespaces Boundary Check This option turns on or off the page boundary check for all print elements e Enable factory default When enabled an out of bound error is reported if the print element is out of the page boundary e Disabled When disabled no out of bound error is reported The out of bound print element prints over the page boundary Btm Margin Ctl Determines the page s bottom margin If this option is set to VGL Text Length then text length changes the bottom margin value in the LP Emulation submenu as follows bott
280. le Disable 0 characters 72 to 400 DPI Disable Forward Slant Enable 0 to 369 characters Backward Slant g Right Top Bottom Print Char Define CR p Margin Margin Margin Set Code 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces CR CR 0 to 369 characters 0 to 451 linespaces 0 to 451 linespaces CR CR LF 1 These menus are available only when you enable Admin User under PRINTER CONTROL 2 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 3 The presence of this menu depends on the LP Emulation selection under PRINTER CONTROL PROPRINTER XL SETUP from page 178 Auto LF Define LF 20 CPI Bold FF valid at Alt Char Code Condensed TOF Set Enable LF LF Enable Disable Enable Set 1 Disable LF CR LF Disable Enable Disable Set 2 Test Host Reset Cmd Form Form Position Command CFG Ld Length Length Bottom of Line Enable Disable 4 or 6 inches 101 6 or 152 4 mm Top of Line Ignore All Power up config 00 0 to 24 0 inches 00 0 to 609 6 mm Ignore CPI Current config Ignore LPI Factory config Form Form Form Form Length Width 4 Width 4 Width 24 or 36 lines 0 to 144 lines 04 1 06 6 or 08 5 inches 104 1 168 0 or 215 9 mm 41 66 or 85 characters 00 0 345 4 mm 00 0 13 6 inches Notes Factory Def
281. le in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Maximum value depends on the width of the printer model and printhead 2 You can change the unit value from inches to millimeters under Units in MEDIA CONTROL when Admin User is enabled 3 Based on the current value setting for Label Length in MEDIA CONTROL up to a maximum of 12 80 inches 4 Maximum value depends on the width of the printer model see Appendix A Specifications 5 Maximum value depends on model width and size of DRAM installed see Appendix A Specifications This menu will not appear on Direct Thermal only printers 7 Resolution changes based on Label Resolution menu under MEDIA CONTROL if Small Label Printer option is installed 107 Chapter 3 MEDIA CONTROL from page 107 MEDIA CONTROL Peel Off Continuous TOF Detect Ticket Save TOF Adjust Mode Mode Fault Mode Mode Fast Standard 3 Labels Disable Disable Standard Tear Off 9 Labels Enable Enable Tear Strip Full 1 Label Cut Strip TOF Adjust Ribbon Reverse Vertical DPI Calibrate Speed Adj 0 00 to 0 40 inches Standard 2 ips 203 4 Forward Only 1 to 6 ips 195 to 210 300 290 to 310 Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 The Peel Off option under Media Handling must be enabled for this menu to func
282. le 0 to 255 Enable 0 to 255 Disable Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 168 PGL SETUP from page 168 IGP100 Expanded Scalable Forms PGL UPC Compatbl Font Size Handling Normal Descenders Disable Scalable Normal Disable LP Menu Always Enable Block Block Auto Eject PGL Menu Never Alt Block 1 Auto TOF Only with PDF 1 2 5 C39 User Def Lead Trunc Dyn Selection Compatbl Ratio PDF Dist Data Leading Zero Disable Enable 0 10 inches Disable Trailing Space Enable Disable 0 01 to 0 10 inches Enable X2 DPD Modulo 7 CD Boundary Repeat Form Preparser Check Opt Port Enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Enable Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 169 Chapter 3 VGL SETUP VGL SETUP VGL SETUP from page 88 Select Power up X Power up F Power up PY LPI Btm SFCC Margin Ctl 94 Disable Disable Disable 6 LP Menu 17 to 255 Enable Ena
283. lf a byte over four status lines Half a byte equals one nibble Two sequential four bit nibbles are sent over the lines Data is transferred from printer to host in four bit nibbles over the status lines and the host controls the transmission Byte Mode The printer and host send data to each other along eight data lines one bit per line If bidirectional communication is supported by the printer and the host the host will take control of the data transfer Signals Signals Table 14 lists each of the signals associated with the corresponding pins on the IEEE 1284 interface Descriptions of the signals follow Table 14 IEEE 1284 Signals Type of Mode Pin Source of Data Compatible Nibble Byte 1 Host nStrobe HostClk Host Clk 2 Host Printer Data 1 LSB 3 Host Printer Data 2 Host Printer Data 3 5 Host Printer Data 4 6 Host Printer Data 5 7 Host Printer Data 6 Host Printer Data 7 Host Printer Data 8 MSB 10 Printer nAck PtrClk PtrClk 11 Printer Busy PtrBusy PtrBusy 12 Printer PError AckDataReq AckDataReq 13 Printer Select Xflag Xflag Host nAutoFd Host Busy HostAck Not Defined Logic Grid Chassis Grid 18 Printer Peripheral Logic High Signal Ground nStrobe 20 Signal Ground Data 1 21 Signal Ground Data 2 22 Signal Ground Data 3 23 Signal Ground Data 4 24 Signal Ground Data 5 25 Signal Ground Data 6 285 Chapter
284. long labels so actual gaps notches and marks can be detected and reduce the amount of media advanced for short labels If you try to do an Auto Calibrate when Peel Off Media Handling is enabled the LCD will display CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel Off Before you can do an Auto Calibrate you must select another media handling mode PO NM Running Auto Calibrate Press the PAUSE key until OFFLINE appears on the LCD Press 4 and together until ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED displays Press the TEST PRINT key until Printer Tests Auto Calibrate displays Press A Media advances until it can accurately detect the label length indicators and then stops at the Top of Form position The Sensed Distance value will then display for one second Auto Calibrate is successful when the Sensed Distance value correctly matches that of the installed media e Gap Mark Sensor Gap Advanced Gap or Advanced Notch The Sensed Distance value is the physical length of one label plus the length of one gap notch or hole e Gap Mark Sensor Mark The Sensed Distance value is the physical distance from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next e Gap Mark Sensor Disable Not applicable If Gap Mark Sensor is set to Disable the Sensed Distance value will not be updated If GAP NOT DETECTED displays run Auto Calibrate again If Auto Calibrate continues to end with an incorrect Sensed Distance valu
285. lt PNE Port Mgmt PNE Port PNE Port Status Port Mgmt Port Protocol Number Timeout Numb Number Ethernet UCP 3001 100 Seconds 3002 3007 USB PXML 1023 65535 1 255 Seconds 1023 65535 1023 65535 Disable Serial PRINTER MGMT Submenus PNE Port 262 This menu selects which port the printer expects PNE to connect to via ethernet USB or serial The factory default is Ethernet Mgmt Protocol Since PXML and UCP management protocols share the same ethernet port only one can be active at a time This menu selects the active Management Protocol Interface either PXML or UCP The factory default is PXML PNE Port Number This menu selects the port number the printer expects PNE to connect through The factory default is 3001 and the range is from 1023 to 65535 PNE Port Timeout If PNE has not communicated to the printer within a timeout period the PNE session closes The factory default is 100 seconds The range is from 1 to 255 seconds Status Port Numb This menu selects the port number the printer sends the emulation status The factory default is 3002 and the range is from 1023 to 65535 Mgmt Port Number This menu selects the port number the printer expects the PXML or UCP to connect through The factory default is 3007 and the range is from 1023 to 65535 Date Submenus DATE DATE 1 2 from page 94 Hour Minute Year Month Day 00
286. lthough gaps holes notches or black marks are used to establish the Top of Form position a larger page length will override the gap and skip a page or more if Clip Page in the MEDIA CONTROL menu is set to Disable Set Page Length to match the media being used Check that the printer is optimized to detect the type of media installed Perform Auto Calibrate for gapped and black mark media See Running Auto Calibrate on page 60 Adjust the media sensor horizontally to detect gaps holes notches or narrow width black marks See Positioning the Media Sensors on page 54 If the problem persists run the Media Profile printout to see if the label length indicators are being sensed Run Manual Calibrate See Running Manual Calibrate on page 66 305 Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors Table 17 Printer Problems and Solutions continued Symptom Solution Explanation Label wraps around the platen roller Open the pivoting deck by rotating the blue deck lock lever clockwise and then open the front door and loosen the two thumbscrews for better platen access Remove the wrapped label by slowly pulling and unwrapping it from the platen NOTE Even though power is removed from the platen motor some drag will be felt as the platen rotates CAUTION Never use a sharp object against the platen as cuts and gouges in the platen may cause voids in the printed image
287. luded as files on a CD that comes with the printer You will copy the appropriate file from the CD to a computer s hard disk then download the file from the computer into printer memory When downloading emulation and operating system software to the printer all other optional fonts customer supplied logos setup files feature files and TIFF files will be erased You will then need to reload those files Before starting a download procedure be sure that you have all the necessary files on hand You can download software through the serial parallel USB or ethernet port of the printer and you can do it four ways e You can download software through any printer port except USB by using the Firmware Download Utility included on the CD that comes with the printer See page 266 e You can use a command prompt session to download software through the parallel port See page 267 e You can use a command prompt session to download software through the ethernet port See page 270 e You can use a command prompt session to download software through the USB port See page 272 265 Chapter 4 Downloading Software with the Firmware Download Utility Downloading Software with the Firmware Download Utility The Firmware Download Utility FDU allows you to download program files into the printer with an easy to use graphical interface The FDU is a utility program included on the CD that comes with the printer It can be used
288. ly recommended that all PTX_SETUP commands be placed between print jobs rather than attempting to imbed them within jobs PTX_SETUP commands have the following format SFCC PTX_SETUP Command Sub Command Value PTX_END For example if the SFCC assigned to PTX_SETUP is the default value of the exclamation mark hex 21 and you wanted to load configuration number 4 and capture all incoming data to a file named BIN you would use the following command IPTX_SETUP CONFIG LOAD 4 FILE_IO CAPTURE BIN PTX_END Table 32 lists all the command sub command and parameter combinations and gives a brief description of the command This section documents the existence of PTX_SETUP commands which work across all platforms The following sections document commands which are specific to thermal NOTE When a file system error occurs a message will be displayed on the front panel indicating the error and the action needed to take to correct the error General Commands Table 32 General PTX_SETUP Commands Command Sub Command Parameter Description CONFIG LOAD Cfg Cfg can be 0 8 The PTX_SETUP will load configuration Cfg If configuration Cfg was not previously saved the operator panel will display an error message and the current configuration will be kept Cfg must be 1 8 This command will save the current configuration as configuration Cfg If Cfg is notin the range of 1 8 the command is ignored
289. m its host will begin to service all other host ports looking for data to print The range is from 1 to 60 seconds and the factory default is 10 seconds Switch Out On e Data Timeout factory default Allows Autoswitching when no data has been received for the selected Time Out period e Session Close Allows Autoswitching only when the Network Socket is closed 243 Chapter 3 ETHERNET ADDRESS ETHERNET ADDRESS ETHERNET ADDRESS from page 92 IP Address IP Address IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Subnet Mask SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEGA SEG1 SEG2 000 000 000 000 000 000 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Subnet Mask Subnet Mask Gateway Gateway Gateway SEG3 SEG4 Address SEG1 Address SEG2 Address SEG3 000 000 000 000 000 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Gateway MAC Address DHCP a BootP Address SEG4 000 XXXXXXXXXXXX Disable Disable 0 255 Enable Enable Notes 244 Factory Default 1 You cannot change this value it is a display only item ETHERNET ADDRESS Submenus ETHERNET ADDRESS Submenus IP Address This item allows you to set the IP Address for the TCP IP protocol in four three digit segments SEG1 through SEGA If the IP Address is assigned by BootP ARP or DHCP it is dynamic and read only The factory defaults f
290. m throughput 333 Appendix A Media Table 20 Media General Information Type Roll fed die cut continuous or fanfold labels tags or tickets most direct thermal or thermal transfer materials Supply Roll 8 inch 203 mm maximum diameter on 1 5 inch 37 5 mm to 3 inch 76 mm diameter cores Internal Rewinder Accepts up to a 5 inch diameter roll of label backing Label Material Thermal transfer plain coated papers vinyl Mylar metallized paper non woven fabric fine woven fabric thermal visible light scannable paper infrared scannable paper thermal ticket tag stock thermally sensitive plastic stock Media Sensing Horizontally moveable sensor assembly When set to Mark it senses a black mark on the underside of tag or label stock When set to Advanced Gap it detects die cut labels on liner media and notches and holes in tag stock When set to Advanced Notch it detects notches or holes that interrupt a dark or black area on the underside of the media When set to Disable it senses no label indicators or ignores all existing label length indicators on the installed media Gap is an alternative to Advanced Gap Label Taken Sensor Detects when a printed label is at the printer exit throat Used only for Tear Off and Peel Off Media Handling modes Automatic Label Peel Off Peels and presents label to the operator one at a time Automatic Label Peel Off is supporte
291. maximum of 12 80 inches in 01 inch increments The factory default value is 0 00 inches 111 Chapter 3 112 MEDIA CONTROL Hor Image Shift This option specifies the amount to shift an image horizontally left or right for precise positioning on the label The actual width of the image is not affected by this parameter The allowable range is 1 00 through 1 00 inches in 01 inch increments The factory default value is 0 00 inches Orientation This menu item selects the image orientation to be used when printing the label e Portrait factory default Portrait refers to vertical page orientation where the height of a page is greater than its width The top edge of the image is parallel to the leading edge of the media The following illustration is an example with the operator viewing the front of the printer NOTE Portrait orientation applies to PGL and VGL emulations This is regarded as Inverse Portrait using PPI ZGL lt q 4inches A FEED eipaw au jo bp Buipes y 0 ja esed s ew y jo p do y Leading Edge 6 inches MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Landscape Landscape refers to horizontal orientation where the width of a page is greater than its height The top edge of the image is the left edge of the media The following illustration is an example with the operator viewing the front of the printer NOTE Landscape orientation applies to PGL
292. me Name Name Config 1 Config 2 Config 4 Config 5 Config 6 1 o 3 4 5 6 Name Name Reset Auto Save Config 7 Config 8 Cfg Names Lf 8 1 Enable 1to8 Disable All Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 This menu allows a 15 character string CONFIG CONTROL Submenus CONFIG CONTROL Submenus Save Config This option allows you to save up to eight unique configurations to meet different print job requirements This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings for each new job The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost if you turn off the printer If the Protect Configs parameter is enabled the new configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted first The factory default configuration cannot be changed See Saving a Configuration on page 76 for details The factory default is 1 Load Config The printer can store up to eight configurations in memory This parameter allows you to select and load a specific configuration The factory default is Factory Print Config This option is used to print a listing of various stored printer configurations We recommend you store printouts of your configurations in a safe place for quick referral The options are Current factory default Factory Power Up All and 1 to 8 Delete Config You
293. mer IP Address SEG4 Ethernet Speed Subnet Mask SEG1 Job Control Subnet Mask SEG2 Offline Process Subnet Mask SEG3 Subnet Mask SEG4 Gateway Address SEG1 Gateway Address SEG2 Gateway Address SEG3 Gateway Address SEG4 MAC Address DHCP BootP NOTES 1 Appears only if a Wireless Option is installed 2 Appears only if WEP Key 1 Width is set to 128 Bits 3 Appears only if WEP Key 2 Width is set to 128 Bits ai Appears only if WEP Key 3 Width is set to 128 Bits 5 Appears only if WEP Key 4 Width is set to 128 Bits WLAN PARAMS page 251 Signal Strength Operation Mode SSID Name 01 15 SSID Name 16 30 SSID Name 31 32 Reset SSID Name Min Xfer Rate Channel 7 Antenna Ant Diversity 7 Preamble Power Mgmt Transmit Power Internat Mode Default WEP Key WEP Key 1 Format WEP Key 1 Width WEP Key 1 BYTE1 WEP Key 1 BYTE2 WEP Key 1 BYTES WEP Key 1 BYTE4 WEP Key 1 BYTES WEP Key 1 BYTEE WEP Key 1 BYTE7 2 WEP Key 1 BYTES 2 WEP Key 1 BYTE9 2 WEP Key 1 BYTE10 2 WEP Key 1 BYTE11 2 WEP Key 1 BYTE12 2 WEP Key 1 BYTE13 2 WEP Key 2 Format WEP Key 2 Width continued in next column 6 Appears only if a Symbol LA 5127 802 11 b g RF card is installed 7 Appears only if 802 11b only RF card is installed 8 Appears only if the IPDS emulation is installed the correct security key is used p WEP Key 2 BYTE1 WEP Key 2 BYTE2 WEP Key 2 BYTE3 WEP Key 2
294. message reappears replace the controller PCBA Write down the message and return it with the defective board 320 Fault Messages Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message ratte Explanation Solution LABEL MISSING Yes The Label Taken Press the PAUSE key to Check Paper Path Sensor did not detect the label present over the tear bar with Tear Off or Peel Off Media Handling mode enabled e The label was removed before the printer stopped printing or before the LCD Remove Label message displayed e The label slipped behind the platen roller e The label wrapped around the platen roller e Tear Off or Peel Off Media Handling mode was mistakenly selected continue printing and then wait for the LCD Remove Label message before removing the label Open the pivoting deck reinstall the label close the deck press the PAUSE key and continue printing Open the pivoting deck and remove wrapped labels from the platen Clean all adhesive from the platen Reinstall labels close the deck press the PAUSE key and continue printing Select the correct Media Handling mode in the QUICK SETUP menu 321 Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution LABEL WRAP Open Yes Tear Off Strip Media 1 Open t
295. mon signs of a worn printhead are fixed vertical streaks that are always the same size and in the same place on the printout To determine if vertical streaks are caused by a worn printhead follow these methods 1 Clean the printhead thoroughly with the printhead cleaning pen Test again for vertical streaks 2 Remove the printhead see page 296 and examine it for contamination or damage such as scratches dents or other marks on the light brown area containing the heating elements Clean and install it then test again for vertical streaks 3 Load an alternate roll of media Test again for vertical streaks 4 Load an alternate roll of ribbon Test again for vertical streaks If after performing all these tests you still see fixed vertical streaks you must replace the printhead 295 Chapter_ 6 _ Replacing the Printhead Replacing the Printhead 1 Set the printer power switch to O Off WARNING Always unplug the printer power cord from the printer or power outlet before doing any installation procedure Failure to remove power could result in injury to you and damage the equipment When applicable you will be instructed to apply power 2 Unplug the printer power cord from the printer or the AC power source 3 Remove the ribbon and media e g paper label or tag stock material SX Printhead Assembly gt Ae i Ves b i A J 7 z AN SS fj Deck Lock Lever Figure 7 Opening the
296. more details xxx Diagnostics See page 140 for more details Save Config This option allows you to save up to eight unique configurations to meet different print job requirements This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings for each new job The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost if you turn off the printer If the Protect Configs parameter is enabled the new configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted first The factory default configuration cannot be changed See Saving a Configuration on page 76 for details The factory default is 1 Power Up Config You can specify any one of nine configurations 1 8 saved custom configurations or Factory as the power up configuration The factory default is Factory SMT Status You can enable or disable SMT functionality PAA Select Tool You can set the PAA Select Tool to None factory default CST 1 or CST 2 Refer to the PrintNet Enterprise Suite User s Manual 103 Chapter 3 CONFIG CONTROL CONFIG CONTROL 104 CONFIG CONTROL from page 84 Save Load Print Delete Power Up Protect Config Config Config Config Config Configs 1 Factory Current All Factory Disable 1to8 1to8 Factory 1to8 1to8 Enable Power Up All 1to8 i Name Name _ Na
297. ms width e Enable Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width Auto LF Serial Matrix Proprinter XL Epson FX This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting e Enable factory default Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width e Disable Discards any data past the forms width Emulation Submenus Auto Skip at End Specifies whether to perform an automatic form feed at the end of a print buffer If form feed is the last character in the print order the form feed function is supplied by the Auto Skip At End option e Off factory default Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the next line e On Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first line of the next form Auto Uppercase This parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase when using the ALPHA command e Disable factory default The printer will print text in upper and lowercase Enable The printer will print text in uppercase only Autoeject VGL Determines paper handling upon exiting the VGL Repeated Form and Dynamic Form commands e Disable factory default Holds the print position at the bottom of the form e Enable Issues a form feed after the last form is printed so all pages will be physically printed Autowrap This parameter determines if text wil
298. munication without an Access Point The two peers can be from different manufacturers 253 Chapter 3 _WLANPARAMS 254 SSID Name A 1 32 character case sensitive string that identifies the Extended Service Set Identification ESS_ID network the unit is part of ESS_ID is also called NET_ID These characters can be alphanumeric symbols or spaces Reset SSID Name Allows you to reset the SSID name Min Xfer Rate Allows you to set the minimum speed at which the Wireless Option will accept a connection in millions bits per second The options are Auto negotiate 1Mb sec 2Mb sec 5 5Mb sec and 11Mb sec When a Symbol LA 5127 card is installed the options are extended to 6 Mb sec 9 Mb sec 12 Mb sec 18 Mb sec 24 Mb sec 36 Mb sec 48 Mb sec and 54 Mb sec The factory default is Auto negotiate Channel Allows you to select the RF channel The options are Default factory default and 1 15 Ant Diversity 802 11b only or Antenna 802 11b g The RF antenna to use e Diverse factory default Select when you want to use the antenna with the best reception 802 11b only e Primary Select when you want to use the Primary antenna on the RF card 802 11b and 802 11 b g Default setting for 802 1 1b g e Auxiliary Select when you want to use the Auxiliary antenna on the RF card 802 11b and 802 11 b g Preamble The length of the preamble in transmit packets e Default factory default The Wirele
299. n 1 of the first line on the next form 199 Chapter 3 200 EPSON FX SETUP FF valid at TOF The FF valid at TOF option determines whether the printer will perform a Form Feed when the host sends a Form Feed command if the printer is at the top of form e Enable factory default Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form e Disable Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form FF Validity Determines if the position of a Form Feed FF command affects its execution e Off factory default Performs a form feed only if it occurs at the first print position in a line or at Maximum Print Position 1 An FF command at any other position is recognized as a blank e On Allows the printer to perform an FF command anywhere in the data stream Form Length in Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a label You can set forms length in inches The factory default is shown in Table 3 on page 111 Form Length lines Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a label You can set forms length as a function of the current LPI lines per inch The factory default is shown in Table 3 on page 111 Form Length mm Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a label You can set forms length in millimeters The factory default is shown in Table 3 on page 111
300. nable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 4 The presence of this menu depends on the LP Emulation selection under PRINTER CONTROL 5 These menus do not display when CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 6 All three Form Length submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default value in the other two submenus change automatically 7 All three Form Width submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default value in the other two submenus change automatically 8 Menu shown only if Host Interface is set to Auto Switching 91 Chapter 3 _MainMenu C T PORT USB PORT ETHERNET ETHERNET PORT 2 ADDRESS page 241 page 242 page 243 page 244 Port T IP Address SEG1 ort Type Buffer Size in K Timeout IP Address SEG2 Device Address Timeout Switch Out On IP Address SEG3 Timeout IP Address SEG4 Report Status Subnet Mask SEG1 Subnet Mask SEG2 Subnet Mask SEG3 Subnet Mask SEG4 Gateway Address SEG1 Gateway Address SEG2 Gateway Address SEG3 Gateway Address SEG4 MAC Address DHCP BootP NOTES 1 Appears only if CTHI option is installed Menu shown only if Host Interface is set to Auto Switching 92 ETHERNET PARAMS page 246 WLAN ADDRESS page 249 NetBIOS Protocol IP Address SEG1 ASCII Data Port IP Address SEG2 IPDS Data Port IP Address SEG3 Keep Alive Ti
301. nce in the new position after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed Gothic Typeface Controls which host command sets Gothic printing e Char 02 STX factory default e Char 03 ETX e Char 09 HT 201 Chapter 3 202 EPSON FX SETUP Graphic Chek Cod Specifies the replacement character to print in place of any unprintable character that is received from the host Choose a hex character from 40 through FE The character becomes the printer default when e The printer is powered off and then powered on e An SGEA command specifies to use the operator panel default e The Graphic Chek Err parameter is disabled The range is 40 through F4 and the factory default is 60 Graphic Chek Err Allows overriding of the host setting for the SGEA Set Graphic Error Action command For more information about the SGEA commana refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual e Enable factory default The host setting for the SGEA used by the printer If the SGEA command is requested to stop on graphic errors the printer will stop when a graphic error is detected e Disable Ignores the SGEA command from the host The printer does not stop when an error is detected instead it substitutes the character selected in the Graphic Chek Code parameter Hexdump Mode Hexdump mode allows you to place the printer into the hex dump mode in which the printer outputs a hexadecimal data stream The purpose of hexdump mode
302. nce the printer was turned on or since the last data reset Once you have selected the desired test pattern press to start printing If the Test Count option below is set to Continuous factory default press again to stop printing Test Count This item selects the number of times the selected test pattern will be printed The options are Continuous factory default 1 Page 2 Pages 5 Pages and 10 Pages DIAGNOSTICS Submenus Software Build This is the reference number which includes the program file part number and revision number of the software installed in the printer e g 358186 V1 07G Feature File Displays the part number only when a feature file has been installed Hex Dump Mode e Disable factory default Enable The printer prints out data sent from the host in hexadecimal format Also see page 202 Auto Dump e Disable factory default Enable When the printer displays an E03x type message on the control panel a dump file is automatically created and stored in flash as autodbg1 dbg or autodbg2 dbg in the printer file system This file can be uploaded to the host using the PrintNet Enterprise Suite application Upon receipt of this file it should be sent to the Printronix Customer Support Center for review and evaluation Print Error Log Prints the current log of errors Most non routine faults RIBBON FAULT PRINT HEAD HOT are stored in the error log Clear Error Log
303. nd isolation of a printer malfunction or mistake Media coated with special chemicals that act as an accelerator acceptor dye and binder In Direct Thermal mode the heat from the selected rectangular elements in the thermal printhead makes direct contact with the media no ribbon is used and causes a chemical reaction that creates the image on the media A printing method in which no ribbon is used to transfer data from the printhead to the media to create an image The thermal printhead selectively heats small rectangular elements which make direct contact with the coated media Dynamic Random Access Memory Can be read from or written to at any time DRAM is volatile whatever is in DRAM is lost when power is turned off Media supplied in a fanfold stack instead of a roll format Printer configurations programs downloaded files and fonts are stored in Flash Memory Data in Flash are not lost when power is turned off Resident fonts are fonts permanently stored in Flash and availalbe at any time via software commands A collection of printing characteristics for printing alphanumeric characters all of which combine to produce a distinctive style of print The computer that stores processes and sends data to be printed which communicates directly with the printer The term host is used to indicate the controlling computer since modern printers are themselves microprocessor controlled computer systems The
304. nd ribbon type to obtain the best possible print quality and barcode grades The range is from 15 to 15 The factory default is 3 Print Speed This option specifies the speed in inches per second ips at which the media passes through the printer while printing The range is from 1 to 10 ips in increments of 1 ips The factory default is 6 ips NOTE The maximum print speed varies based on maximum printer width and dot per inch dpi resolution of the printhead installed 203 or 300 dpi See Table 19 on page 333 QUICK SETUP Submenus Print Mode This option specifies the type of printing to be done e Transfer factory default Indicates Thermal Transfer printing ribbon installed e Direct Indicates Direct Thermal printing no ribbon and requires special heat sensitive media Media Handling This option specifies how the printer will handle the media labels or tag stock e Tear Off Strip factory default Printer prints on the media and sends it out the front until the print buffer is empty then positions the trailing edge of the last label over the tear bar for removal e Tear Off After each label is printed the printer positions the label over the tear bar and waits for you to tear off the label before printing the next one on demand printing A Remove Label message will display to remind you to remove the label before the next one can be printed e Peel Off Prints and peels die cut labels
305. ne has occurred Fault Allows you to halt the printer if a PGL error occurs If you select this option the PGL error prints on the paper the message PGL Error displays on the front panel and the printer goes offline You must clear the error before the printer can resume normal operation Host Full error checking reported Error messages are sent back to the host through the port based on the menu Ret Status Port instead of being printed on paper Off There is no error checking Graphic elements such as alpha line barcodes etc will be clipped if they are beyond the page boundaries For VGL the options are as follows Enable All Full error checking and report Disable default No error checking and report Error Msgs Command syntax is checked and error messages printed when command parameters are incorrect Error Markers Prints the following error markers for those elements that print beyond the page boundaries gt gt for elements that begin off the right side of the page lt lt for elements that begin at the indicated position but end off the page for elements where the starting position of the command contains an error other than an off page error Offpage Errors Reports errors for elements that start or end beyond the right edge of the page Barcode Errors An error message will print when invalid barcode data is encountered For ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL and IEGL the options are
306. ne of the control panel LCD This feature is supported in PGL and ZGL only The PGL Execute command and parameters that support this feature is EXECUTE formname FC ICNTn FCNTn The ZGL Execute command is PQ Pages NOTE If the correct execute command is absent from the print file 0 Pages will continually display on the control panel LCD Feed Key Online This option changes the functionality of the Feed key when the printer is online Feed factory default When selected pressing the Feed key causes the printer to feed a form Reprint Last When selected pressing the Feed key causes the printer to reprint the last printed form Admin User Disable factory default When disabled this function does not permit access to submenus which would not normally be changed by a typical user Enable When enabled this function permits access to submenus which would not normally be changed by a typical user EMULATIONS IMPORTANT Overview Overview This section covers the following emulations Coax page 153 Twinax page 156 SPC Coax page 158 SPC Twinax page 159 IPDS page 160 TN3270 page 164 TN5250 page 166 PGL page 168 VGL page 170 ZGL Refer to the ZGL Programmer s Reference Manual TGL Refer to the TGL Programmer s Reference Manual IGL Refer to the IGL Programmer s Reference Manual STGL Refer to the STGL Programmer s Reference Manual DGL Refer to the DGL Pro
307. necechesaztcen a aaran a a aa anaa taa aa 308 Fault Messag Saoir arara anae ieia AEA LARERE DLRP URAK ER PEURA REAREA 308 A Specifications a rccgasttsrccelaleclar ce we eeeakn ads 333 Print Methoden begs ax adehsed sac nddued aa cepaed eaeky tect nafs ace E 333 MOCClas hecececthccet eatin E E ereie sats E 334 PRIDD OM EP EELEE ect cage La hea AA cack heen EA A 336 Indicators and Switches cccceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeeees 336 MOMOE cttw taal ae echt alee 336 Media Cutter Option ccccccceceecceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeeseeeeeeees 337 Host Interfaces e anaana e ia 338 ONNE E ETE AAE TEATE 338 EnvirOnMental ceceeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseeaaeeeeeseeeseesnnieaeeeeeess 339 PYSIGAN tei cath hs cos fede eeti T E eet AGartet EE ded at 339 ACOUSTIC Specifications c eect eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeteaeeesaeeseneeteaes 339 Maximum Page Length c ccceecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeeeeneaeees 340 B Printer ODTONS sai eee icxet essere tcrersttcse ones 341 Hardware Options a tiie iki a ee ie tA Aes 341 Interface Options ccccccceceteeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeesaeeeeaeseeneeees 342 Supplies and Accessories cccceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeesaeeeeneeees 343 Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons 0 0ceeeee 344 Genuine Printronix Media ccccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeneeees 345 ACCOSSONES uhren a eaan aa
308. next TOF or end of form still results in labels falling off the peel bar This menu selection works best if the length of the image printed matches the physical length of the label 123 Chapter 3 MEDIA CONTROL End of Image printing is affected by the Clip Page option under MEDIA Control See Clip Page on page 121 for more details Peel Off Mode When Peel Off Media Handling mode see page 109 is enabled this feature allows selection of two different media motions for automatic label peel off Fast factory default Reverse and forward media motion distance in Peel Off mode is reduced providing faster throughput Primarily used for label lengths less than 2 inches long Standard Provides standard reverse and forward media motion distance in Peel Off mode to ensure sufficient rewinder tension Continuous Mode Allows selection of special media modes when Continuous Media Handling mode see page 109 is selected 124 Standard factory default Labels are printed and sent out the front The cross perforation following the last printed label is not aligned at the tear bar No auto feeding of a blank label should exist between print jobs but you may need to press the FEED key to move approximately 80 inches of the last printed label from under the printhead If performed this feed causes a blank label at the beginning of the next print job Tear Off Same as Standard but the cross perforation following the
309. ng label is encountered Peel Off and Tear Off handling modes only Early Detect Once the label has moved forward 1 35 inches or the set label length whichever is shorter the sensor checks whether the label has advanced or not Tear Off Tear Off Strip and Continuous handling modes If no label is detected by the label taken sensor after the first 1 35 inches of motion the LABEL WRAP Open Head To Clear fault is declared When used in Cut handling the setting does nothing When used in Peel Off handling the settings behave the same as Full Label Disable The printer does not generate a fault condition if a missing label is encountered The default is Full Label MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Clip Page This option determines how the printer handles images that are too large for one physical page length when using gap or black mark media e Enable factory default When the user selected page length is greater than the physical page length the printer clips the excess data to fit the physical page The excess data is lost The media sensor constantly looks for the gap notch hole or black mark and when detected uses it as the Top of Form position for the next label and clips any remaining data from the label being printed e Disable When the user selected page length logical length is greater than the physical page length dictated by the gap notch hole or black mark on media the printer continues to print the remaining
310. nian Code Page 865 Greek 437 8 French CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 9 Spanish IBM CP864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 10 Italian IBM CP1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO 11 Turkish Arabic Lam One Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO 12 CP 437 Arabic Lam Two Polish POL1 13 CP 850 Win CP1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 Hebrew Sets Hebrew Old Data Gen Turk Hebrew New DEC Turkish Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish Latin 1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish Win CP 1255 PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish Notes To access the desired basic character set use the and keys To select the set press the key After you have selected the basic set access the subset selection menu by pressing the 4 key Once in the subset menu access the desired subset by pressing the and keys and select it by pressing the key Character Group P Series Serial Matrix Emulation Submenus Character Group and Character Sets P Series Serial Matrix From page 172 page 176 This menu item selects the character set used by the printer The available character sets are shown below Greek DP 10 cpi Greek DP 12 cpi Greek LQ 10 c
311. nits Ticket lifetime unit in Seconds Minutes Hours or Days The factory default is Seconds KERBEROS PARAMS Submenus Tckt Life SEC Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in Seconds SEC Minutes MIN Hours HR or Days DAY as specified by the Tckt Life Units that a ticket obtained from the Kerberos server is valid before getting a new one e Seconds The range is 300 259200 and the default is 43200 e Minutes The range is 5 4320 and the default is 720 e Hours The range is 1 72 and the default is 12 e Days The range is 1 3 and the default is 1 NOTE Whatever submenu is selected in Tckt Life Units will display on the Tckt Life SEC menu For example if you select Hours the Tckt Life SEC menu name will change to Tckt Life HR Renew Life Units Renew lifetime unit in Seconds Minutes Hours or Days The factory default is Seconds Renew Life SEC Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in Seconds SEC Minutes MIN Hours HR or Days DAY as specified by the Renew Life Units before warning that a new Kerberos password is needed e Seconds The range is 0 604800 and the default is 0 e Minutes The range is 0 10080 and the default is 0 e Hours The range is 0 168 and the default is 0 e Days The range is 0 7 and the default is 0 NOTE Whatever submenu is selected in Renew Life Units will display on the Renew Life SEC menu For example if you select Days the Renew Life SEC
312. nkled and installed code are detected properly Clean printhead If message persists replace the printhead POWER SAVER Yes This is a status No action required MODE message The printer is in low energy idle state the fan and higher voltages are off and only 5Vdc logic circuits are active 326 Fault Messages Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution PRINT HEAD COLD Yes Printer is in a cold 1 Reseat P401 on printhead environment or 2 Ch h head connector P401 has e nange tia priningag become dislodged 3 Place printer in a warmer from the back of the location printhead 4 If problem persists contact your authorized service representative PRINT HEAD HOT Yes No The printhead has 1 Allow the printhead to cool become overheated down for 5 minutes then press PAUSE Resume printing 2 If possible reduce print intensity 3 If problem persists contact your authorized service representative PRINT HEAD UP Yes Printhead is not closed Close and latch the printhead Close Print Head and completely pivoting deck latched PRINTER HOT Yes No The printer has 1 Determine that the fan is detected higher than operating and that all air usual temperatures on vents are unobstructed the controller PCBA 2 Power off the printer for 15 seconds then power the printer back on 3 Move the printer t
313. nload directory you created in step 6 Start a command prompt session in Windows The Start Menu icon is usually labeled MS DOS Prompt or Command Prompt At the command prompt type IMPORTANT c lt Enter gt cd download lt Enter gt 13 Start the FTP file transfer protocol program by typing ftp xxx xxx xxx xxx lt Enter gt where Xxx xxx xxx xxx is the IP Address of the printer 14 Log in to the printer by typing root lt Enter gt You are given a password prompt NOTE The default is no password If the FTP program requires a password contact the system administrator 15 At the password prompt press lt Enter gt 16 Once logged in type the following sequence at the command prompt to download the filename prg file to the printer cd dest lt Enter gt ed diprn lt Enter gt bin lt Enter gt put filename prg lt Enter gt where filename prg is the file name you noted in step 9 Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller PCBA and NIC incompletely loaded and the printer may not boot up 17 When the download is complete exit the FTP program by typing quit lt Enter gt 18 When the new software has successfully downloaded into flash memory and the printer has reset itself set the printer power switch to O Off 19 Remove the CD from the host computer and store it with the printer 20 If required reconnect the d
314. nly Boot or Corrupt Code on page 274 2 3 4 10 11 12 Make a configuration printout of all saved configurations See page 81 Set the printer power switch to O Off Connect the ethernet cable to the printer interface On the printer control panel press and hold down the and J keys Without releasing the keys power the printer on When you see B01 STATUS on the on the LCD release the keys Wait until you see PROGRAM DOWNLOAD on the LCD before proceeding This can take about a minute to appear depending on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer Using Windows Explorer create a directory named download at the root level of your C hard drive C download Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer s CD drive Open the readme txt file on the CD There are two emulation sets with corresponding part number files from which to choose CT IPDS PGL VGL ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL TN PGL VGL ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL Both emulation sets include the LP emulation They are offered in two file formats exe and prg Use prg files to download through the NIC using FTP Identify which emulation set you want to download into the printer and note the filename that corresponds to that emulation The filename is a six digit number plus prg For example 123456 prg This is the file you will download into the printer Copy the file to the dow
315. nostics option 140 Y Year option 263 254590 001J
316. ns are 1 15 lines factory default and 1 16 lines SPC Char Set Allows you to select the print language character set See page 159 for the options The default is 0500 Internat 5 SPC Null Supp SPC Null Supp stands for SPC Null Suppression e Disable factory default Ignores nulls The print position does not move e Enable Treats nulls as blank spaces Emulation Submenus SPC Space Supp This option is only available in Coax SPC emulation and is used in LU3 DSC DSE mode only e Disable factory default Treats nulls and spaces normally e Enable If the entire line consists of spaces and nulls the line will be discarded SPC Type SPC Coax Setup e PTX NI Printronix Non impact factory default This option causes the printer to not line wrap at 132 characters e Avatar Comp This option causes the printer to line wrap at 132 characters despite the current print density allowing more characters per line SPC Type SPC Twinax Setup Allows you to select a convertor which mimics a specific type of external protocol convertor e MODE PTX NI factory default for Printronix non impact e MODE 219 for Model 219 protocol convertor e MODE P5000 for Printronix protocol convertor e MODE IBM for the IBM protocol convertor Standard Sets This item allows you to select various character sets available from the Character Group item The options are Standard Arabic Cyrillic European Greek Hebrew and Turki
317. nscannable xx Missing Codes fault message 330 UPC Descenders option PGL 222 UPC Descenders option VGL 222 Upr Case Select option 222 USB 289 USB PORT 242 409 USB Port downloading software 272 Use Label Length option 134 User Def Ratio option 222 User Defined St1 Start Code 1 option 223 User Defined St2 Start Code 2 option 223 User Defined Stp Stop Code option 223 Using Downloaded TrueType Fonts 280 Using the internal rewinder 43 UTF 8 193 V Validator Funct option 103 Validator not communicating fault message 331 Var Form Adjust option 223 Var Form Type option 223 Ver Image Shift option 99 111 VGL 152 VGL SETUP menu 170 View File List option 143 VPA Check option 223 W WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD fault message 331 Warranty information 393 WEP Key BYTE1 through BYTE13 option 255 WEP Key Format option 255 WEP Key Width option 255 Width Limit option 224 Windows Driver 276 WIRELESS ADAPTER NOT COMPATIBLE fault message 331 Wireless Ethernet 289 WLAN ADDRESS menu 249 submenus 250 WLAN EAP menu 260 WLAN EAP menu EAP Mode 260 EAP Pswd 01 15 261 EAP Pswd 16 30 261 EAP User 01 15 260 EAP User 16 30 260 410 EAP User 31 32 260 Reset EAP Pswd 261 Reset EAP User 261 WLAN PARAMS menu 251 submenus 253 Word Length option 234 WPA Cipher option 256 WPA Mode option 256 WPA P Phs option 256 X XON XOFF 235 xxx Diag
318. nt Char ____p Margin Margin Margin Margin Set 0 characters 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces 0 to 369 characters 0 to 369 characters 0 to 451 linespaces 0 to 451 linespaces 176 Notes Factory Default 1 This menu is available only when you enable Admin User under PRINTER CONTROL 2 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 3 The presence of this menu depends on the LP Emulation selection under PRINTER CONTROL SERIAL MATRIX SETUP from page 176 Define CR Auto LF Define LF Control Bold Overstrike Code Code Code 06 CR CR Enable LF LF 8 0 LPI Disable Enable CR CR LF Disable LF CR LF 10 3 LPI Enable Disable 6 0 LPI E Printer Alt ESC d Test Host Reset Cmd Select Set 80 9F Command Position Command CFG Ld Disable Control Code Even dot plot Bottom of Line Enable Disable Enable Printable Double high Top of Line Ignore All Power up config Ignore CPI Current config Ignore LPI Factory config E Form Form Form Form Length Length Length Width 4 or 6 inches 101 6 or 152 4 mm 24 or 36 lines 04 1 06 6 or 08 5 inches 00 0 to 24 0 inches 00 0 to 609 6mm 0 to 144 lines 00 0 13 6 inches i Form Form Width Width 104
319. nt line on the next form Power on PGL You can set the PGL feature so that it is enabled or disabled when the printer is powered on e Enable factory default The PGL is enabled when the printer is powered on The PGL feature is initialized in the Normal mode e Disable The PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on The PGL feature is initialized to the Quiet mode Power up F e Disable factory default e Enable Selects free format mode as the power up default and selects the graphics mode PY as the power up default Free format causes the VGL to ignore carriage returns line feeds and all characters below 20 hex sent from the host Power up PY e Disable factory default e Enable Selects the graphics mode PY as the power up default Power up X e Disable factory default e Enable Selects the ignore mode as the power up default and selects the graphics mode PY as the power up default All characters are ignored until a A command is received Preparser Port Allows you to send preparser commands to the printer through any port e Disable factory default Not using the Preparser command e Enable The preparser command can be accepted from any port Primary Subset This item allows selection of the desired primary character subset used by the printer The factory default is ASCII USA Emulation Submenus Print Char Set Selecting this item by pressing the key causes the pr
320. ntation NOTE Print Direction will not change the orientation of any print test patterns in the DIAGNOSTIC menu Print Direction has two options e Head First e Foot First For example with Portrait orientation when you select Head First the top of form will come out of the printer first Conversely when you select Foot First the bottom of form will come out first FEED 4 Head First Foot First MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Print Direction and Orientation are two independent options that can be combined to produce the following results depending on the Active IGP Emulation Table 4 Head First Print Direction Orientation Option Result in Active Emulations Option PGL or VGL Head First Portrait Portrait Head First Landscape Landscape Head First Inv Portrait Inv Portrait Head First Inv Landscape Inv Landscape Table 5 Foot First Srint Direction Orientation Option Result in Active ZGL Emulation Option Foot First Portrait Portrait Foot First Landscape Inv Landscape Foot First Inv Portrait Inv Portrait Foot First Inv Landscape Landscape The factory default is Head First when PGL or VGL is enabled The factory default is Foot First when ZGL is enabled Label Wait Time When Media Handling is set to Tear Off Strip or Continuous and Continuous Mode is set to Tear Strip Full Label Wait Time specifies the number of seconds after printing stops t
321. nter control panel press and hold down the and 4 keys Without releasing the keys power the printer on When you see B01 STATUS on the on the LCD release the keys 7 Wait until you see PROGRAM DOWNLOAD on the LCD before doing the next step This can take about a minute to appear depending on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer 8 On your computer create a directory named download at the root level of the hard drive e g C download on a Windows computer 9 Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer s CD drive 10 Copy the FDU jar file from the CD to your computer 11 Open the readme txt file on the CD There are two emulation sets with corresponding part number files from which to choose CT IPDS PGL VGL ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL TN PGL VGL ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL Both emulation sets include the LP emulation They are offered in two file formats exe and prg You can use either format with the FDU 266 12 13 14 Identify which emulation set you want to download into the printer and note the filename that corresponds to that emulation The filename is a six digit number plus exe or prg For example 123456 exe or 123456 prg This is the file you will download into the printer Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 8 Double click the FDU jar file for command line prompt users type java jar fdu jar lt Enter
322. nternational Business Machines Corp Monarch is a registered trademark of Paxar Corporation MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation IEEE is a registered service mark of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Inc ANSI is a registered trademark of American National Standards Institute Inc EIA is a registered service mark of Electronic Industries Association ZPL ZPL Il and Zebra are registered trademarks of Zebra Technologies Corporation TEC is a registered trademark of the Toshiba TEC Corporation Intermec is a registered trademark of the Intermec Technologies Corporation SATO is a registered trademark of SATO America Inc DPL is a trademark and Datamax is a registered trademark of Datamax Technologies Corporation IER is a registered trademark of IER Si ge Table of Contents NTO CUICION e880 aaia A Oa 11 The SL T5R Energy Saver Family of Printers cccceccseeeeseeeeees 11 Standard Features ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeaesseeeeseaeeeeaeeseneeees 12 Optional Features cecccecccceceeeeeeeeeceeeeecaeeeeaeeseeeeeseeeeeaeseeneeees 13 Thermal Printer Technology ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeees 14 The Printing ProC SS 0 eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaaes 14 Dynamic Print Control 0 ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeseeeeeseaee
323. ntify which emulation set you want to download into the printer and note the filename that corresponds to that emulation The filename is a six digit number plus prg For example 123456 prg This is the file you will download into the printer Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 1 On the printer control panel press and hold down the and J keys Without releasing the keys power the printer on When you see B01 STATUS on the on the LCD release the keys Wait until you see PROGRAM DOWNLOAD on the LCD before proceeding This can take about a minute to appear depending on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer Load the Printronix Windows driver provided with your printer on the Manuals and Utilities CD on Windows 2000 NT XP Server 2003 Vista Once the printer driver is installed on the PC right click the printer driver and select Properties Click the About Help tab to access the software download option Click the Firmware Update button Enter the full path and location to the printer software c download firmware prg where c download is the directory you created in step 1 and firmware prg is the software you noted in step 3 Click OK to send the software to the printer To abort this operation click the Cancel button 273 Chapter 4 Downloading Software if Flash Contains Only Boot or Corrupt Code Downloading Software if Flash Contains Only Boot or Corrupt C
324. oa cooler location 4 Ifthe problem persists after moving the printer to a cooler location contact your authorized customer service representative PRINTER UNDER Yes Indicates that PNE has Press any key on the printer REMOTE CONTROL control of the printer P S MISMATCH No Incorrect power supply Contact your authorized Replace Supply is mounted in the customer service printer representative 327 Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued z Can User A 3 Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution PWR SUPPLY HOT Yes Power supply is hot Determine that the fan is operating and that all air vents are unobstructed Move the printer to a cooler area If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative RBN TAKEUP FULL Yes The ribbon takeup Empty the takeup spool Remove Used Rbn spool is full If the takeup spool is not full try re threading the ribbon Disable Rbn Takeup Full in the MEDIA CONTROL menu Remove Label Yes e A label was Remove the label from the detected at the front of the printer to allow front of the printer the next label to print Ine on a Verify that a front door seh he e assembly is installed on norma Set ep the printer and that it is Message wien properly closed Ensure Peel Off or Tear en Off Media Handli that no debris is h S a i na obstructing the d
325. ock near the edge of the media Prints strange characters instead of the correct label format 1 If the printer serial interface is being used check that the printer serial baud rate setting matches the baud rate of the host computer Reset the printer via software or turn the printer off and then on Check if the printer serial host interface is set for 8 data bits but the transmitting device is set for 7 data bits or vice versa Check the current setting by viewing it on the LCD and use the SERIAL PORT menu to adjust the settings if necessary If the printer parallel interface is being used make sure the parallel interface terminating resistors are correct for the host computer drivers e Start of image is printed an erroneous distance from the top of form The printer starts to print one label and then another all within the same physical label Make sure the Label Length value matches the actual physical length of the label installed and the run on Auto Calibrate see page 60 These symptoms could be caused by AUN severely curled labels near the end of a media roll the media sensor triggering off of a dark preprinted image on the label multiple gaps within the physical label In the MEDIA CONTROL menu set Clip Page to Disable Run a Media Profile see page 62 If the Media Profile printout shows that preprinted images or an RFID antenna tag has an amplitude approaching the Gap Ma
326. ode If the flash memory contains only boot code e g if it is new or if a download was interrupted e g by a power outage you must download software through the printer s parallel port using the three key initialization sequence covered in this section 1 Make sure the printer s parallel port is available In some configurations you may have to remove an external NIC If you need to re install the Centronics I O cable and connector contact your support facility 2 Set the printer power switch to O Off 3 Disconnect the data signal cable s from the printer interface connectors 4 Connect a parallel data printer cable to the LPT1 port of a computer running the Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Server 2003 or Vista operating system 5 Connect the data cable to the Centronics port of the printer 6 On the printer control panel press and hold down the 4 and keys Without releasing the keys power the printer on When you see B20 STATUS 00 DOWNLOAD MODE on the LCD release the keys 7 Using Windows Explorer create a directory named download at the root level of your C hard drive C download Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer s CD drive Open the readme txt file on the CD There are two emulation sets with corresponding part number files from which to choose CT IPDS PGL VGL ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL TN PGL VGL ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL
327. ode and download the font Adding a Header A TrueType font can be converted to a downloadable format by appending a header to the font file using the cnvt2fls exe utility 1 Start a Command prompt window 2 Copy cnvt2fls exe and addithdr bat from your startup CD to your working directory 3 In your working directory include the TrueType font file in ttf format e g arial ttf 4 Convert the TrueType font file ttf to a downloadable format dwn with the following command addtthdr filename without extension Example addtthdr arial This creates the file arial dwn 5 Put the printer in download mode as described in Downloading a Font in Download Mode on page 277 and send the downloadable font file e g arial dwn to the printer through the appropriate I O port of the printer Downloading a Font in Download Mode 1 Set the printer power switch to O Off 2 Connect a parallel data cable to the LPT1 port or a serial cable to the COM1 port of a computer running the Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Server 2003 or Vista operating system NOTE You can connect the cable to the LPT2 port on the computer if the LPT1 port is already in use The download commands are different if you use this port as described in the notes after step 10 3 Verify that the data cable is connected to the appropriate I O port on the printer and to the host computer 4 Power on the computer and allow it to boot up 5 On the pr
328. oes not compress print widths even if condensed print is chosen by the host 5225 World Trade The 5225 emulation has a standard multinational character set that serves as a base and 14 extended world trade character set assortments The options are Standard Char factory default and Extended Char Absorb After PN e Disable factory default The paper motion line terminators that immediately follow the PN command are sent to the printer and processed e Enable The paper motion line terminators that immediately follow the SPN command are ignored Emulation Submenus Absorb After PY e Absorb Motion factory default The paper motion line terminator immediately following the graphics PY command will be ignored e Absorb All The system ignores all the data following PY until a host generated terminator is detected and ignored e Disable System terminators following a graphics command are sent to the printer and result in paper motion Active Char Set Selects which group of character sets Primary or Secondary will be active The factory default is Secondary Set Al 00 Spaces This option is designated for EAN UCC 128 barcodes whose application identifier Al is 00 e Disable factory default The printable data field is printed with the Al enclosed in parentheses This is the standard EAN UCC 128 format e Enable The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated by spaces This option is
329. of a leading zero e X2 DPD When selected l 2 5 bar code with a magnification X2 will use the specially configured ratios 3 3 6 5 rather than 3 6 9 12 for compatibility issues e Modulo 7 CD The 2 5 bar code uses a modulo 7 check digit instead of the default modulo 10 check digit 205 Chapter 3 206 EPSON FX SETUP Ignore Ch 1 Specifies character 1 for the character filtering option Valid decimal values are from 0 through 255 The factory default is 0 Ignore Ch 2 Specifies character 2 for the character filtering option Valid decimal values are from 0 through 255 The factory default is 0 Ignore Chars e Disable factory default Character filtering is not enabled e Char 1 Character 1 will be filtered Select the option Ignore ch 1 to specify character 1 e Char 2 Character 2 will be filtered Select the option Ignore ch 2 to specify character 2 e Char 1 amp 2 Characters 1 amp 2 will be filtered Select the options Ignore ch 1 and Ignore ch 2 to specify values for these characters Ignore Dots e Disable factory default The VGL expects position values to be specified in tenth inches and dot rows e Enable Causes the VGL to expect position values to be specified in only 1 10ths of an inch If the dot position is also given it is treated as text Ignore Lxx Cmd e Disable factory default e Enable The Form Length commands Lxx and Hxx will be ignored and th
330. ol command setting requires error reporting e Disable The printer does not report dots outside the valid printable area 223 Chapter 3 224 EPSON FX SETUP Width Limit When enabled the system will limit the length and width for expanded characters to a limit shown in Table 7 which shows the maximum width allowed for a specific height in the range of 00 through 40 0 0 through 4 0 inches The factory default is Disable Table 7 Width Limit Table Height Max Width Height Max Width Param Allowed Param Allowed 00 99 21 51 01 99 22 53 02 3 23 56 03 6 24 58 04 8 25 61 05 11 26 63 06 13 27 66 07 16 28 68 08 18 29 71 09 21 30 73 10 23 31 76 11 26 32 78 12 28 33 81 13 31 34 83 14 33 35 86 15 36 36 88 16 38 37 91 17 41 38 93 18 43 39 96 19 46 40 98 20 48 Emulation Submenus XOH SMO Support This option allows the user to disable reporting of XOH SMO support in the STM reply This feature has been added because some hosts will not send an IPDS XOH SMS to a printer that reports it is a Continuous Forms printer and also supports XOH SMO e Enable factory default The printer reports that it has support for XOH SMO e Disable The printer does not report that it has support for XOH SMO DIAGNOSTICS DIAGNOSTICS from page 91 Printer Test Count Software
331. om physical page length top margin text length If the option is set to LP Menu then a change in text length has no effect and the bottom margin setting in the LP Emulation menu will be used although the new text length value still shows in the menu The options are LP Menu factory default and VGL Text Length Buffer Print e Disable factory default The printer will print normally e Enable The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received from the host as hex values NOTE Use of this parameter may alter print attributes set by the host computer A power cycle may be required after changing Buffer Print from enable to disable Buffer Reprint This option is valid only when the printer is printing in Coax SCS mode When the ENTER key is pressed Buffer Reprint Enabled displays and an Intervention Required status is sent to the host Pressing ENTER again cancels the Buffer Reprint function and displays Buffer Reprint Disabled on the LCD Emulation Submenus C39 Compatbl This menu makes the old method of decoding C39 alternative character set compatible with the new e Enable Matches the old method of decoding e Disable factory default Uses the current way of decoding C128 Mode Comp The menu is for compatibility of the old build in auto mode switch e Enable Matches the old build on the auto mode switch e Disable factory default Uses auto mode switch Cancel IGP DCU e Enable
332. omer service representative ERROR PROGRAM Yes No The program exceeds Download a smaller program NEEDS MORE DRAM the memory limitations of the printer 315 Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message Cae Explanation Solution ERROR PROGRAM Yes No The printer requires Delete any unused data file NEEDS MORE more flash memory in Download the file again If the FLASH order to run the problem persists contact your downloaded program authorized customer service representative ERROR PROGRAM Yes The printer is not Power off the printer for 15 NOT COMPATIBLE compatible with the seconds then power back on downloaded program If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative ERROR PROGRAM Yes The printer does not Power off the printer for 15 NOT VALID see a program in flash seconds then power back on memory If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative ERROR SECURITY Yes No The security key is not Power off the printer for 15 KEY NOT present or has failed seconds then power back on DETECTED If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative ERROR SHORT AT Yes No Hardware failure in Power off the printer for 15 ADDRESS XXXX DRAM or Main PCBA seconds then power back on controller circuitry If th
333. ommand causes the printer to automatically reboot LP MODE n a Protocol Protocol must be 0 4 This command resets the software protocol and is selected as follows 0 P Series 1 P Series XQ 2 Serial Matrix 3 Proprinter III XL 4 Epson FX 1050 365 Appendix G The PTX_SETUP Commands Table 32 General PTX_SETUP Commands Command Sub Command Parameter Description FILE_IO DISK_IO 366 CAPTURE Filename Letter Captures all incoming data into a file named Filename Receipt of a FILE_IO CAPTURE command without the Filename parameter will force the file data to be written to flash and will end the file capture This command is parsed for backwards compatibility However since the flash file system is a single device the drive letter will be ignored File Prop Filename The PROPS command will set the file properties of a given file The file properties are a four letter case sensitive file descriptor The properties field can be used to ensure that a file is used for its intended purpose Once properties have been associated with a file they cannot be changed The DEL command will mark a file as deleted The space the file occupied will be freed the next time the printer is powered up General Commands Table 32 General PTX_SETUP Commands Command Sub Command Parameter Description FILE_IO RUNFILE File Prop The RUNFILE command will
334. on Online Barcode Validator RFID Encoder RS 422 Scalable Fonts Wireless NIC Maintenance Manual LP Programmer s Reference Manual PGL Programmer s Reference Manual VGL Programmer s Reference Manual C T Programmer s Reference Manual Network Interface Card User s Manual PrintNet Enterprise Suite User s Manual 347 Appendix B _ Supplies and Accessories 348 ASCII Control Codes Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex NUL 0 00 32 20 64 40 96 60 SOH 1 01 33 21 A 65 41 a 97 61 STX 2 02 34 22 B 66 42 b 98 62 EXT 3 03 35 23 C 67 43 c 99 63 EOT 4 04 36 24 D 68 44 d 100 64 ENQ 5 05 37 25 E 69 45 e 101 65 ACK 6 06 amp 38 26 F 70 46 f 102 66 BEL 7 07 39 27 G 71 47 g 103 67 BS 8 08 40 28 H 72 48 h 104 68 HT 9 09 41 29 l 73 49 i 105 69 LF 10 0A i 42 2A J 74 4A j 106 6A VT 11 0B 43 2B K 75 4B k 107 6B FF 12 00 44 2C L 76 4C I 108 6C CR 13 oD 45 2D M 77 4D m 109 6D SO 14 0E 46 2E N 78 4E n 110 6E SI 15 OF 47 2F O 79 4F o 111 6F DLE 16 10 0 48 30 P 80 50 p 112 70 DC1 17 11 1 49 31 Q 81 51 q 113 71 DC2 18 12 2 50 32 R 82 52 r 114 72 DC3 19 13 3 51 33 S 83 53 s 115 73 DC4 20 14 4 52 34 T 84 54 t 116 74 NAK 21 15 5 53 35 U 85 55 u 117 75 SYN 22 16 6 54 36 V 86 56 v 118 76 ETB 23 17 7 55 37 WwW 87 57 w 119 77 CAN 24 18 8 56 38 X 88 58 x 120 78 EM 25 19 9 57 39 Y 89 59
335. on computers running the Windows or UNIX such as Linux or Solaris operating systems With the FDU you can choose the printer port through which to download software configure the port and initiate the download The FDU is a Java based program so you need the Java 2 Platform Standard Edition J2SE Java Runtime Environment JRE installed on your computer The Windows version of the J2SE JRE is included on the CD that comes with the printer in the form of an executable file Copy this file to your computer and double click it it will self extract and install the J2SE JRE on your computer NOTE If you have a Linux or Solaris system you can download the J2SE JRE for your system from http java sun com j2se If you have another UNIX system see your system administrator Conditions for use of the included Java Software are set forth in the Sun Microsystems Binary Code License Agreement http java com en download license jsp In the event of any conflicting terms the Binary Code License Agreement controls 1 Make a configuration printout of all saved configurations See page 81 2 Set the printer power switch to O Off 3 Disconnect the data signal cable s from the printer interface connectors 4 Connect a printer data cable to the parallel serial or ethernet port of the computer you will use to download the software Connect the printer data cable to the appropriate I O port of the printer On the pri
336. on Control Code SFCC The SFCC denotes that the following data is a PGL command The range is 1 255 and the factory default is 126 Select SFCC P Series This P Series feature allows you to select an ASCII code which defines the Special Function Control Code SFCC command code value The factory default value is hex 01 but the P Series options allow selection of any value ranging from hex 00 through hex 7F This powerful feature permits the SFCC code to be assigned a value compatible with the application environment where the P Series jobs originate The most commonly used values include the following e SOH 01 hex e ESC 1B hex e ETX 03 hex e Circumflex 5e hex also called caret e Tilde 7F hex NOTE Non Printable ASCII code values range from hex 00 through hex 1F and also include hex 7F Printable ASCII code values range from hex 20 through hex 7E If a printable code value is chosen to define the SFCC code value you must ensure that the printer data stream will not contain the same code value in printable text Otherwise text containing the character for the SFCC control code value may be incorrectly processed as an SFCC command causing print errors The range is 0 7F and the factory default is 1 Select SFCC IGP VGL This option selects the Special Function Control Code The default value is the caret decimal 94 Valid values are 17 through 255 Run a configuration printout to determine the curr
337. on after cycling power or after the printhead is opened and then closed and advances media until the next gap notch or mark is detected by the Media Sensor s When print data is sent printing begins only after the next TOF is detected resulting in one or more blank labels being advanced NOTE When set to Enable Online Auto Cal and Head Auto Cal will automatically be set to Disable The printer will not reset any settings to Enable when Ticket Save Mode is later disabled 125 Chapter 3 126 MEDIA CONTROL TOF Adjust Mode e Enable This option enables the TOF Adjust distance set using the TOF Adjust menu see TOF Adjust below e Disable factory default his option disables the TOF Adjust distance set using the TOF Adjust menu see TOF Adjust below TOF Adjust This opton sets the distance from the Top Of Form TOF that is left blank unprinted after a label has been removed in Tear Off strip or Tear Off mode Normally printing is done starting at TOF but when this mode is enabled the start position for printing can be adjusted from 0 00 to 0 40 inches from TOF in increments of 0 01 inch This adjustment can be helpful if a die cut label sticks to the platen by means of jagged edges created during a poor die cut label removal using the tear bar By controlling how much blank space there is from TOF you can control how much the media is called back after it is torn off Ribbon Calibrate Determines the am
338. on memory configuration PRINTER CONTROL Submenus Standard Chars This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of standard text fonts The factory default is 340 and the range is from 0 to 512 Bold Chars This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of bold text fonts The factory default is 448 and the range is from 0 to 512 Extra Bold Char This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of extra bold text fonts The factory default is 504 and the range is from 0 to 512 OCR A Chars Character weight adjustment of resident OCR A characters The factory default is 384 and the range is from 0 to 512 OCR B Chars Character weight adjustment of resident OCR B characters The factory default is 304 and the range is from 0 to 512 Tall Characters Increases the point height of resident Intellifont characters e Enable Increases the point height of resident Intellifont characters approximately 10 e Disable factory default Standard resident font character point height is maintained 147 Chapter 3 148 PRINTER CONTROL Batch Counter Displays the number of pages remaining in a print job Disable factory default The Pages remaining to be printed will not display Instead the Active emulation and interface will display on the second line of the control panel LCD Enable The Pages remaining to be printed will display on the second li
339. oor mirror A9 eee one or the Label Taken Sensor oh Aabel veer In the QUICK SETUP or peeve QUUUIG MEDIA CONTROL menu Remove Label change Media Handling to message i the correct selection remained e The incorrect Media Handling mode was selected RESETTING Yes Printer finished loading No action required PLEASE WAIT the program into flash memory and is automatically resetting itself RESTORING Yes Normal download No action required BOOT CODE initialization message 328 Fault Messages Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution RIBBON BROKEN Yes Ribbon is broken Reattach ribbon Reload Ribbon between the ribbon take up spindle and the printhead RIBBON FAULT Yes In the CT emulation Clean the printer Timeout ne A Power off wait 15 the ri d ies a ie t seconds then power back RIE cee on again If the message aler d So persists contact your made a ceara authorized customer ribbon fault service representative RIBBON LOAD BAD Yes Ribbon was incorrectly Reload the ribbon Reload Ribbon loaded on the take up correctly For ribbon or supply spindle loading instructions see page 40 Ribbon Low Yes 1 The supply spool is Replace ribbon geting low Disable Ribbon Low in the 2 If there is a large MEDIA CONTROL menu amount of ribbon still on the supply spool then the Ribbon Low message is being displayed falsely
340. open DISK_IO the file named File for printing After the PTX_END command is processed the contents of File will get printed before any more data is read from the host If the Prop field is present RUNFILE will verify that Prop matches the saved file properties Any mismatch will cause the command to be ignored UPLOAD File Port Reads the file named File out of the flash file system and sends it to a host computer via the Port I O port Portis either 1284 for reverse nibble or byte mode transfer using the parallel port or SERIAL NOTE if the Ethernet option is installed 1284 is used to upload across the network MAXSIZE For backwards compatibility MINSIZE For backwards compatibility OPTIMIZE Causes the printer to optimize the Flash File System The printer automatically reboots during this process PTX_END none none Exits the PTX_SETUP Summary of the CONFIG Command The UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD command can be used for uploading and downloading complete printer configurations If a customer needs to configure 50 printers identically the customer needs only configure one printer and UPLOAD the configurations The UPLOADed configurations may then be DOWNLOADed to other printers eliminating the necessity for the operator to configure each printer manually The UPLOAD command will always place a header and a footer into the uploaded data This header will be the DOWNLOAD command followed by the configur
341. opy of the same version and revision level Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies 1 THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED Printronix Inc does not warrant that the functions contained in the Software will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free Printronix Inc reserves the right to make changes and or improvements in the Software without notice at any time 2 INNO EVENT WILL PRINTRONIX INC BE LIABLE FOR LOST PROFITS LOST DATA BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONS OR ANY OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT EVEN IF PRINTRONIX INC HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE ABUSE OR MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 3 Printronix Inc will not be liable for any loss or damage caused by delay in furnishing a Software Product or any other performance under this Agreement 390 4 Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our liability of any kind including liability for negligence except liability for personal injury caused solely by our negligence for the Software Product covered
342. or Handle Media Guard Opening NOTE Ribbon is not displayed in this illustration The upper and lower sensors are designed to function with or without ribbon installed The upper sensor and lower sensor are used together to detect liner gaps between die cut labels that have a black or dark background on white or clear liner 1 Position the lower sensor directly under the center of the gap and then place the upper sensor directly over the lower sensor Check the position of the lower sensor by looking through the long narrow opening in the media guard Use the visible red light emitting from the lower sensor as a reference pointer Use the sensor handle to manually position the sensor to the center of the gap in the media Then use the handle on the upper sensor to position it directly above the lower sensor NOTE When using ribbon you may need to slide the ribbon to one side to adjust the upper sensor Select Advanced Gap in the Gap Mark Sensor submenu under the CALIBRATE CTRL menu See Sensing Different Media Types on page 59 Perform an Auto Calibrate See Running Auto Calibrate on page 60 57 Chapter 2 _ Printing Adjustments Visible Red Beam 58 Sensing Dark Background Media with Notches or Holes Advanced Notch Upper Sensor Upper Sensor Handle Lower Sensor N 2 R gt Black line on underside of media Media Guard Opening NOTE Ribbon is not displayed in thi
343. or the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000 000 000 and 000 NOTE The printer reboots when it is placed online Subnet Mask This item allows you to set the Subnet Mask for the TCP IP protocol in four three digit segments SEG1 through SEG4 If the Subnet Mask is assigned by BootP Arp or DHCP it is dynamic and read only The factory defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000 000 000 and 000 NOTE The printer reboots when it is placed online Gateway Address This item allows you to set the Gateway Address for the TCP IP protocol in four three digit segments SEG1 through SEG4 If the Gateway Address is assigned by BootP ARP or DHCP it is dynamic and read only The factory defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000 000 000 and 000 NOTE The printer reboots when it is placed online MAC Address This item is the Manufacturer s Assigned Number and is unique for each NIC It is read only DHCP You can enable disable the DHCP protocol using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting The options are Disable factory default and Enable NOTE The printer reboots when it is placed online BootP You can enable disable the BootP protocol using this option Be sure to consult your administrator for the appropriate setting The options are Disable and Enable factory default NOTE The printer will reboot when it is placed online 245 Chapter 3 _ETHERNETPARAMS ETHERNET PARAMS
344. orm position on media with label length indicators gaps notches holes or black marks e Disable Select when using media with no label length indicators no gaps notches holes or black marks or when you want the printer to ignore all existing label length indicators on the installed media NOTE When you select Disable the length of each label is based on the Label Length value entered in the MEDIA CONTROL menu or the value sent via host software e Mark Select when using media that has horizontal black marks located on the underside of the label liner or tag stock The Top of Form position is the leading edge of the black mark e Gap An alternative to Advanced Gap The Top of Form position is the leading edge of the die cut label trailing edge of the gap notch or hole e Advanced Gap factory default Select when using media with a liner space between die cut labels or when using tag stock with notches or holes as label length indicators on white background media or when using media that has liner gaps between die cut labels with black background The Top of Form position is the leading edge of the die cut label trailing edge of the gap notch or hole e Advanced Notch Select when using media with notches or holes that interrupt a black vertical line on the underside of the media The Top of Form position is the leading edge of the die cut label trailing edge of the gap notch or hole Auto Calibrate This feat
345. ormation The range is 40 FF and the factory default is 5F User Defined Stp Stop Code This option allows you to define your own value in ASCII characters for the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu Stp specifies Stop Code See Lead in Chars on page 208 for additional information The range is 40 FF and the factory default is 5B Var Form Adjust This specifies an amount in tenths of inches to add to the length of variable length forms Variable length forms use a semicolon at the end of the CREATE command CREATE lt FORMNAMESs 0 Typically variable length forms are determined by the elements within the form The longest form element becomes the overall form length This option allows an additional space to be added to the form length The range is 00 0 to 03 0 inches and the factory default is 00 0 inches Var Form Type e Add Nothing factory default When selected no action is taken e Add 0 When selected the form length ends at the longest printed element Same as CREATE filename 0 e Add X When selected the form length is the same as the physical page length the Label Length menu under MEDIA CONTROL Same as CREATE filename X VPA Check e Enable factory default The printer checks for dots that fall outside the intersection of the logical and physical pages If dots fall outside the area the printer reports an error to the host if the IPDS Exception Handling Contr
346. ormation refer to the VGL Programmer s Reference Manual e Disable Sets the printer label size equal to the Label Length set in the front panel under the PRINTER CONTROL menu Host Override Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host or continues to use the current operator panel settings e Disable factory default Allows these host commands to override operator panel settings line length forms length lines per inch LPI characters per inch CPI print quality and text orientation Note the information appearing on the message display may not match the data stream setting No values will change upon initial selection of the Disable option e Enable The operator panel settings override the host commands Host PI e Disable factory default The host does not send PI signals e Enable The host sends PI signals The Data Bit 8 configuration option must be disabled to transmit the PI line to the printer l 2 5 Selection This option is added to be compatible with a special IGP X00 customization Usually if Interleaved 2 5 bar codes have an odd number of digits a leading zero is inserted in front of the data However this special IGP X00 customization gives you the option of adding a space character at the end of the bar code instead e Leading Zero factory default A leading zero is inserted in front of the data e Trailing Space A space is inserted at the end of the data instead
347. ormation about using the NIC refer to the Network Interface Card User s Manual Offline Process Disable factory default When set to disable the printer does not process network data while offline Enable When set to enable the printer continues to process but not print the current network parallel job while the printer is offline until the printer s buffer is full WLAN ADDRESS WLAN ADDRESS from page 93 IP Address IP Address IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Subnet Mask SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG1 SEG2 000 000 000 000 000 000 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Subnet Mask Subnet Mask Gateway Gateway Gateway SEG3 SEG4 Address SEG1 Address SEG2 Address SEG3 000 000 000 000 000 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Gateway MAC Address DHCP E BootP Address SEG4 000 XXXXXXXXXXXX Disable Disable 0 255 Enable Enable Notes Factory Default 1 This menu appears only if a Wireless Option is installed 2 You cannot change this value it is a display only item 249 Chapter 3 _WLANADDRESS 250 WLAN ADDRESS Submenus IP Address This item allows you to set the IP Address for the TCP IP protocol in four three digit segments SEG1 through SEGA If the IP Address is assigned by BootP ARP or DHCP it is dynamic and read only The
348. ormation on the products and services currently available in your area Any reference to an Printronix product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Printronix product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any Printronix intellectual property rights may be used instead However it is the user s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non Printronix product program or service Printronix may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquires in writing to Printronix Inc 15345 Barranca Parkway Irvine CA 92618 U S A The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law PRINTRONIX PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein
349. ost computer that uses either a coax or a twinax data interface The printer may be ordered with the coax twinax option installed or it can be field installed by an authorized service representative Wireless NIC 802 11b g wireless The Wireless NIC provides 802 11b connectivity The card provides wireless connectivity without expensive cabling and reconfigurations required from a wired network PNE standard with the wireless NIC is a printer management tool IPDS for Use with an ethernet or Twinax Host Interface This option supports the IPDS language to allow a LAN connection as well as a direct connection of the printer to an IBM host computer that uses the twinax data interface This option is applicable to non SL printers The printer may be ordered with this option installed and the required hardware to support it or it can be field installed by an authorized service representative The printer must have an ethernet or Coax Twinax interface and a 300 DPI printhead installed to support this field installed option 342 Interf ion General Purpose Input Ouput GPIO GPIO is both hardware and software The hardware is the actual IO board to be mounted in the printer and the software is the GPIO Manager which is part of PNE The GPIO hardware is a printed circuit board containing optically isolated inputs and outputs as well as relays The GPIO software is both a printer resident GPIO event parser and a PC based GPIO manager that
350. ot acceptable Run Manual Calibrate again CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel Off Checksum Failure Yes Run Calibrate was attempted with Peel Off Media Handling selected NOTE You can perform Auto Calibrate in Peel Off mode if Cal in Peel Mode Enable Be prepared to catch labels during Auto Calibrate The validator detected that the barcode fails checksum or is missing the checksum digit Select another Media Handling option in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu Enable Cal in Peel Mode in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu NOTE Admin User must Enable Verify that the checksum digit exists in the barcode and that it is the correct value 312 Fault Messages Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution CLEARING Yes Emulation software No action required PROGRAM successfully loaded FROM FLASH into printer RAM and the checksum matched The old program is now being deleted from flash memory CONTRAST TOO Yes Data validation error 1 Adjust heat or change LOW symbol contrast media Check media 2 Disable symbol contrast error reports CUTTER FAULT Yes 1 Cutter assemblyis 1 Place the cutter assembly Jam or Cut Fail not in the closed in the closed up position position 2 Clear obstruction from the 2 Cutter option was cutter assembly not sea to full cut 3 Insure media thickness is pas C ATUS within
351. ou noted in step 9 and XXX XXX XXX XXX S the IP address of the printer This command takes the file on the hard drive and copies it as a binary file into the flash memory on the printer controller board NOTE If the software does not download use the Firmware Download Utility page 266 Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller PCBA incompletely loaded and the printer may not boot up 269 Chapter 4 Downloading Software through the NIC using FTP 14 15 16 17 18 While the file is copied into memory the printer LCD informs you of the download process and status When the new software has successfully downloaded into flash memory and the printer has reset itself set the printer power switch to O Off Remove the CD from the host computer and store it with the printer If required reconnect the data input cable s to the printer Set the printer power switch to On Using the configuration printout s you made in step 1 on page 269 restore the printer configurations Downloading Sotware Kroug Me Me USING PIE ___ IMPORTANT 270 To download software through the NIC you need the IP Address of the printer and the flash memory must contain basic printer code If a download was interrupted e g by a power outage you must download software through the parallel port See Downloading Software if Flash Contains O
352. ou run an Auto Calibrate again This will raise the Gap Mark threshold high enough so that the printer will not falsely use the antenna as the gap top of form Media Sensor Position 4mm FEED 1023 0767 0511 Paper Out 441 F Gap 289 J a klea 0255 183414a Detected Amplitude Indicates Type of Gap Mark Detected Amplitude of the Gap Sensing Selected of the Antenna Advanced Gap Sensing Running Media Profile This figure shows a Media Profile printout of a smart label where Gap Mark Sensor is set to Advanced Gap in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu In this example the gap threshold value the printer selected represented by the Gap Mark dotted line is too close to the baseline die cut label If there is an increase in noise or the opacity of the liner or ribbon the printer may falsely use the noise as the gap top of form Media Sensor Position 4mm FEED 1023 0767 0511 Paper Out 301 0255 Adv Gap 120 4 ER VVV 0000 183415a Indicates Type of Gap Mark Sensing Selected Baseline die cut label Detected Amplitude Detected Amplitude of the Gap To avoid this problem increase the Threshold Range value to 60 in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu the default is 50 then run an Auto Calibrate again Cross ref to Auto Calibrate NOTE Any changes to Threshold R
353. ount of ribbon remaining by performing a forward or reverse move The options include e Standard factory default Normal forward and reverse ribbon calibration Forward Only Forward only ribbon calibration NOTE When GPIO Print amp Apply is set to Enable Ribbon Calibrate is set to Forward Only This automatic setting of the Ribbon Calibrate menu occurs only once per power cycle and only if the menu is changed with the control panel Reverse Speed This option sets the speed at which the media moves in reverse direction The range is 1 to 6 ips in increments of 1 ips The factory default is 2 ips NOTE Speeds above 2 ips may cause ribbon smudging depending on ribbon and media Vertical DPI Adjust Adjusts the vertical print resolution This can be used to compress or expand all printed forms by small amounts When a 203 DPI printhead is installed the range is 195 to 210 When a 300 DPI printhead is installed the range is 290 to 310 The factory default for a 203 DPI printhead is 203 The factory default for a 300 DPI printhead is 300 CALIBRATE CTRL MEDIA CONTROL Submenus CALIBRATE CTRL from page 85 Gap Mark Auto Media Sensed Gap Mark Paper Out Sensor Calibrate Profile Distance Thresh Thresh Disable Run Calibrate Print Profile 0 00 inches 2 0000 to 1023 0000 to 1023 Mark Gap Advanced Gap Advanc
354. ounterclockwise to move it left Check the pressure block positioning by printing the Grey test pattern 1 Press the PAUSE key until OFFLINE appears on the LCD 2 Press the TEST PRINT key until Printer Tests Grey displays 53 Chapter 2 Position the media sensors In either of the 54 grey shaded areas Printing Adjustments 3 Press the key to start the Grey test pattern The pattern will start and continue to print Press J again to stop printing Check the test pattern If necessary reposition the pressure blocks to obtain a uniform print density across the media width In most cases only the right pressure block may need to be adjusted 6 Whenever you reposition a pressure block run the Grey test pattern to verify the print pattern is acceptable Positioning the Media Sensors Your printer is equipped with upper and lower media sensors that detect the top of form position on media with label length indicators gaps notches holes or black marks These sensors also detect when a Paper Out condition exists The media sensors should not be placed in the path of media features that could cause false gap detection or paper out faults Such features are dark pre printing rounded die cut label corners vertical gaps associated with side by side labels and extraneous cut outs as shown below ACME PARTS i Dark Pre printing ACME PARTS Extraneous Cut out
355. ous media sensing desired Active selected fromthe printer tests parallel port for the media IGP emulation PRINTER monitor and related typeinstalledand other emulations CONTROLmenu record printer parameters perform media and various appear here performance sensor printer operating These calibration parameters emulations relate to graphics languages particular printers and optional host interface protocols SERIAL USB ETHERNET ETHERNET PORT PORT PORT ADDRESS gt Select various Selects various Selects various Sets the ethernet serial port related USB port related ethernet port address parameters parameters related parameters Press to select the next main menu Press J or to move within each main menu NOTES 1 This menu appears only if an RFID encoder is installed See the RFID Labeling Reference Manual 2 This menu appears only if a Validator is installed See the Online Data Validator User s Manual 82 ETHERNET OPTIONAL OPTIONAL PRINTER PARAMETER PORTS FEATURES MGMT Select optional Select optional Select PNE port Host Features such as type and port interfaces DATE for Real number Time Clock Press to select the next main menu Press J or to move within each main menu Chapter 3 Main Menu Main Menu Print Intensity Print Speed Print Mode Media Handling Paper Feed Shift Label Length L
356. perator request to the host when the printer is put back online NOTE Selecting PA2 again PA2 DISABLED appears on the operator panel or selecting PA1 will reset the pending PA2 function Page Rotation This option rotates the physical IPDS page The options are 0 90 180 and 270 The factory default is 0 PDF Size Comp This option is for compatability of the font size of the barcode printable data field on the old build e Enable Matches the font size of the old build e Disable factory default Uses the normal font size PGL Normal This option determines whether PGL passes the text data in Normal mode according to LP or whether PGL will print the text data itself e LP Menu factory default PGL will pass the text data to LP only in the default setting state 6 LPI default character set and font attribute e PGL Menu PGL will always print the text data itself PI Slew Range You can specify how many lines the paper will feed e 15 A paper slew of 1 15 will move 1 15 lines A paper slew of 0 will move 1 line e 16 factory default A paper slew of 0 15 will move 1 16 lines 211 Chapter 3 212 EPSON FX SETUP Position Aft FF Allows you to select the location of the print position after a Form Feed command is sent e Off factory default Sets the printer to print at position 2 of the first print line on the next form e On Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first pri
357. perforated media e Top part of an image lost when printing in head first orientation The options for Gap Windowing are Disable and Enable e Disable factory default When the leading edge of a gap is detected the printer continuously looks for the leading edge of the next label and uses itas the TOF position Perforations or unusual media discrepancies within the gap can cause inaccurate TOF detection e Enable When the leading edge of a gap is detected the printer ignores the first 90 of the gap length value specified in the Gap Length menu option The result is that cross perforations or unusual media discrepancies within the gap are filtered out allowing the printer to reliably detect the actual leading edge of the next label and use it as the TOF position CALIBRATE CTRL Submenus Gap Length Gap Length is the actual length height of a label gap measured in 01 inch increments The range is 0 05 to 1 00 inches NOTE You must enter the correct Gap Length If the Gap Length is too long the image will shift down from the leading edge TOF of the label The factory default is 0 12 inches Cal in Peel Mode This option allows you to perform a calibration Auto Calibrate or Pwr Up Auto Cal in Peel Off Media Handling mode e Disable factory default The printer will not permit calibration and a CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel Off message will briefly display Additionally if Pwr Up Auto Cal is enabled the
358. pi Grap DP 10 cpi Grap LQ 10 cpi Sci DP 10 cpi Sci DP 12 cpi Sci LQ 10 cpi Standard Arabic Sets Cyrillic Sets European Greek Sets Hebrew Sets Sets Sets ASMO 449 Cyrillic 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek Hebrew Old ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Code Page 852 ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 Hebrew DEC ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek Latin 1 Hebrew MSDOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek Win CP 1255 MSDOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek Sakr CP714 Cyrillic 7 bit Slavic 1250 Greek 851 Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 IBM CP864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 IBM CP1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO Arabic Lam One Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO Arabic Lam Two Polish POL1 Win CP1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 1098 Farsi 1285 cP 858 EURO Turkish Sets UTF 8 Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 Data Gen Turk CP 774 DEC Turkish CP 775 IBM Turkish ISO 8859 4 Siemens Turkish PTT Turkish IBC Turkish inati 7 Bull Turkish IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin1 __ DEC Mult AS400 Turkish Lo Unisys Turkish Primary Subset ASCII USA Primary Subset ASCII USA NCR Turkish ASCII USA EBCDIC ASCII USA French PST Turkish French German German UNIS 1 Turkish German Swedish English Code Page 853 English Danish Norw Danish INFO Tur
359. printer will not perform calibration at power up e Enable Auto Calibrate can be performed from the front panel and if the Pwr Up Auto Cal option is enabled calibration will be performed at power up NOTE Calibration in Peel Off mode does not stop and wait for you to remove peeled labels Therefore be prepared to remove the labels as they are automatically peeled Min Calib Delta Minimum Calibrate Delta changes the minimum threshold value the sensor s require to detect the difference between the label and a gap notch hole or black mark This allows bolder gaps such as notches or holes to be used as the TOF while intermediate gaps liner can be ignored Increasing the Min Calib Delta makes the sensor s less sensitive to intermediate gaps and noise Decreasing the Min Calib Delta makes the sensor s more sensitive for detecting gaps on low contrast media where there is very little difference between the label and the gap liner The range is from 048 to 200 NOTE When Gap Mark Sensor Disable Gap or Mark the default is 48 When Gap Mark Sensor Advanced Gap or Advanced Notch the default is 80 133 Chapter 3 134 CALIBRATE CTRL Use Label Length Determines whether or not the Label Length value set in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu is used during Auto Calibrate e Enable factory default The Label Length value set in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu is used in the calibrate algorithm This ca
360. ption USB 242 Busy on Strobe option 232 Busy signal Centronics parallel interface 283 Byte mode 284 C C T PORT menu 241 submenus 241 C128 Mode Comp option 187 C39 Compatbl option 187 Cable length Centronics parallel interface 282 IEEE 1284 parallel 286 RS 232 interface 287 RS 422 interface 287 serial 287 Cal in Peel Mode option 133 CALIBRATE CTRL menu 127 submenus 128 Calibrating media sensors 60 396 CALIBRATION Warning fault message 312 Calibration warning fault message 312 Cancel IGP DCU option 187 Cancel Key option 142 CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel Off fault message 312 Centronics acknowledge signal 283 busy signal 283 data lines 1 through 8 signals 283 data strobe signal 283 interface signals 283 online signal 283 Paper Empty signal 283 Paper Instruction PI signal 283 parallel interface 282 pin assignments 282 Change Case option 187 Changing printer settings 75 Channel option 254 Character Group option Character Group option Character Group option Character Group option Matrix 191 Character Set option 193 Checksum Failure fault message 312 Cleaning cutter option 72 exterior 68 interior 68 media damper 72 media sensor 70 platen roller 70 printhead 69 the printer 68 Clear Error Log option 227 Clear To Send CTS signal RS 232 serial interface 288 CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH fault message 313 Clip Page option 121 Clock Skew S
361. r SERIAL This command downloads a name for the configuration specified by Cfg Cfg must be 1 8 This command resets all of the configuration names to their default values MPI_SELECT MPI PNE_PORT Port This command selects the active Management Protocol Interface MPI Currently there are two selections UCP and PXML This command selects the port that the PNE will use to communicate to the printer The valid ports are e DISABLE e HOST_SERIAL If Host I O is set to Auto Switching or Serial the port defaults to Debug Serial e DEBUG_SERIAL e ETHERNET e USB NOTE If ETHERNET is selected but not enabled the selection will revert to DISABLE 364 Command General Commands Table 32 General PTX_SETUP Commands Sub Command Parameter Description CONFIG PANEL LOCK UNLOCK This command locks the operator out of the printer s configuration menu This command unlocks the printer s configuration menu and allows the operator access to the menus By default the menu is unlocked PNE_PORT_NUM PXML_PORT_NUM Port Number Port Number This command sets the Port Number the PNE uses to communicate to the printer if the PNE Port was set to Ethernet This command causes the printer to automatically reboot This command sets the Port Number the PXML and UCP will use to communicate to the printer if the PXML Port is set to Ethernet This c
362. r up PY option 212 Power up X option 212 Power Up Config option 103 105 Power up configuration specifying 78 Power up State option 141 PPI TGL 12 PPI ZGL 12 Preamble option 254 Pre Peel Adjust option 120 Pre Peel Mode option 120 Primary Subset option 212 Prime Signal option Parallel Port 231 405 Print Char Set option 213 Print Config option 105 Print Direction option 118 Print Error Log option 227 Print File List option 144 PRINT HEAD COLD See Manual fault message 327 PRINT HEAD HOT fault message 327 PRINT HEAD UP Close Print Head fault message 327 Print Intensity option 96 108 Print Mode option 97 109 Print quality 294 Print Speed option 96 109 Printer alarms 308 changing settings 75 configuration parameters 73 dynamic print control 15 installation 19 interfaces 281 model specifications 11 options 341 printer tests 226 printhead replacement 296 problems and solutions 300 self test 291 set up 17 the printing process 14 warranty 393 PRINTER CONTROL menu 135 submenus 137 PRINTER HOT fault message 327 PRINTER MGMT 262 submenus 262 Printer PI option 213 Printer Select option 213 Printer Status option 239 Printer tests auto calibrate 226 barcode demo 226 checkerboard 226 406 combo test 226 current config 226 Ethernet test page 226 grey 226 grid 226 left test 226 right test 226 validator report 226 Printer Tests option 226 PRI
363. r 5 EE Print Mode Cycles through the or Direct choices 6 J Print Mode Selects the Direct Direct transfer mode Figure 2 Moving within the Configuration Menu Selecting a Menu Option To select an option you need to press the key By default however the key is locked when the printer is turned on to prevent accidental changes to the configuration menu If you press the key when the key is locked the message ENTER SWITCH LOCKED displays on the LCD for one second and the value will not be selected To unlock the key press the 4 and keys simultaneously This toggles the ENTER LOCK function e If this function is performed while the key is locked the message ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED displays for one second and the key will be unlocked e If this function is performed while the key is unlocked the message ENTER SWITCH LOCKED displays for one second and the key will be locked When you press the key with the key unlocked you select the value or option that displays An asterisk displays after the value you selected and the configuration is changed immediately IMPORTANT Changing Printer Settings This change takes effect for all subsequent data and operations for the printer as soon as the key is pressed and the asterisk is displayed The configuration change s stay in effect only while the printer is powered on When the power is turned off all
364. r Tests Select LPI Test Count Sabie 1 AD Typeface Software Build PI Ignored 1 Word Length Character Group Feature File 2 Buffer Size in K Stop Bits Character Set Hex Dump Mode Auto Trickle Parity Epson Set Auto Dump Trickle Time Data Protocol Horizontal DPI Print Error Log Timeout Buffer Size in K Vertical DPI Clear Error Log Report Status Trickle Time Prop Spacing FLASH Installed Switch Out On Timeout Italic Print DRAM Installed Prime Signal Report Status 8 Slashed Zero Ptr On Time Data Polarity 1 Data Term Ready Lefi Margin i Ptr Media Dist Resp Polarity Request to Send Right Margin Head Print Dist Busy on Strobe Poll Character Top Margin Head On Time Latch Data On Poll Response Bottom Margin Reset Head Data Offline Process Idle Response Print Char Set Head Type One Char Enquiry Define CR code Printer Status Auto LF Framing Errors Define LF code Offline Process Printer Select 20 CPI Condensed Bold Alt Set 80 9F Text Position Host Command Reset Cmd CFG Ld Form Length inches gt Form Length mm gt Form Length lines a Form Width inches gt 7 Form Width mm gt 7 Form Width char NOTES Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Available only when the Centronics option is set to Enable in the Port Type submenu of PARALLEL PORT 2 Menu shown only if Feature File has been loaded 3 Available only when Admin User is set to E
365. r detected a false PAPER OUT when changing from Advanced Gap or Advanced Notch to Gap or Mark sensing or vice versa press the PAUSE key and run Auto Calibrate 325 Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution PAPER OUT Yes In the CT emulation Load media and run a print TIMEOUT with a coax interface a test If the message persists time out message is contact your authorized service sentto the hostif paper representative is not loaded within 10 minutes after PAUSE was pressed to clear a paper out fault PARITY ERROR Yes Parity error serial Check your serial host interface interface parameter settings If necessary change them so they match the settings of the attached host PLEASE WAIT Yes The printer is Wait until message clears performing an operation that takes some time POOR SCANNING Yes Data validation failure Adjust heat speed pressure Check Head amp Heat The ratio between bar code elements is too small POOR SCANNING Yes Data validation failure Check for ribbon wrinkle Roll Check media The bar code is only wrinkled area onto take up good in small bands spindle that are difficult to scan POOR SCANNING Yes No Data validation failure 1 Check paper and ribbon to Inspect head Defects failure make sure they are clean blemishes with the bar unwri
366. rd that ADAPTER card is incompatible you installed may be NOT COMPATIBLE with the printer incompatible with the dual NIC software interface in the printer Verify the approved brand and model number of the radio card with your printer service provider and install the correct version If using the correct radio card does not resolve this problem call your service provider for further support 331 Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors 332 A Specifications Print Method Table 19 Printing Specifications T5204 T5304 T5206 T5306 T5208 T5308 SL5204 SL5304 SL5206 SL5306 Print Resolution dpi 203 300 203 300 203 300 Min Dot Size sq in 005 0033 005 0033 005 0033 127 mm 083 mm 127 mm 083 mm 127 mm 083 mm Bar Code Modulus mils Picket Fence 3 3 110 5 127 3 3 110 Ladder 10 110 10 127 10 110 Max Print Speed ips 10 8 10 8 8 6 Max Slew Speed ips 10 10 10 10 10 10 Max Print Width in 4 1 4 1 6 6 6 6 8 5 8 5 104 1 mm 104 1 mm 167 6mm 167 6mm 215 9 215 9 mm mm Flash Memory MB 16 16 16 Standard Maximum DRAM MB 64 64 64 Standard Maximum Max Print Length in at 99 99 99 99 99 99 max width std DRAM 1 2 2515 mm 2515mm 2515 mm 2515mm 2515mm 2515 mm NOTES 1 These figures are approximate and depend upon the active emulation 2 These values may not be supported at maximu
367. rforations are ideally positioned at the tear bar edge by using the correct Paper Feed Shift value in the QUICK SETUP menu 322 Fault Messages Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message PEREA Explanation Solution LOADING Yes The new emulation No action required PROGRAM program is loading into FROM PORT XX printer RAM XX indicates how much of the program has loaded LOADING Yes A program is getting No action required PROGRAM loaded into flash INTO FLASH MENU MODE Yes Normal message that No action required QUICK SETUP displays when you first press the MENU key to place tje printer in Menu mode when no validator option is installed NON VOLATILE Yes No The printer assigns a 1 Ifthe message appears at MEMORY FAILED certain amount of power up call your simulated NVRAM for storage of saved configurations Large emulations reduce the amount of space available for saving configurations which means that sometimes fewer than eight configurations can be saved If this message appears when saving a configuration it means the printer is out of memory Previously saved configurations will still be available but the one that was saved when the message appeared is not in memory If this message appears at power up it means the flash memory is defective 2 Ifthe message appears 3 Limit the number of saved authorized customer service repres
368. rinter powers up in the offline state This selection must be saved as a power up configuration to be used PTX Setup SFCC Allows you to choose the hex value of the ASCII character you wish to use as the SFCC for the PTX SETUP command Valid hex values are 01 FF The factory default value is hex 21 which corresponds to the character 141 Chapter 3 142 PRINTER CONTROL Cancel Key e Disable Enable When enabled the key may be used in offline mode to clear all data in the print buffer and deleted data will not be printed The factory default is Disable When the Coax Twinax interface is installed the factory default is Enable Rev Status Port This option defines the interface being used to receive the emulation status command e Automatic factory default When selected the status command is sent to the printer with the print data through the active host interface e Serial When selected the status command is sent to the printer through the serial interface regardless of the active host interface Ret Status Port This option selects the port for the Return Status Commands i e STATUS PGL and HS PPI ZGL to send the status data back to the Host The options are Automatic factory default Serial E NET Stat Port USB IEEE 1284 Disable and E NET Data Port Compatibility This parameter allows you to make T5R series thermal printers compatible with other printers When trying to pr
369. rk Threshold level position the lower media sensor to avoid the image or increase the Threshold Range percent value in the Calibrate CTRL menu Run Auto Calibrate again and Media Profile to verify there is an improvement 303 Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors Table 17 Printer Problems and Solutions continued Symptom Solution Explanation e Loss of one or more serialized labels within a print job e Start of image is printed in the middle of the gap e The top part of the image is lost when printing with Head First orientation selected In the CALIBRATE CTRL menu set Gap Windowing to Enable Set Gap Length to equal the physical gap length of the media installed The range is 0 05 to 1 00 inches The likely cause of these symptoms is that Clip Page Enable and a cross perforation radical fold or flaw in the liner has caused the media sensor to detect this as the leading edge TOF of the new label or end of label EOF or both Smears or voids in printed image 1 2 10 11 Clean the printhead Make sure the printhead temperature Print Intensity is not too high Change the Print Intensity value in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu See Print Intensity on page 108 Verify that the printhead pressure blocks are positioned correctly to match the media width installed See Printhead Pressure Block Adjustments on page 53 Make sur
370. rm Adjust Works with CREATE NAME 0 Disable Forms printed in EXECUTE mode do not change the physical label size Therefore the size of the form defined in CREATE mode must fit within the current label dimensions or errors may occur NOTE Changing the form length via the EXECUTE command changes the LP Emulation logical dimensions The difference between Var Length and Var Dynamic Len is as follows With CREATE NAME 0 and the following parameters e 10 dynamic fields defined in CREATE mode AFO AF1 AF9 with different positions e three dynamic fields are used in EXECUTE mode provided with data when Var Length is selected the label length is based on the longest printed element among the 10 dynamic fields defined in CREATE mode When Var Dynamic Len is selected the label length is based on the longest printed element among the three dynamic fields defined in EXECUTE mode If there is static data in the form the static data position is taken into consideration when determining the longest printed element Host Form Length IPDS Enables or disables changing the form length by the host Disable factory default The host is unable to change the form length Enable The host may change the form length Emulation Submenus Host Form Length VGL Sets the printer page size e Enable factory default Sets the printer label size equal to Label Length from the host form length command For more inf
371. rmines whether scalable characters are sized based on normal scaling or based on the size of block characters If the option Block is set then the scalable character are made to be the same size as block characters in the old IGP X00 printers The options are Normal factory default and Block SCS Buffer Cntrl This option functions like the Early Print Complete feature Early Print Cmpl Coax TN3270 on page 197 but is for SCS only e Don t Wait factory default The printer does not wait until the buffer is printed before sending the print complete back to the host e Wait Until Done The printer waits until the buffer has printed before sending the print complete back to the host NOTE If set to Wait Until Done printer speed may be reduced Select Char Instructs the IGP which decimal character 0 255 to ignore from the host The range is 0 255 and the factory default is 0 Select CPI This item selects the characters per inch CPI value The options are 10 0 12 0 13 3 15 0 17 1 and 20 0 CPI The factory default is 10 0 CPI 215 Chapter 3 216 EPSON FX SETUP Select LPI This is the number of lines to be printed per inch For example at 6 Ipi there is 1 6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line The options are 6 0 8 0 and 10 3 LPI The factory default is 6 0 LPI Select SFCC PGL You can specify which decimal code 1 255 will be used as the Special Functi
372. rom any condensation to avoid corrosion 1 Rotate the blue deck lock lever clockwise to open the pivoting deck and remove the media and ribbon if installed 2 Clean the printhead by gently rubbing an Isopropyl Alcohol Wipe or the felt tip of a Printhead Cleaning Pen across the printheads light brown heating elements area Allow the printhead to dry for one minute before reloading ribbon or media NOTE Even after a thorough cleaning with a Printhead Cleaning Pen or Alcohol Wipe you may still see printouts with voids or streaks This may be the result of baked on ribbon resin that can be hard to remove when normal cleaning cycles are not maintained Try using a Thermal Printer Cleaning Card or Sheet When using a cleaning card or sheet follow the directions on the packaging Thermal printer cleaning cards and sheets are available on the internet 69 Chapter 2 70 CAUTION Cleaning Platen Roller Cleaning Label parts media dust and adhesive residue on the platen can degrade print quality and cause voids in your label image e Cleaning Agent Use an isopropyl alcohol wipe or small amount of isopropyl alcohol on a clean cloth to clean the platen roller e Schedule Clean the platen roller each time you clean the printhead 3 Clean the platen roller by first removing any label parts from its surface by hand Then use an isopropyl alcohol wipe or clean cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol to remove any remaining paper
373. rt Number PNE Port Timeout Status Port Numb Mgmt Port Number 94 GPIO CONTROL Refer to the GPIO User s Guide Notes 1 Appears only if the Real Time Clock option is installed 2 Appears only if a Symbol LA4121 RF card is installed 3 Appears only if a Cisco card or Motorola LA5127 RF card is installed QUICK SETUP QUICK SETUP from page 84 Print _ Print bt Print tat Media Paper Label Intensity Speed Mode Handling Feed Length 3 6 ips Transfer Tear Off Strip 0 00 inches 2 4 or 6 inches 2 4 15 to 15 1ipsto10ips Direct Tear Off 1 00 to Xinches3 00 1 to 99 0 inches Peel Off Cut Continuous p Label Ver Image Hor Image Orientation Gap Mark Width Shift Shift Sensor 4 1 6 6 or 8 5 inches 4 0 00 inches 0 00 inches 2 Portrait Disable 00 1 to 8 5 inches 4 1 00 to X inches 3 1 00 to 1 00 inches Landscape Mark Inv Portrait Gap Inv Landscape Advanced Gap Advanced Notch Auto Validator Active IGP XXX Save Power Up Calibrate Funct 6 Emul Diaanostics8 7 Config Config gt Run Calibrate Enable PGL See footnote 8 1 Factory Disable ZGL 1 8 1 8 TGL IGL STGL DGL IEGL MGL VGL Notes Factory Default 1 Maximum value depends on the printer model width 4 6 or 8 inches and printhead 203 or 300 dpi
374. s labels with poor gap media dynamic range and smart labels that have embedded RFID tags Once Media Profile is initiated the printer will continue to advance media and print the profile in landscape orientation until you press to stop printing NOTE Verify the CALIBRATE CTRL menu Gap Mark Sensor option Gap Mark Advanced Gap Advanced Notch or Disable matches the installed media See Sensing Different Media Types on page 59 You will need a minimum installed label width of two inches to support the Profile printout Ensure the media sensors are horizontally positioned to permit sensing of the label length indicators See Positioning the Media Sensors on page 54 Ensure the Print Mode option selected in the QUICK SETUP menu matches the media installed Select Direct for heat sensitive media no ribbon required or Transfer for thermal transfer media ribbon required Press to place the printer in Menu mode Press 4 and together until ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED displays Press until CALIBRATE CTRL displays PON continue to print the profile until you press J The printer will advance media and continue to print a dynamic profile image depicting the relationship of the label and any label length indicators detected 5 Press The printer will stop printing 6 Press the PAUSE key until OFFLINE displays NOTE The Gap Mark and Paper Out Threshold values shown on the Pro
375. s Serial Matrix Epson FX 183 Ambient light Validator failure fault message 311 Ant Diversity option 254 Antenna option 254 Append Rotated option 184 ASCII Data Port option 247 Auth Method option 255 Auto Calibrate option 102 128 Auto calibrate running 60 Auto Dump option 227 Auto FF at PN option 184 Auto Label Width option 117 Auto LF option P Series P Series XQ 184 Auto LF option Serial Matrix Proprinter XL Epson FX 184 Auto Locking option 144 Auto Map Select option 114 Auto Save Configuration 77 Auto Save option 106 Auto Skip at End option 185 Auto switching 281 Auto Trickle option 230 Auto Uppercase option 185 Autoeject option VGL 185 Autowrap option 185 BAD NVM CALL 1 311 BAD NVM CALL 2 311 BAD NVM CALL 3 311 BAD NVM CALL 4 311 BAD NVM CALL A 311 395 BAD VFU CHANNEL fault message 311 BAR CODE IMPROPER Data Format fault message 311 BAR CODE QUIET Zone too small fault message 311 Barcode var option 185 Batch Counter option 148 Batch Rewind mode 43 Baud Rate option 234 Bold Chars option 147 Bold option 186 BootP option 245 250 Bottom Margin option 186 Boundary Check option 186 Btm Margin Ctl option 186 BUFFER OVERFLOW fault message 311 BUFFER OVERRUN fault message 312 Buffer Print option 186 Buffer Reprint option 186 Buffer Size in K option Parallel Port 230 Buffer Size in K option Serial 237 Buffer Size in K o
376. s debris and adhesive on these components can ultimately travel to the printhead area and therefore should be cleaned and examined each time the printhead is cleaned and in the order shown Printhead Cleaning As you use your printer the printhead may become dirty with ribbon residue and label adhesives which can result in poor print quality Keeping the printhead clean will help maintain its life e Cleaning Agent Clean the printhead using a Printhead Cleaning Pen Printronix PN 203502 002 or an Isopropyl Alcohol Wipe Printronix PN 254945 901 e Schedule Clean the printhead each time you install a new roll of ribbon thermal transfer print mode or when you install a new roll or box of media direct thermal print mode If you have just been printing allow one minute for the printhead to cool down to avoid burns from accidental printhead contact Avoid electrostatic damage to the printhead by first making hand contact with an unpainted part of the printer frame or by using an anti static wrist strap grounded to the printer frame e Do not use hard sharp or abrasive objects to remove residue from the printhead e Do not touch the heating element surface of the printhead with your hands to avoid printhead corrosion Any accidental skin contact with the element surface should be immediately followed by a thorough cleaning with a Printhead Cleaning Pen or an Isopropyl Alcohol Wipe e The heating element surface should be free f
377. s are transmitted with no parity from the printer Power Table 27 Power Source and Grounding Power Source 115 or 230 VAC 50 60Hz switching power supply Grounding Unit must be connected to a properly grounded receptacle Table 28 Power Consumption 4 inch printers 6 inch printers 8 inch printers 203 dpi 300 dpi 203 dpi 300 dpi 203 dpi 300 dpi 10 ips 8 ips 10 ips 8 ips 8 ips 6 ips Energy Power Saver Mode 9 Watts 9 Watts 9 Watts 9 Watts 9 Watts 9 Watts Standby 40 Watts 40 Watts 40 Watts 40 Watts 40 Watts 40 Watts 25 Print Density 130 Watts 130 Watts 195 Watts 160 Watts 195 Watts 140 Watts 50 Print Density 190 Watts 195 Watts 340 Watts 280 Watts 310Watts 250 Watts 338 Environmental Environmental Table 29 Environmental Information Operating Temperature 41 F to 104 F 5 C to 40 C Storage Temperature 40 F to 150 F 40 C to 60 C Operating Humidity 20 to 85 non condensing Storage Humidity 5 to 85 non condensing Ventilation Free air movement Dust Non conducting non corrosive Physical Table 30 Physical Dimensions T5X04 SL5X04 T5X06 SL5X06 T5X08 Outside Dimensions in 13H x 11 7W x 13H x 13 4W x 13H x 15 4W x 20 5D 20 5D 20 5D Weight Ibs kg 36 6 Ibs 16 6 kg 40 Ibs 18 14 kg 43 Ibs 19 5 kg 37 2 Ibs 16 87 kg 40 6 Ibs 18 42 kg Add 1 75 D with paper
378. s illustration The upper and lower sensors are designed to function with or without ribbon installed The upper sensor and lower sensor are used together to detect notches or holes in media with a black or dark underside This combination can be found on tag stock that has a black vertical line along one edge on the underside of the label interrupted by a notch or hole used as the label length indicator 1 Position the lower sensor directly under the center of the notch or hole and then place the upper sensor directly over the lower sensor 2 Check the position of the lower sensor by looking through the long narrow opening in the media guard Use the visible red light emitting from the lower sensor as a reference pointer 3 Use the sensor handle to manually position the sensor to the center of the notch or hole in the media Then use the handle on the upper sensor to position it directly above the lower sensor NOTE When using ribbon you may need to slide the ribbon to one side to adjust the upper sensor 4 Select Advanced Notch in the Gap Mark Sensor submenu under the CALIBRATE CTRL menu See Sensing Different Media Types on page 59 5 Perform an Auto Calibrate See Running Auto Calibrate on page 60 Sensing Different Media Types Sensing Different Media Types The printers media sensors can detect the different types of label length indicators on a large variety of media types This is accomplished by
379. s only if a Symbol LA 5127 802 11 b g RF card is installed 6 Appears only if 802 11b only RF card is installed 7 This option appears only if a Symbol 4121 radio card is installed 8 This menu appears only if a Cisco Aironet 350 radio card is installed Chapter 3 _WLAN PARAMS WLAN PARAMS from page 251 __ WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 Bytes Byte9 Byte10 Byte11 Byte12 Byte13 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 2 Format Width BYTE1 BYTE2 BYTES BYTE4 Hexadecimal 128 Bits ASCII 40 Bits WEP Key 2 WEP Key 2 4 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 24 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 2 BYTES BYTE6 BYTE7 BYTES BYTE9 BYTE10 WEP Key 24 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 BYTE11 BYTE12 BYTE13 Format Width BYTE1 Hexadecimal 128 Bits ASCII 40 Bits WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 BYTE2 BYTES BYTE4 BYTES BYTE6 BYTE7 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 BYTES BYTE BYTE10 BYTE11 BYTE12 BYTE13 WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 Format Width BYTE1 BYTE2 BYTES BYTE4 Hexadecimal 128 Bits
380. s than the installed ribbon width Wide width ribbon does not The Ribbon Width value in the MEDIA CONTROL menu is set take up properly The ribbon too narrow for the ribbon installed Set the Ribbon Width value moves past the platen to match the width of the ribbon installed This will increase the assembly torque on the ribbon take up spindle 308 Printer Alarms The printer has built in alarms that monitor printer status and media stock conditions Alarm messages display indicating the present status of the printer and media stock levels The alarms also indicate if the printer electronics detect an error condition Fault Messages If a fault condition occurs in the printer the status indicator on the control panel flashes on and off and the message display indicates the specific fault Fault messages are summarized in Table 18 Displayed faults fall into one of two categories e Operator correctable e Field service required Operator Correctable Fault Messages For the operator correctable faults follow the suggested corrective action under the solution section of the table After correcting the displayed fault press the PAUSE key to clear the error message and status indicator and resume printing If the fault message reappears power off the printer and wait 15 seconds before powering on the printer again If the error condition persists contact your authorized service representative Fault Messages
381. scribes the host interfaces provided with the printer The printer interface is the point where the data line from the host computer plugs into the printer The interface processes all communications signals and data to and from the host computer Plus with the Auto Switching feature you can configure the printer to accept several interfaces at the same time In addition to descriptions for the multi line interfaces this chapter also provides instructions for configuration of terminating resistors for the parallel interfaces Auto Switching This feature gives the printer the ability to handle multiple data streams sequentially With Auto Switching the printer can service hosts attached to the serial parallel USB ethernet coax and twinax ports as if they were the only interface connected For example if the host computer sends one print job to the RS 232 serial port and a separate print job to the IEEE 1284 parallel port the printer s Auto Switching is able to handle both jobs in the order they were received without the user having to reconfigure the selected interface between jobs Standard Host Interfaces e Centronics parallel e IEEE 1284 parallel bidirectional e Serial Port RS 232 e USB 2 0 Universal Serial Bus e Ethernet Optional Host Interfaces e Coax Twinax e Wireless NIC e RS 422 281 Chapter 5 Centronics Parallel Interface Centronics Parallel Interface Table 12 Centronics Interface Connector
382. section While not every conceivable situation is addressed here you may find some of these tips helpful Contact a qualified service technician for problems that persist or are not covered in this section 291 Chapter 292 6 Troubleshooting Common Situations Improving Processing Time Before looking at solutions for decreasing processing time and increasing throughput it may help to understand what happens during processing When the printer receives a format command it enters the label formatting mode Label formatting requires time to process the label data into the printer buffers The time required varies depending on the complexity of the label format and on the size of the area being printed Once the data has been mapped into memory the printer will start printing as many labels as requested by the quantity command In most cases there is no delay between labels however when using Automatic Label Peel Off or Tear Off media handling the printer stops between each label and waits for the label to be removed Data Exchange Many things can cause data loss or communications problems This section suggests some ways to isolate these problems and determine their cause Handshaking Handshaking is the exchange of signals between two computers or a computer and a peripheral input or output device to indicate the status of the data being transferred In the serial mode the printer uses both hardware and software
383. selecting the correct sensor option Gap Mark Advanced Gap Advanced Notch or Disable under Gap Mark Sensor in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu Figure 9 on page 335 illustrates the different media types and label length indicators used on them 1 Press to place the printer in Menu mode 2 Press 4 and J together until ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED displays 3 Press until CALIBRATE CTRL displays 4 Press 4 until Gap Mark Sensor Advanced Gap the currently enabled option displays 5 Press or until the option that matches the type of label length indicators on the installed media displays Mark Select when using media that has horizontal black marks located on the underside of the label liner or tag stock Gap Select when using media with a liner space between die cut labels or when using tag stock with notches or holes as label length indicators on white background media Advanced Gap Select when using media that has liner gaps between die cut labels with black background Advanced Notch Select when using media with notches or holes that interrupt a black vertical line on the underside of the media Disable Select when using media with no label length indicators no gaps notches holes or black marks or when you want the printer to ignore all existing label length indicators on the installed media NOTE When you select Disable the length of each label is based on the NOTE Label Length value entered
384. serial interface received data RD 288 transmitted data TD 288 407 Running auto calibrate 60 Running manual calibrate 66 Running media profile 62 S Save Char to Fls option 143 Save Config option 103 105 Save Set to Fish option 143 Save auto 77 Saving new configurations 76 Scalable Size option 215 SCS Buffer Cntrl option 215 SECURITY CODE VIOLATION fault message 329 SECURITY VIOLATION fault message 329 Select Char option 215 Select CPI option 215 Select LPI option 216 Select SFCC option 216 Select SFCC option PGL 216 Select SFCC option P Series 216 Select SO Char option 217 Selecting a menu option 74 Self test printer 291 Sensed Distance option 129 Sensing different media types 59 SERIAL PORT menu 233 submenus 234 Serial Port downloading software 266 Series1 1 Char 235 Series1 2 Char 236 Set Label Length option 123 Set Lock Key option 144 Set Text Orientn option 217 Setting printer configuration parameters 73 Setting up the printer 17 SFCC Char option SPC Coax SPC Twinax 217 SFCC d command option 217 Signal Strength option 253 Signals Centronics parallel interface 283 Simple Protocol Converter 138 150 Skip Cmd Prefix option 218 Slash 0 option 218 408 Slashed Zero option 218 Slew Relative option 218 Slew Speed option 118 SMT option 137 SMT Status option 103 Software Build option 227 SOFTWARE ERROR Recycle Power fault message 330 Software handsha
385. service representative 319 Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message EE Explanation Solution IGP PGL ERROR Yes Appears when the Deselect Fault from Error Fault option is Report on the front control selected from Error panel Report in the front panel ILL NVM VALUE 5 Yes Printer firmware code 1 Cycle Power Run the print ILL NVM VALUE 6 error job again If the message ILL NVM VALUE 7 appears load the latest emulation software 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and follow the instructions for Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors on page 299 3 Contact your authorized customer service representative INCOMPATIBLE Yes Tear Off or Peel Off 1 Select a different Media WITH CUTTER Media Handling Handling Mode selection was gt 2 Power off the printer and Anempisd win the remove the cutter option erter optiom sull install the front door installed These modes assembly power on the require that the front printer and select Tear Off door ass eb DS or Peel Off Mode installed to use the Label Taken Sensor INSUFFICIENT RAM Yes No Not enough RAM 1 If the message reappears Reboot memory available for a printer function decrease the Page Mem Adjust value in the PRINTER CONTROL menu and reboot the printer 2 Ifthe
386. sh Sets The factory default is Standard Sets Text Length Text Length is the printable length on the page below the top margin The range is 1 255 and the factory default is 66 Text Position Specifies where the text will be positioned in the line space e Top of Line Text is positioned at the top of the line space 219 Chapter 3 _EPSONFXSETUP e Bottom of Line factory default Text is positioned as if it were at the bottom of a 6 Ipi line space The following example shows both Top of Line and Bottom of Line text positions Dot Row Top of Line Space 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Bottom of 8 LPI Line Space 9 aN 10 g 11 2 Bottom of 6 LPI Line Space 12 D Text Position Text Position Top of Line Bottom of Line Top Margin Defined in linespaces starting from line zero at the top of the page and incrementing from the top down The range is 0 451 linespaces and the factory default is 0 linespaces Translate Table e Default factory default The option is disabled The table is not stored in the real translation table until the option is enabled e Downloaded The option is enabled The LU3 Translation Table is loaded from the buffer into the permanent table Translation Tbl Coax TN3270 Prints SCS and DSC DSE tables of the coax interface s current character set This operation is valid only when the coax interface is selected as the current interface Translation Tbl SPC Coax
387. sion option IPDS 210 Num Auto Labels option 118 O OCR A Chars option 147 OCR B Chars option 147 Offline mode 27 Offline Process option 232 240 248 One Char Enquiry option 239 Online Auto Cal option 132 Online barcode validator 14 Online data validator 341 Online mode 27 Online signal Centronics parallel interface 283 Online Status indicator 23 Operating modes 27 Operation Mode option 253 Operation of FILE_IO command 368 Optimize amp Reboot option 144 Optimized Ratio option 210 OPTION NOT INSTALLED fault message 324 Optional features 13 Optional host interfaces 281 Options dual NIC 342 fonts 13 hardware 341 internal label rewinder 13 internal rewinder 341 IPDS 13 media cutter 13 341 media cutter tray 13 341 memory expansion for non IPDS printers only 13 network interface card 13 NIC 13 online barcode validator 14 341 PPI TGL 12 PPI ZGL 12 printer 341 TN5250 TN3270 14 twinax coax host interface 13 Orientation option 100 112 OVERALL GRADE FAIL fault message 324 Overstrike option 210 Overwrite Files option 143 P P S MISMATCH fault message 327 PA1 option 211 PA2 option 211 PAA option 137 PAA Select Tool option 103 Page Mem Adjust option 145 Page Rotation option 211 Paper Empty PE signal Centronics parallel interface 283 Paper Feed Shift option 97 110 Paper Instruction PI signal Centronics interface 283 PAPER
388. specification cycle due to a jam Wait a few minutes for the 3 Cutter PCBA cutter circuit breaker to detected current automatically reset overload and Press PAUSE to clear the opened circuit fault message and resume breaker on cutter printing PCBA DIAGNOSTICS Yes The printer passed its No action required PASSED memory and hardware initialization tests DIRECT THERMAL Yes This is the normal 1 Remove ribbon from the Remove Ribbon reminder message ribbon supply and ribbon when you change the take up spindles in the Print Mode setting from printer Transfer to Direct in the 2 If ribbon is required for QUICK SETUP or ae MEDIA CONTROL printing change the Print Mode back to Transfer menu DO NOT POWER No This is a standard Do not power off the printer OFF warning message that until downloading is complete displays while the printer is downloading software 313 Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution DOWNLOADING TO Yes VALIDATOR Normal message when the printer is downloading validator firmware No action required NOTE The validator software update can be verified in the F W Revision menu option of the VALIDATOR menu Shown as Example X326 E00 EXE ADDRO Yes An illegal or unsupported instruction was attempted in the application program 1 Cycle Power Run
389. ss option automatically determines the length Short For newer printers which can handle higher transfer rate speeds Long For older printers which cannot handle higher transfer rate speeds Power Mgmt This allows you to set power save mode and sleep time A value specifying the sleep time in milliseconds will be provided If set to zero power save mode will be disabled The range is 0 1000 ms and the factory default is 0 ms WLAN PARAMS Submenus Transmit Power The power level as a percentage of full power The range is 0 100 and the factory default is 100 Internat Mode When enabled the Wireless option adapts to international frequency requirements in Europe The options are Disable factory default and Enable Auth Method The wireless authentication scheme e Open factory default This option allows all devices that have the authentication algorithm number for open system to authenticate e Shared This option enables a four step authentication process using secure or encrypted text by means of WEP e Kerberos Selects Kerberos authentication for use when a Symbol 4121 RF card is installed e LEAP Selects LEAP authentication for use when a Cisco Aironet 350 RF card is installed Default WEP Key This feature enables you to encrypt scramble information for security purposes With this feature you can set up to four encryption keys in either ASCII or hexadecimal format and in either
390. st will begin to service all other host ports looking for data to print The range is from 5 to 60 seconds and the factory default is 10 seconds Report Status When a fault condition occurs in the printer normally only the active port reports the fault to the host With this item enabled the port will report any fault even when it is not the current active port The options are Disable factory default and Enable 241 Chapter 3 USB PORT USB PORT 242 USB PORT from page 92 Buffer Size Timeout Notes 16 10 sec 1 16 1 60 sec Factory Default 32 1 This menu appears only if the USB option is installed 64 USB Port Submenu Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the serial port buffer The range is from 1 to 16 Kbytes 32 Kbytes and 64 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments The factory default is 16 Timeout This item allows you to set the time that the printer when it has not received data from its host will begin to service all other host ports looking for data to print The range is from 1 to 60 seconds and the factory default is 10 seconds ETHERNET PORT Submenu ETHERNET PORT ETHERNET PORT from page 92 Timeout Switch Out On Notes 10 sec Data Timeout x 1 60 sec Session Close Factory Default ETHERNET PORT Submenu Timeout This item allows you to set the time that the printer when it has not received data fro
391. st Printronix full service distributor that carries Printronix genuine supplies please call 1 800 733 1900 or fax 714 368 2354 Supplies design specification and selection are integral to the development of any computer imaging system Printronix s extensive manufacturing and research capabilities along with years of experience in the design of printers and their applications assures that you will receive the exact materials that you require to maximize the performance of your Printronix printer For more information call the Printronix Customer Support Center at 714 368 2686 or access the Printronix website at http www printronix com ON SITE MAINTENANCE SERVICE Printronix offers on site support services in the United States and Canada Please contact the Printronix Maintenance Contracts Group at 800 854 6463 option 1 for detailed service agreement information RFID Intended use non specific short range device operating in the band 869 4 to 869 95 MHz for Home and Office environment in E E A and Switzerland Wireless Ethernet Intended use Low Power 802 1 1b g radio LAN product operating indoor in 2 4 GHz bands for Home and Office environment in E E A and Switzerland WARNING Lithium Battery The controller board contains a lithium battery sealed inside the real time clock chip Do not disassemble the chip to replace the battery Do not dispose of the chip by incineration Failure to comply may cause the battery to explo
392. st to see if files autodmp1 or autodmp2 are present If present use PrintNet Enterprise Suite to upload these files to your host computer Contact Printronix Customer Support Center and send them the files and the printer s configuration printout Refer to the PrintNet Enterprise Suite User s Manual for instructions to accomplish these tasks 299 Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors Solving other Printer Problems Table 17 Printer Problems and Solutions Symptom Solution Explanation Communications Failures Check the interface cable Check the configuration to ensure the correct interface is enabled Verify the printer is receiving data by viewing the Job In Process indicator on the control panel CONTROL PANEL LCD message display is illuminated and the printer appears to be working but nothing is printing 10 11 12 Verify that the active emulation set on the control panel matches the emulation data sent to the printer Verify that the SFCC selection on the control panel matches the SFCC utilized within the emulation data that is sent to the printer Verify that the labels are the correct type direct or thermal transfer If using direct thermal media check that the media is loaded with the direct thermal side facing up Check that the transfer ribbon is correctly routed Route transfer ribbon with ink side down as it passes under
393. stance of the PDF for UPC EAN barcodes The range is 0 01 0 10 inches in 0 01 inch increments and the factory default is 0 10 inches Lead in Chars You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through standard coax emulations To access these features send text commands in the data stream The commands must have a start and end code Three sets each containing a start and end code are available e User Defined factory default e Seti startcode lt end code gt e Set2 startcode 4 end code e Set3 startcode _ end code _ 208 Emulation Submenus Left Margin Set in characters Character zero is defined as the far left edge of the page and column numbering increments from left to right The range is 0 369 characters and the factory default is 0 characters Logical Buf Size Refers to the size of the printer buffer which should be set the same as the host screen buffer size If the host screen size is unknown use 1920 The options are 960 1920 2560 3440 and 3564 The factory default is 1920 LPI This item selects the number of lines printed per inch The range is 6 10 and the factory default is 6 Max PI 16 e Enable factory default A paper slew of 0 15 will move 1 16 lines e Disable A paper slew of 1 15 will move 1 15 lines A paper slew of 0 will always move 1 line Max Print Width Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using a C T or TN
394. stem to be loaded into main memory An area of storage into which data is read or written temporarily during data transfers Coaxial cable A type of cable with a single wire surrounded by insulation and a braided shield Refers to the operating properties that define how the printer responds to signals and commands received from the host computer at the printer interface These properties are called configuration parameters and are set to match the operating characteristics of the host computer system Media comprised of one continuous length without a gap notch hole or black mark to establish a predetermined label or tag length With this media type the Host Form Length or user selected Label Length sets the desired length of each label A media handling mode that advances media in the forward direction only An independent functional logic unit in a data processing system that controls data paths between one or more units of peripheral equipment 373 Appendix 374 Data Bits Default Diagnostic Direct Thermal Media Direct Thermal Printing DRAM Fanfold Media Flash Memory Font Host Computer Interface Binary information sent to the printer a character set grouping containing letters digits and punctuation marks to be printed A value parameter attribute or option that is assigned by a program or system when another has not been specified by the user Pertaining to the detection a
395. stribution 3 Neither the name s of the above listed copyright holder s nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 389 Appendix J Software License Agreement Limited Software Product Warranty Printronix Inc warrants that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perform in accordance with specifications published by Printronix Inc Printronix Inc does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions Remedy Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Printronix Inc in connection with the Software is replacement of defective software with a c
396. submenus 257 L Label Length option 98 110 LABEL MISSING Check Paper Path fault message 321 Label Peel Off 48 Label Wait Time option 119 Label Width option 99 111 Label Wrap 306 LABEL WRAP Open Head To Clear fault message 322 Labeling Applications 279 Labels printing test 291 LAC Approx option 207 LAC Option option 208 Last Char FF option 208 Latch Data On option 232 Lbl Missing Flt option 120 LCD 23 LCD Fault Message Troubleshooting Table 309 Ld Char at PwrUp option 143 Ld Char from Fls option 143 Ld Set at PwrUp option 143 Ld Set from Fish option 143 Lead PDF Dist option 208 Lead in Chars option 208 Left Margin option 209 Left pressure block 53 Liquid Crystal Display LCD 23 Load Config option 105 Load saved configuration 81 Loading Flash Memory 265 Loading media 28 fanfold 36 roll 29 LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX fault message 323 LOADING PROGRAMINTO FLASH fault message 323 Loading ribbon 28 40 Logical Buf Size option 209 LP Emulation option 138 LPI option 209 MAC Address option 245 250 Main configuration menu 84 Manual Calibrate option 130 Manual calibrate running 66 Manual conventions 15 Mark 59 Max Cache Memory option 146 Max Cached Char option 146 Max Font Buffer option 145 Max PI 16 option 209 Max Print Width option 209 Media 16 345 fanfold 36 general information 334 loading 28 Printronix 345 roll 29 MEDIA CONTROL menu 107 submen
397. t When the printer is first powered on it will complete its initialization and self tests and then perform an Auto Calibrate Once the Auto Calibrate is complete the printer will momentarily display the Sensed Distance determined by the Auto Calibrate Auto Cal will not be performed if Ticket Save is set to Enable Seek TOF Assumes user has already calibrated media and used gap mark sensor This moves the media to TOF Top of Form at power up Seek TOF will not be performed if the Gap Mark Sensor is set to Disable or if the Ticket Save Mode is set to Enable NOTE If Ticket Save mode is enabled you will not be able to set Pwr Up Action to Enable A temporary message Disable Ticket Save Mode will display HeadClose Action Selects whether the printer performs a selected action after a print head open fault condition is cleared Disable factory default No media motion after a print head open fault condition is cleared Auto Cal Performs a media calibration every time the print head open fault condition is cleared Seek TOF Moves the media to TOF Top Of Form when the printhead is closed The media should already be calibrated using Gap Mark sensor NOTE A seek to TOF will not occur if Gap Mark Sensor is set to Disable or Ticket Save Mode is set to Enable NOTE If Ticket Save Mode is enabled you will not be able to set HeadClose Action to Auto Cal or Seek TOF A temporary message Disable Ticket Save Mode
398. t PI line data Conversely when data bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used data bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function and you cannot access characters in the hex 80 FF range Therefore to access characters in the hex 80 FF range data bit 8 must be enabled PI Ignored The PI Paper Instruction signal is used to control vertical paper motion e Enable factory default Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as characters or control codes e Disable Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU commands when the PI signal is true Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the ethernet buffer The range is 1 16 Kbytes 32 Kbytes and 64 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments The factory default is 16 Kbytes Auto Trickle This feature is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the parallel interface is busy for too long e Enable factory default When the printer s buffers are almost full the printer begins to trickle data in from the host at the rate set in the Trickle Time menu until the buffers start to empty out e Disable The Auto Trickle feature is not used PARALLEL PORT Submenus Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second print job is received by the printer from a different host Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed In ord
399. t Type This item allows you to select the type of printer serial port interface RS 232 or RS 422 to be used with its host The serial port can also be disabled The factory default is RS 232 Baud Rate Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer Baud rate is the speed at which serial data is transferred between the host computer and the printer The options for the RS 232 and RS 422 interfaces are 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 Baud NOTE If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200 and you experience data loss you may need to lower the baud rate or use RS 422 You also may need to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve performance The factory default is 9600 Word Length Sets the length of the serial data word The length of the data word can be set to 7 or 8 bits and must match the corresponding data bits setting in the host computer The factory default is 8 Stop Bits Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word Either 1 or 2 stop bits can be selected The setting must match the corresponding stop bit setting in the host computer The factory default is 1 Parity The options are Odd Even Mark Sense or None The setting must match the corresponding parity setting in the host computer The factory default is None SERIAL PORT Submenus Data Protocol You can select one of the following serial interface protocols to meet the host in
400. t exception with allows static links to non copyleft programs Open SSL Copyright 1998 2004 The Open SSL Project All rights reserved This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org Copyright 1995 1998 Eric Young All rights reserved OpenSSL is distributed under the terms of the Open SSL and SSLeay licenses which are both BSD style open source licenses 393 Appendix J _ Warranty Information 394 Index Symbols Dnn Dot Slew option 182 Numerics 06 HOST REQUEST fault message 309 08 HOLD PRINT TIMEOUT fault message 309 1284 parallel interface 284 15 COMM CHECK fault message 309 20 CPI Condensed option 182 203 DPI fault message 310 22 INVALID ADDR fault message 309 27 CU TIMED OUT fault message 310 28 CU NOT ENAB fault message 310 300 DPI fault message 310 33 HEAD OPEN Timeout fault message 310 40V POWER FAIL fault message 310 5225 World Trade option 182 A Absorb After PN option 182 Absorb After PY option 183 Accessories 343 ACK NAK 235 Acoustic noise levels 339 Active Char Set option 183 Active IGP Emul option 139 Active IGP Emulation option 103 Admin User option 144 148 Advanced gap 59 Advanced notch 59 Al 00 Spaces option 183 Alarm option 141 Alarm printer 308 Alt Char Set option 183 Alt Set 80 9F option Coax Twinax TN3270 TN5250 184 Alt Set 80 9F option P Serie
401. t must cool down to the original temperature in the shortest possible time after printing Thus print quality is dependent on the precise control of the energy supplied to the thermal dots The dynamic print control is a method for predicting the quantity of heat required to print dots based on the results of the previous printing This prevents unevenness of print density and results in the printing of narrow ladder bar codes or vertical grid lines that are straight from the microscopic viewpoint Warnings and Special Information For your safety and to protect valuable equipment read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings WARNING Conditions that could harm you and damage the equipment WARNING Achten Sie auf folgendes um keine Personen in Gefahr zu bringen bzw das Gerat zu beschadigen WARNING Condiciones que pueden causar da os a personas y equipos WARNING Conditions a respecter pour viter tout danger corporel et dommage materiel WARNING Condizioni che possono arrecare danni alle persone e alle apparecchiature CAUTION Conditions that could damage the printer or related equipment IMPORTANT Information vital to proper operation of the printer NOTE Information and helpful tips about printer operation Manual Conventions e Operator panel keys are printed in uppercase letters Example Press the PAUSE key and then press ENTER e Operator panel keys are often shown by their symbol or icon loc
402. ter If it does the narrow width will be automatically reduced to the Page Width value set in the configuration menu ALM_ENABLE EJECT IMAGE_SHFT_H N W Value Set Auto Label Mapping to Narrow Wide or Off Enter N for Narrow W for Wide or any other letter to disable ALM By default only the Narrow option is implemented Performs a page eject Shifts the image Value horizontally in 1 1000 units If Value is out of the specified range 1 to 1 the command will be ignored IMAGE_SHFT_V LENGTH Value Value Shifts the image Value vertically in 1 1000 units If Value is out of the specified range 1 to 6 the command will be ignored Sets the page length in 1 1000 units 369 Appendix G The PTX_SETUP Commands Table 33 Thermal PTX_SETUP Commands Command Sub Command Parameter Description ENGINE PRINTJOB 370 MEDIA_HANDLING MIRROR Value Sets the type of media handling 0 Continuous 1 Tear Off Strip 2 Tear Off 3 Peel Off 4 Cut Value of O turns mirroring off non zero turns mirroring on MODE Sets the print mode to Thermal Transfer Sets the print mode to Direct Thermal Sets the page width in 1 1000 units OVERSTRIKE_REPORT ON OFF Enables the ODV unit so that ODV begins verifying printed barcodes Enables disables reporting of RFID overstrikes to the host The default is O
403. terface requirements XON XOFF factory default The printer controls the flow of communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off In some situations such as when the buffer is full or the timing of signals is too slow or too fast the printer will tell the host to stop transmission by sending an XOFF character An XOFF character is sent when the number of empty bytes in the buffer is less than or equal to 25 percent of the buffer size If the host keeps sending data after an XOFF is sent the printer firmware will continue to send an XOFF for every 16 characters received When cleared the printer will resume receiving data XON The data does not have any End of Text codes XON XOFF is a non block protocol ETX ACK End of Text Acknowledge The host controls the flow of communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the block with an End of Text ETX signal When the printer receives the ETX signal it will acknowledge the ETX thereby acknowledging it has received the entire block of data ACK NAK ACK means acknowledge the device acknowledges it has accepted a transmission NAK means negative acknowledge the device did not receive the transmission Series1 1 Char The printer controls the flow of communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off using response characters sent to the host If the number of valid bytes in the buffer reaches 75 percent of the buffer size
404. the next Slew Standard Pitch RFID Labels Stop Bits Thermal Transfer Media Thermal Transfer Printing Transmissive Sensing Twinax Vertical paper movement Labels with RFID inlays that typically have a pitch from 2 0 to 6 0 inches These labels support encoding of the tag and provide ample space to print text graphics barcodes or logos The signal which indicates the end of a character or element Media specifically designed to work with a ribbon for image transfer In Thermal Transfer mode compatibility between the ribbon and the media is critical in producing a high quality long lasting image A printing method in which the printhead presses a specially coated ribbon against the media The printhead elements react with the ribbon and bond the image to the media Use of the upper media sensor to transmit infrared light through the top of media which is then received by the lower media sensor to detect gaps holes or notches for determining the Top of Form position on labels or for indicating a Paper Out condition Twinaxial A type of cable with two wires surrounded by insulation and a braided shield 377 Appendix 378 J Communication Notices and Warranties This information was developed for products and services offered in the U S A Printronix may not offer the products services or features discussed in this document in other countries Consult your Printronix representative for inf
405. the online or offline and buffer full response character is sent If the buffer is completely full an online or offline buffer full response is sent every time a character is sent from the host Whenever the printer state changes to online or offline the appropriate response character is sent If the idle response option is enabled the printer will send a response character every two seconds while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer size If a poll character is received configurable from the Poll Character Xx Hex option on the front panel from hex 0 through FF the printer will send a response character n milliseconds later configurable from the Poll Character xx MS on the front panel from 0 through 30 This n milliseconds is called the poll delay The poll character will be removed from the input data stream and will not be processed This may cause problems with the transmission of binary data e g control codes bit image etc If a poll delay is started due to the receipt of a poll character and another poll character is received the second poll character has no effect and is removed from the input data stream If a transition from buffer full to empty or online to offline occurs during a poll delay the new printer state will be sent at the end of the poll delay 235 Chapter 3 _SERIALPORT The response characters are described below Printer State Response Online and Buff
406. the print job again If the message appears load the latest emulation software 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and follow the instructions for Diagnostics for EOxx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors on page 299 3 Contact your authorized customer service representative E01A TYPE 0x40 Yes E01B TYPE 0x60 E02 MACHINE CHK E03A DSI HASH L E03B DSI HASH S E03C DSI BAT PL E03D DSI BAT PS E03E DSI CXIWX E03F DSI CKOWX E03G DSI ECXIWX E03H DSI ECXOWX E04A ISI NO TRA An illegal or unsupported instruction was attempted in the application program 1 Cycle Power Run the print job again If the message appears load the latest emulation software 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and follow the instructions for Diagnostics for EOxx Bad NVM or ILL NVM Errors E04B ISI DIRECT OU paga 233 E04C ISI PROTEC 3 Contact your authorized E06 NOT ALIGNED customer service E07 ILLEGAL INS representative E08 FLOATINGPNT E NET INIT Yes Ethernet is initializing No action required E NET READY Yes Ethernet has finished No action required initializing 314 Fault Messages Table 18 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message PEREA Explanation Solution E NET RESET Yes Ethernet interface is No action required being reset EC SOFTWARE FA
407. the release lever on the rewinder clockwise Slide the roll of printed labels off the rewinder 47 Chapter 2 Using the Optional Internal Rewinder Label Peel Off You can set up the printer to automatically peel die cut labels off their liner backing and dispense them one at a time while rewinding the liner You can install the paper path to prevent long labels from accidentally adhering to the front door assembly but it is normally not needed when using labels less than two inches long see Installing the Paper Path on page 43 Configuring the Printer Menu 1 Set Media Handling to Peel Off under the QUICK SETUP menu See Chapter 3 Configuring The Printer for more information 2 Press the PAUSE key until OFFLINE displays Loading Media 1 If you want to install the paper path to print long labels do so now by completing the steps listed in Installing the Paper Path on page 43 2 Open the media cover and refer to the Label Peel Off illustration on the Ribbon and Media Loading instruction label on the inside of the cover Pivoting Deck d 0 SS gt O S a Bottom Roller J Deck Lock Paper Path Lever ae Tear Bar 3 Open the front door by pulling it upward then forward 4 Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever clockwise until the deck swings upward 5 Thread the media label and liner over the tear bar and around the bottom roller then through the
408. the serial port buffer The range is 1 16 Kbytes 32 Kbytes and 64 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments NOTE If you select a baud rate that is 19200 or greater you may need to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter from the default to 16 Kbytes to improve performance The factory default is 16 Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed In order to support this feature the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use For example if the printer is printing a job from the serial port and then receives a second print job from the parallel port the data from the parallel port will trickle bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast This function is not applicable for C T hotport The options are 1 4 1 2 1 2 4 8 and 16 seconds and Off The factory default is 1 4 sec Timeout This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and check the other selected Port Types
409. tically Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned fixed information entered when the form is created be overlayed onto the form positioned in a specific location after the form is created or may be dynamically merged with the form Selectable Bar Codes provide you with the appropriate bar code for your application using standard wide to narrow ratios A wide selection of bar codes are available Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 UPC A UPC E MSI A through D Code 128 Subset A B and C EAN UCC 128 EAN 8 EAN 13 POSTNET PostBar USPS Intelligent Mail Royal Mail and PDF417 UPC and EAN bar codes can specify add on data Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where needed Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size up to 11 3 inches wide and tall Compressed print sizes of 12 13 15 and 17 characters per inch cpi are available Logos are created using alphanumeric commands and add many print and shading features for a customized appearance to forms reports and labels Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design Normal expanded and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise or they can be printed upside down Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing white characters on a dark background Automatic Increment Decrement
410. tility 266 Flash contains Boot Code 274 NIC 269 NIC and FTP 270 Parallel Port 267 Printronix Windows Driver 273 Serial Port 266 USB Port 272 DOWNLOADING TO VALIDATOR fault message 314 Downloading TrueType Fonts 275 DRAM Installed option 227 DTR 236 398 Dual NIC 342 Dynamic print control 15 E E00 EXE ADDRO message 314 E01A TYPE 0x40 message 314 E01B TYPE 0x60 message 314 E02 MACHINE CHK message 314 E03A DSI HASH L message 314 E03B DSI HASH S message 314 E03C DSI BAT PL message 314 E03C DSI BAT PS message 314 E03E DSI CXIWX message 314 E03F DSI CXOWX message 314 E03G DSI ECXIWX message 314 E03H DSI ECXOWX message 314 E04A ISI NO TRA message 314 E04B ISI DIRECT message 314 E04C ISI PROTEC message 314 E06 NOT ALIGNED message 314 E07 ILLEGAL INS message 314 E08 FLOATINGPNT message 314 EAP Mode WLAN EAP menu 260 EAP Pswd 01 15 WLAN EAP menu 261 EAP Pswd 16 30 WLAN EAP menu 261 EAP User 01 15 WLAN EAP menu 260 EAP User 16 30 WLAN EAP menu 260 EAP User 31 32 WLAN EAP menu 260 Early Print Cmpl option Coax 197 Early Print Comp option IPDS 197 EC SOFTWARE FAIL fault message 315 Elong Alt Font option 197 Emulation option 198 Emulation submenus 182 Emulations overview 149 E NET INIT fault message 314 E NET READY fault message 314 E NET RESET fault message 315 ENTER to Stop fault message 315 Environmental information 339 Epson Set
411. tion The Continuous option under Media Handling must be enabled for this menu to function 3 In increments of 0 01 inch 4 Available when a 203 DPI printhead is installed 5 Available when a 300 DPI printhead is installed MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Print Intensity This option specifies the level of thermal energy from the printhead to be used for the type of media and ribbon installed Large numbers imply more heat thermal energy to be applied for each dot This has a significant effect on print quality The print intensity and speed must match the media and ribbon type to obtain the best possible print quality and barcode grades The range is from 15 to 15 The factory default is 3 108 MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Print Speed This option specifies the speed in inches per second ips at which the media passes through the printer while printing The range is from 1 to 10 ips in increments of 1 ips The factory default is 6 ips NOTE The maximum print speed varies based on maximum printer width and dot per inch dpi resolution of the printhead installed 203 or 300 dpi See Table 19 on page 333 Print Mode This option specifies the type of printing to be done e Transfer factory default Indicates Thermal Transfer printing ribbon installed e Direct Indicates Direct Thermal printing no ribbon and requires special heat sensitive media Media Handling This option specifies how the printer will han
412. tion Communication Notices This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Fules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Any change or modification to this product voids the user s authority to operate it per FCC Part 15 Subpart A Section 15 21 regulations This product may contain an optimal intentional radiator with the following parameters Operating Frequency 869 525
413. tion Request To Send RTS Control signal from the printer Subject to configuration Clear To Send CTS Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ready to receive data status signals from the printer Data Set Ready DSR Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ina ready condition Data Carrier Detect DCD Status signal to the printer The ON condition is required for the printer to receive data Data Terminal Ready DTR Control signal from the printer Subject to configuration RS 422 NOTE The RS 422 serial interface connector is optional Table 16 RS 422 Serial Interface Connector 9 Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Receive Data RXD 1 Transmit Data TXD 3 Chassis Signal Ground 5 Receive Data RXD 6 Transmit Data TXD 8 288 NOTE RXD and TXD form signal and return paths of a differential line signal RXD RXD Serial data stream differentially received by printer TXD TXD Differentially driven serial data stream for transmitting status and control information to the host Subject to protocol selection RS 422 USB Menus The Universal Serial Bus USB port is part of Auto Switching and is active when the Host Interface menu is set to Auto Switching It can also be selected as the only Host Interface under the Host Interface menu by selecting USB The Host Interface menu is onl
414. tional internal rewinder Configuring the Printer Menu 1 Set Media Handling to Continuous under the QUICK SETUP menu See Chapter 3 Configuring The Printer for more information 2 Press the PAUSE key until OFFLINE displays Installing the Paper Path The paper path must be installed when using Batch Rewind mode 183397a Front Door _ _ Groove To install the paper path 1 Open the front door by pulling it upwards then forward 43 Chapter 2 Using the Optional Internal Rewinder 2 The bottom ofthe plastic paper path is shaped like a hook and the top has a groove a Hook the bottom of the paper path under the bottom edge of the front door b Snap the groove on the paper path to the top edge of the front door 3 Close the front door Loading Media 183398a Rewinder Release Lever Rewinder 1 To load media refer to Loading Roll Media on page 29 and complete steps 1 through 10 44 Batch Rewind Mode Media O Q op lop foe Paper Path Rewinder Release Lever 2 Thread the media over the front of the paper path and through the opening under the front door toward the internal rewinder IMPORTANT Ifyou do not complete the following step it will be extremely difficult to remove the printed labels from the rewinder Raised Ridge Rewinder Releas
415. to select it At any time you may press the key to return to the Main menu 6 Atany time you may press the PAUSE key twice to exit the Configuration menu and place the printer online Once you have finished selecting all your options save your configuration IMPORTANT If you do not save your configuration all your new values will be lost when you power off the printer Saving a Configuration You can save up to eight different configurations to meet eight unique print job requirements These configurations are saved and stored in the printer and are not lost when the printer is turned off NOTE If the Protect Configs option is enabled the new configuration will not be saved until the existing configuration is deleted Follow these steps to save a new configuration 1 Press the key until the following message displays MENU MODE CONFIG CONTROL 2 Press the key until the following message displays Save Config 1 3 Press the or key to cycle through the options 1 8 Note that Factory is not listed because no changes made to the factory configuration can be saved under Factory 76 Auto Save Configuration 4 When the desired number displays press the key to select it The following message displays briefly Saving Configuration When processing is completed the display shows Save Config x NOTE If the configuration number has been previously saved and Prote
416. ts 5 Finnish Turkish Sets 6 English See page 190 7 Dutch 8 French 9 Spanish 10 Italian 11 Turkish 12 CP 437 13 CP 850 Printer PI H Host PI Max PI 16 Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable Disable Notes Factory Default 171 Chapter 3 P SERIES SETUP P SERIES SETUP 3 from page 90 P SERIES SETUP Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Character Character Primary Group Set Subset 10 0 CPI 6 0 LPI Letter Gothic Standard Sets IBM PC ASCII USA 12 0 CPI 8 0 LPI Courier Arabic Sets Multinational French 13 3 CPI 10 3 LPI OCR A Cyrillic Sets EMCA Latin 1 German 15 0 CPI OCR B European Sets DEC Mult English 17 1 CPI Greek Sets CP 858 EURO Danish 20 0 CPI Hebrew Sets Swedish Turkish Sets Italian UTF 8 Spanish Japanese See page 191 French Canadian Latin American Norwegian Danish II Spanish II Latin Am II Extended Horizontal Vertical Prop Italic Slashed Subset DPI DPI Spacing Print Zero Code Page 437 120 DPI 72 DPI Enable Disable Enable Code Page 850 60 to 400 DPI 72 to 400 DP Disable Forward Slant Disable Backward Slant Left Right Top Bottom Print Char Define CR Margin Margin Margin Margin Set Code 0 characters 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces CR CR 0 to 369 characters Oto 369 c
417. u try to do a Manual Calibrate when Peel Off Media Handling is enabled the LCD will display CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel Off Before you can do a Manual Calibrate you must select another media handling mode 1 Press to place the printer in Menu mode 2 Press the J and keys together until ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED displays 3 Press until PRINTER CONTROL displays Press 7 until Admin User displays then press until Enable displays oN oo Running Manual Calibrate Press 1 to select Enable An asterisk appears next to Enable Press until CALIBRATE CTRL displays Press 4 until Manual Calibrate Run Calibrate displays then press the Follow the instructions displayed on the LCD Example REMOVE RBN amp MEDIA Press Enter indicates that you must open the pivoting deck and remove the ribbon and media from under the printhead close and lock the pivoting deck and press the key During the last step of Manual Calibrate the printer will advance the media and attempt to detect the label length indicators and stop at the Top of Form position The Sensed Distance value will then display for one second The calibrate is successful when the Sensed Distance value correctly matches that of the installed media If CALIBRATION FAIL See Manual displays run Manual Calibrate again NOTE The amount of media sampled during Manual Calibrate is based on the length of a la
418. ue sns qaydeyD A S10 291pu pue S 01 U09 Stays lit when data has Stays lit when data has been processed and is been processed and is waiting to be printed waiting to be printed Off when no data is Off when no data is being received or when being received or when no data remains in the no data remains in the buffer buffer Ge Button UL PAUSE Description PAUSE Key Toggles the printer between Online and Offline Modes Function in Online Mode Sets printer to Offline Mode Function in Offline Mode Sets printer to Online Mode Function in Menu Mode Sets printer to Offline Mode JOB SELECT TEST PRINT JOB SELECT Key DECREMENT Key in Menu Mode FEED Key UP Key in Menu Mode TEST PRINT Key Pressing the ENTER key with a Diagnostic Test displayed initiates the test Pressing again terminates the test INCREMENT Key in Menu Mode Advances the media one label length Displays the name and number of the last loaded configuration and allows you to load the factory and or pre stored printer configurations Advances the media one label length Selects the Printer Tests menu and scrolls through the Test Print patterns See Printer Tests on page 226 Scrolls left through main menus Decrements option values within submenus Scrolls the current menu selection one level up Scrolls right through main menus Increments option
419. ueType fonts allow you to customize the look of your forms and labels You are able to download TrueType fonts purchased from various sources into your printer The fonts are available for purchase on websites such as www fonts com and www myfonts com The following sections discuss how to e Download TrueType fonts see below e Select and print TrueType fonts see page 280 Downloading TrueType Fonts You can download TrueType fonts to your printer by using any of the following e Printronix Windows Driver e PGL Emulation Online e Download Mode after adding a header e PTX_SETUP e Labeling Applications Once a TrueType font is downloaded it will be stored in the Flash File System as a resident font Regardless of printer power cycles the downloaded font will stay in the printer until the user deletes it The user can find the list of all printer resident fonts under PRINTER CONTROL View File List after enabling Admin User in the Printer Control menu To delete a downloaded font from the Flash File System the user should select the font under PRINTER CONTROL Delete File List and then select Optimize amp Reboot 275 Chapter 4 Downloading TrueType Fonts NOTE A will be added in front of the selected file name to indicate that the file has been deleted The deleted file name will not be removed from the View File List and Delete File List until the user selects Optimize amp Reboot Printronix Win
420. um Auto Labels to 2 and enables the Auto Label Mapping feature Printer Operation The printer will print the first leftmost 4 label first Once the first label has been completed the printer will print the second 4 label These labels will appear vertically adjacent on the form Thermal Printer Output Line Matrix Printer Output Label 1 Label 1 Label2 Label 2 i le Wide Web Width o Narrow Web Width 115 Chapter 3 116 MEDIA CONTROL Example 2 Uneven Number Case Problem A file has been constructed with three horizontally adjacent 2 labels The user now desires to use this file with a printer that has a 4 physical width Solution 1 The user sets Auto Label Width to 4 the width of two labels configures the Num Auto Labels to 2 and enables the Auto Label Mapping feature Printer Operation for Solution 1 The printer will print the first two labels at the same time These first two labels will be horizontally adjacent Once these labels have been completed the printer will print the remaining 2 labels along with a blank 2 label File Contents Print Output Label 1 Label 2 Label 3 Label 1 Label 2 Blank Label 3 Label Solution 2 The user s
421. uperior print quality for coated and uncoated paper and tag stocks Printronix Wax Resin Blend Ribbon 8500 Provides excellent high speed print quality with premium durability performance on a wide range of thermal transfer receptive papers and films Printronix Flood Coat Specialty Wax Resin Blend Ribbon 8550 Designed for use on spot coated and flood coated labels With this ribbon the need for protective varnishes on flood coated labels is eliminated which can reduce the cost of labels Printronix Specialty Resin Ribbon 8600 A premium resin formula for excellent image and scuff resistance while achieving premium print quality on a wide range of synthetic films and coated papers Printronix Harsh Environment Resin Ribbon 8700 Provides the highest heat chemical and abrasion resistance for use with high end synthetic facestocks When used with the proper polyester media meets UL CSA regulatory requirements Printronix Gasoline Resistant Specialty Resin Ribbon 8770 Designed for high temperature and solvent resistance applications using synthetic facestocks media such as polypropylene polyethylene and polyester All ribbons are available in widths of 2 36 60mm 3 15 80mm 4 33 110mm 5 12 130mm 6 00 152 4mm 6 70 171mm and 8 67 220mm Genuine Printronix Media Genuine Printronix Media Printronix provides a wide variety of sizes colors and shapes of labels and tags readily available
422. ure is used to improve the sensitivity and reliability of the Media Sensors in detecting gaps notches holes or black marks on the installed media as well as a paper out condition NOTE Prior to running Auto Calibrate you must enter the physical length of the installed media in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu Selecting the correct Label Length forces Auto Calibrate to increase media advancement for long labels to detect actual gaps notches or marks and decrease advancement for short labels You can initiate Auto Calibrate from the TEST PRINT key the CALIBRATE CTRL menu or the DIAGNOSTIC menu When Auto Calibrate displays on the LCD press the key The printer advances media the distance needed to accurately detect the label length indicators then stops at the Top of Form position and momentarily displays the Sensed Distance This process takes a few seconds to complete and results in changes to the values the printer uses for Gap Mark Threshold Paper Out Threshold and Sensed Distance These value changes take effect immediately within the current configuration menu CALIBRATE CTRL Submenus Auto Calibrate is completed successfully when the Sensed Distance displayed correctly matches that of the installed media When Gap is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing edge of one gap to the trailing edge of the next gap one label one gap When Mark is selected the Sensed Distance should mat
423. us 108 Media cutter 13 341 351 installing 351 Media cutter tray 13 341 355 359 installing 355 359 Media Damper cleaning 72 Media dimensions 335 Media handling modes 27 continuous 27 cut 28 peel off 28 tear off 27 tear off strip 27 Media Handling option 97 109 Media profile 62 Media Profile option 129 403 Media sensing dark background media with notches or holes 58 with dark background labels with gaps 57 with gaps notches or holes 56 with horizontal black marks 55 Media sensor 54 calibrating 60 disable 59 gap 59 mark 59 positioning 54 Media Sensor cleaning 70 Media specifications matrix 335 Memory expansion for non IPDS printers only 13 Memory specifications 336 Menu mode 27 MENU MODE QUICK SETUP fault message 323 Menu options selecting 74 Menu overview 82 Menus filename extensions not shown 279 Mgmt Port Number option 262 Mgmt Protocol option 262 Midline PY includes PN option 209 Min Calib Delta option 133 Min Xfer Rate option 254 Minute option 263 Modifying saved configurations 79 Month option 263 N Name Config 1 8 option 106 NetBIOS Protocol option 247 Network Interface Card 13 Nibble mode 284 NIC and FTP downloading software 270 NIC downloading software 269 NL at MPP 1 option 210 NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED fault message 323 Notches 56 Null Handling option 210 Null Suppression option Coax TN3270 210 404 Null Suppres
424. us See Software Migration Tools SMT in the RFID Labeling Reference Manual e Disable factory default The printer disables the use of the Software Migration Tools functionality e Enable The printer enables the use of the Software Migration Tools functionality PAA Select Tool Refer to the PrintNet Enterprise Suite User s Manual e Disable factory default The printer disables the use of PAA functionality e Enable The printer enables the use of PAA functionality 137 Chapter 3 138 PRINTER CONTROL LP Emulation This item selects the line or dot matrix printer to be emulated by the printer P Series see page 172 P Series XQ see page 174 Serial Matrix see page 176 Proprinter XL see page 178 Epson FX see page 180 The factory default is P Series CTHI Emulation This item appears only when the CTHI option is installed CTHI Emulation selects the operation of the CTHI option as either a standard or simple protocol converter Standard With a standard coax interface the printer emulates the following IBM coax printer models e 3287 Models 1 and 2 e 4234 Model 1 With a standard twinax interface the printer emulates the following IBM twinax printer models e 4234 Model 2 e 5225 Models 1 2 3 and 4 The standard Coax Twinax emulation selection will only be available if Coax or Twinax is selected from the HOST INTERFACE menu NOTE For more information consult the Coax Tw
425. us to the host before the printer is actually done printing all data This option is valid only when the printer is in DSC DSE mode e Disable factory default The printer will suppress the Early Print Complete response until all printing is complete e Enable The printer will send an acknowledgement to the host when it is able to accept more data NOTE When an Early Print Complete is enabled and an error occurs there may be data loss Early Print Comp IPDS This parameter allows you to choose when to send a Print Complete to the Controller e Off factory default Print Complete is sent if the page is printed completely e On Print Complete is sent immediately The next page will be created This improves the print performance when starting the next page but degrades error recovery Elong Alt Font Controls which host command sets elongated double high fonts and extended character set e ELNG BS hex 08 FONT SO hex 0E e ELNG SO FONT BS The factory default is Elng BS Font SO 197 Chapter 3 198 EPSON FX SETUP Emulation This item allows you to select the desired IPDS emulation either 4028 IPDS or 3816 IPDS The factory default is 4028 IPDS Epson Set This item allows you to select the Epson character subset used by the printer The options are listed on page 188 The factory default is ASCII USA ESC d command This item is for backward compatibility e Even dot plot factory default
426. use The printer defaults to using a threshold range of 50 of the positive going pulse see Media Profile that represents each gap notch or mark detected after doing an Auto or Manual Calibrate The printer then detects anything within the label with that threshold range as TOF While this range is ideal for most medias some labels with a preprinted image liner gap or inlay can confuse the media sensor s causing a false TOF detection In most cases this can be resolved by selecting a higher threshold range so the printer will only trigger on the true TOF gap notch or mark position NOTE A new threshold range will not take affect until an Auto or Manual Calibrate is successfully performed A Media Profile should be run after a Calibrate to visually verify that the new range is the best possible selection The range is 5 to 95 in 5 increments The factory default is 50 PRINTER CONTROL PRINTER CONTROL from page 85 SMT Status 3 L__ PAA Select __ LP CTHI Active IGP __ XXX Tool 4 Emulation Emulation Emul Diagnostics Disable None See page 137 Standard PGL See footnote 5 Enable CST 1 Simp Prot Conv ZGL CST 2 TGL IGL STGL DGL IEGL MGL VGL Host Power Saver Pwr Save Display Alarm Power up Interface Time Control Language State
427. use problems Data Exchange Both of these test procedures are covered in this chapter Configuration items to check include the following e Check that the data string being sent to the printer contains the correct information e Verify that the correct host interface port is being used and that the communication parameters match those of the host e g baud rate parity etc e Verify that the correct interface cable is installed between the host and the printer Interfacing The printer will not function properly with an incorrectly wired cable or the wrong interface cable installed If the cable is suspect contact Printronix or your authorized service representative When the printer is first powered up it will reset itself to the communication default parameters The parameters are listed in the following table PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE Baud 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity NONE Stop Bits 1 The printer interface configuration settings may be entered from the control panel See Chapter 3 Configuring The Printer for complete instructions 293 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Common Situations Controlling Print Quality Three factors have the greatest effect on print quality e The amount of heat applied by the printhead print intensity e The speed at which media is moving under the printhead print speed e The amount of printhead pressure For example low cost direct thermal media often has very h
428. used to detect the presence of media in the paper path as well as the gap notch or hole position of Transmissive media or the horizontal black mark on Reflective media See RAM Nonvolatile Memory DRAM and Flash Memory Nonvolatile memory stores variables that must be preserved when the printer is turned off such as configuration parameters and printer usage statistics Acronym of Nonvolatile Random Access Memory See Nonvolatile Memory Parity checking is the addition of a non data bit to data resulting in the number of 1 bits being either always even or always odd Parity is used to detect transmission errors Parity represents value in the check digit of the received or transmitted data Printed Circuit Board Assembly A PCB with components ICs resistors capacitors etc installed 375 Appendix PGL Pitch RFID Port Protocol RAM Reflective Sensing Resolution RFID Encoder Roll Media Sensed Distance 376 Intelligent Graphics Printing software for the Printronix Graphics Language designated for Printronix printers PGL provides online forms barcodes and many alphanumeric text generation capabilities and is compatible with earlier versions of Printronix PGL protocol and programming In the RFID industry pitch is defined as the distance from one point on an inlay to the same point on the next inlay A data channel used for receiving data from or transmitting data to one or
429. uses the Auto Calibrate process to advance media the minimum distance required to detect the true gap notch hole or black mark used for TOF Top of Form sensing This resolves problems where the sensor s may mistake high noise levels or preprinted images within the label as the gap notch hole or black mark that could result in a sensed distance value much shorter than the actual label length Example A 0 2 inch calibrated Sensed Distance with a 3 0 inch long label installed NOTE Setting the Label Length value less than half the actual length of the label in use will result in erroneous Sensed Distance values when Auto Calibrate is performed e Disable Auto Calibrate relies exclusively in its ability to detect varying transitions between labels and gaps notches holes or black marks while advancing media during the calibrate process to determine Sensed Distance The amount of media advanced is based on the number of transitions detected NOTE Although the Use Label Length keeps its value enable disable at all times it will always be disabled when Set Label Length is set to Automatic The correct setting will take effect when Set Label Length is set to manual Based on the setting on the Set Label Length menu in the Media Control menu the Use Label Length menu will be ignored disabled Threshold Range This option allows the user to select the optimal threshold range for the label stock in
430. ut tags and label liner Table 25 4 6 and 8 inch Models Typical Life gt 1 000 000 cuts Warranty 500 000 cuts Environment Same specifications as printer Cutting Method Rotating single edged blade Media Thickness Range 0 0025 to 0 010 in 0 064 to 0 254 mm Media Width Range Same range as printer Media Length Range 1 00 to 99 in 25 4 to 2515 mm Warranty is based on cutting label liner and paper based tag stock only All other materials including synthetic foil and woven materials may reduce cutter life to an indeterminate amount even when they are within the rated media thickness specification Qualification and life testing is recommended for these cutter applications 337 Appendix A Host Interfaces Table 26 Host Interface Characteristics 1 Serial RS 232 or RS 422 at 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 baud 2 Parallel Centronics compatible or IEEE 1284 bi directional 3 USB 2 0 4 Ethernet 10 100 or wireless The RS 232 and optional RS 422 host interfaces shall have the following characteristics Word Length Selectable 7 bit or 8 bit data format Handshaking XON XOFF in receive mode only and CTS DTR Input Buffer Selectable from 1k through 16 kbytes XOFF is transmitted and DTR goes low when buffer is equal to or less than 25 of full XON is transmitted and DTR goes high when buffer is 25 above empty Character
431. ware and commercial computer software documentation as such terms are used in 48 C F R 12 212 Sept 1995 Consistent with 48 C F R 12 212 and 48 C F R 227 7202 1 through 227 7202 4 June 1995 all U S Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein 7 Miscellaneous This Agreement represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof If any provision of this Agreement is held to be unenforceable This Agreement shall be governed by California law provisions except to the extent applicable law if any provides otherwise excluding its conflict of law provisions 385 Appendix J Software License Agreement 8 eCos Software eCos is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation version 2 or a later eCos is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANT ABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should receive a copy of the GNU General Public License along with eCos If not write to Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA As special exception if other files instantiate templates or use macros or inline functions from this file you could compile this file and link it with other works to produce work based on this file This file
432. y available when the Admin User menu is enabled A top level USB Port menu with two submenus is also available e Buffer Size in K the input buffer size used by the USB port The range is from 1 to 16 The default is 16 e Timeout the Hotport Timeout value used to determine when the port is inactive The range is from 1 to 60 seconds The default is 10 seconds Ethernet and Wireless Refer to the Integrated Network Interface User s Manual for detailed information on the ethernet and wireless interface 289 Chapter_ 5 _ Ethernet and Wireless 290 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Printer Tests A sequence of automatic tests is performed during printer power up If any faults are detected at that time a fault message will display Before setting the printer for online operation run test patterns to ensure proper operation and print quality The printer has a number of tests which allow you to check for proper printer operation and print quality You can invoke the various test patterns from the TEST PRINT key or the DIAGNOSTICS menu For more information see page 226 NOTE Before attempting to print test labels you must set up the printer for the type of media installed See the MEDIA CONTROL menu on page 107 for more information Troubleshooting Common Situations Occasionally situations occur that require some troubleshooting skill Possible problem situations and potential solutions are listed in this
433. y entering one file name per the copy command or you can copy multiple files in one copy command To download one file at a time enter the following at the command prompt copy b filename dwn LPT1 lt Enter gt To download multiple files enter the following at the command prompt for example copy b filenamel1 dwn filename2 dwn LPT1 lt Enter gt 11 While the font file is copied into the flash memory the printer LCD informs you of the download process and status After the new file successfully downloads into memory the printer resets itself and goes online 12 To verify that the fonts have been downloaded NOTE Admin User must be set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu See page 136 a Perform aconfiguration printout OR b Select PRINTER CONTROL P View File List The new file names will appear with the same part number file name you downloaded but with an ttf extension NOTE The font typefaces cannot be selected via the printer control panel They can only be selected via a software command from the host 13 Press the PAUSE key to place the printer online and return the printer to normal operation 278 PTX_SETUP PTX_SETUP PTX_SETUP can be used to download TrueType fonts into the file system Please see the PTX_SETUP chapter in the PGL Programmer s Reference Manual for details Example PTX_SETUP FILE_1O CAPTURE ARIAL TTF PTX_END Arial TrueType font binary data NOTE Do
434. y the printer Indicates the printer is in a fault condition Data bits 3 and 7 in Nibble Mode Xflag Driven by the printer A high true level indicating the printer is ready for data transfer and the printer is online Data bits 2 and 6 in Nibble Mode Host Busy Host Acknowledge NDStrobe Driven by the host Activates auto line feed mode Peripheral Logic High Driven by the printer When the line is high the printer indicates all of its signals are in a valid state When the line is low the printer indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state RS 232 and Optional RS 422 Serial Interfaces nReverse Request Driven by the host Resets the interface and forces a return to Compatibility Mode idle phase nData Available nPeripheral Request Driven by the printer Indicates the printer has encountered an error Data bits 1 and 5 in Nibble Mode 1284 Active nAStrobe Driven by the host A peripheral device is selected Host Logic High Driven by the host When set to high the host indicates all of its signals are in a valid state When set to low the host indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state ninit Resets init interface from the host RS 232 and Optional RS 422 Serial Interfaces NOTE The RS 232 and RS 422 serial interface circuit characteristics are compatible with the Electronic Industry Association Specifications EIA 232 E and EIA 422 B The RS 232 and RS 4

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Eko 2030 Installation instructions [EN] A:XL09 Installation  R&S ZNC Guide de demarrage rapide  Panasonic SCPT950 Speaker System User Manual  HDMI on Dual UTP Extender  KAWAI CA93/CA63 Owner's Manual (German)  Manual del Operador GTH 4013 SX GTH 4017 SX    Guide des Retraites  2248 EASY2-8LOOP-G/N  Presonus Audio electronic Monitor Station Remote Remote Starter User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file